Ka Ho‘oilinathe legacy

Puke PAI ‘Ölelo Hawai‘iJOURNAL OF HAWAIIAN LANGUAGE SOURCES

He mälama pono ‘ia ma nä hale waihona palapala

kahiko like ‘ole ma kahi o ka hapahä miliona ‘ao‘ao

i pa‘i ‘ia ma ka ‘ölelo Hawai‘i; ‘o ia mau ‘ao‘ao ka

Ho‘oilina Hawai‘i, kekahi o nä waihona palapala

kahiko ‘öiwi nui loa o ka honua nei a puni. Pa‘i ‘ia

ma loko o këia puke pai nä Palapala Ho‘oilina ma

ka pela kumu, ka pela hö‘ano hou, a me ka unuhi

‘ölelo Pelekänia me nä kuhia kikokikona a me nä

‘ölelo mua ma nä ‘ölelo ‘elua.

No ka Mahi‘ai ‘Ana, Mähele 1. Pa‘i ‘ia me nä unuhi

na ka loea ‘imi na‘auao Hawai‘i ‘o Mary Kawena

Pukui.

Nä Kumukänäwai o ka Makahiki 1839 a me ka

1840. Kekahi o nä kumukänäwai kahiko loa o ka

honua nei.

Nä Nüpepa o ka Makahiki 1834, Mähele 1. Nä

nüpepa mua loa o Hawai‘i nei.

Nä Nüpepa o ka Makahiki 1892, Mähele 1. Nä

‘atikala mai këlä makahiki ko‘iko‘i a hiki i ka

ho‘okahuli ‘ia ‘ana o ke aupuni mö‘ï.

Ka Mo‘olelo o Kahahana, Mähele 1. Ka mähele mua

o ka mo‘olelo no kekahi o nä mö‘ï hope o O‘ahu;

käkau ‘ia e Samuel Kamakau, MH 1867.

Ka Puke Haumäna ‘o ‘Anatomia, Mähele 1. Ka

mähele mua o ka puke no ka ‘anatomia kanaka no

ke Kulanui o Hawai‘i ma Lahaina Luna, MH 1838.

He Ho‘omaika‘i Küikawä i nä Känaka Maka‘ala i ka

Palekana o ka Lehulehu. Ke känäwai o ka MH 1851 i

ho‘okumu ‘ia ai ka ‘Oihana Kinai Ahi o Honolulu,

kekahi o nä ‘oihana aupuni kahiko loa o ‘Amelika

Hui Pü ‘Ia.

Perhaps a quarter-million pages of Hawaiian

language materials, carefully preserved and safe-

guarded by several different archives and libraries,

make up the Hawaiian Legacy; together they repre-

sent one of the largest indigenous archives in the

world. Legacy Materials are presented here in their

original spelling, in modern Hawaiian spelling, and

in English translation, accompanied by bilingual

introductions and textual notes.

Agricultural Lore, Part 1. Includes edited transla-

tions from Hawaiian scholar Mary Kawena Pukui.

The 1839 and 1840 Constitutions. Among the oldest

constitutions in the world.

The 1834 Newspapers, Part 1. The oldest newspa-

pers of Hawai‘i.

The 1892 Newspapers, Part 1. Articles from the criti-

cal year leading up to the overthrow of the monarchy.

The Story of Kahahana, Part 1. One of the last kings

of O‘ahu. Written by the noted Hawaiian historian

Samuel Kamakau in 1867.

Students’ Materials, Anatomy, Part 1. The first

installment of a human anatomy textbook from the

College of Hawai‘i at Lahaina Luna, 1838.

A Special Tribute to Public Safety Personnel. The

1851 legislation that established the Honolulu Fire

Department, one of the oldest organized fire depart-

ments in the United States.

ISSN 1535-3133

university

of hawai‘i

p r e s s

PUKE (volume) 1 HELU (ISSUE) 1 MALAKI (MARCH) 2002

KamehamehaSchoolsPress

Ka ‘Ölelo Mua na ka Luna Ho‘oponopono

(Editor’s Introduction) iii

Kuhia Puke Kümole

(Bibliographic Sources) v i

Ka Papa Kaha

(Table of Marks) 1

No ka Mahi‘ai ‘Ana, Mähele 1

(Agricultural Lore, Part 1) 2

Noelani Arista, laekahi ‘ölelo (senior language specialist)

Nä Kumukänäwai o ka Makahiki 1839 a me ka 1840

(The 1839 and 1840 Constitutions) 30

Jason Käpena Achiu, laekahi ‘ölelo (senior language specialist)

Nä Nüpepa o ka Makahiki 1834, Mähele 1

(The 1834 Newspapers, Part 1) 60

Kapulani Antonio läua ‘o (and) Lökahi Antonio, nä laekahi ‘ölelo

(senior language specialists)

Nä Nüpepa o ka Makahiki 1892, Mähele 1

(The 1892 Newspapers, Part 1) 90

Kaliko Trapp, laekahi ‘ölelo (senior language specialist)

Ka Mo‘olelo o Kahahana, Mähele 1

(The Story of Kahahana, Part 1) 102

Hiapo Perreira, laekahi ‘ölelo (senior language specialist)

Ka Puke Haumäna ‘o ‘Anatomia, Mähele 1

(Students’ Materials, Anatomy, Part 1) 122

Kaliko Trapp, laekahi ‘ölelo (senior language specialist)

puke (volume) 1 helu (issue) 1 malaki (march) 2002

Papa Kuhikuhi (Contents)

Luna Ho‘oponopono (Editor)

Kalena Silva, Ka Haka ‘Ula O Ke‘elikölani (College of Hawaiian Language),

Ke Kulanui o Hawai‘i ma Hilo (University of Hawai‘i at Hilo)

Hope Luna Ho‘oponopono (Associate Editor)

Janet Zisk, Hale Waihona Palapala Kahiko o Nä Kula ‘o Kamehameha (Kamehameha Schools Archives)

Ho‘okahua ‘ia e ALU LIKE

(Founded by ALU LIKE)

Käko‘o pü ‘ia e

(Cosponsored by)

‘AHA PÜNANA LEO

(Language Nest Organization)

‘AHAHUI ‘ÖLELO HAWAI‘I

(Hawaiian Language Association)

KA HAKA ‘ULA O KE‘ELIKÖLANI,

KE KULANUI O HAWAI‘I MA HILO

(College of Hawaiian Language, University of Hawai‘i at Hilo)

KAMAKAKÜOKALANI, KE KULANUI O HAWAI‘I MA MÄNOA

(Gladys K. ‘Ainoa Brandt Center for Hawaiian Studies, University of Hawai‘i at Mänoa)

KÖMIKE MÄLAMA A KILO I KA MO‘OMEHEU, PÄHEONA A ‘ÖLELO HAWAI‘I, KE KULANUI O HAWAI‘I MA MÄNOA

(Committee for the Preservation & Study of Hawaiian Language, Arts & Culture, University of Hawai‘i at Mänoa)

LEO KAIÄULU HAWAI‘I

(Native Hawaiian Community Based Education Learning Center)

KE‘ENA ‘ÖLELO HAWAI‘I,

KE KULANUI O HAWAI‘I MA MÄNOA

(Hawaiian Language Section, University of Hawai‘i at Mänoa)

‘OIHANA HO‘ONA‘AUAO O HAWAI‘I

(State Department of Education)

Kuleana kope © 2002 na Nä Kula ‘o Kamehameha

Copyright © 2002 by Kamehameha Schools

Ka Ho‘oilinathe legacy

Ho‘opuka ‘ia ‘o Ka Ho‘oilina: Puke Pai ‘Ölelo Hawai‘i (The Legacy:

Journal of Hawaiian Language Sources) ‘elua manawa o ka makahiki e

ka Hale Pa‘i o Nä Kula ‘o Kamehamehame ke kökua o ka Hale Pa‘i o Ke

Kulanui o Hawai‘i no ALU LIKE.

‘O ke kumu kü‘ai makahiki (2002) no ka hui, he $80 ‘Amelika; no ke

kanaka, he $40 ‘Amelika. No nä kope päkahi, he $50 ‘Amelika no ka hui,

$25 ‘Amelika no ke kanaka. No ka ho‘ouna ‘ana aku i nä wahi ma waho

o ‘Amelika ma ka halilele ‘ana, he $24 ‘Amelika no ka puke päkahi, a he

$12 ‘Amelika no ka pukana ho‘okahi.

E käkau i pila kïko‘o a pila ‘oka kälä paha ma ke kälä ‘Amelika i ka

University of Hawai‘i Press a ho‘ouna aku i ka University of Hawai‘i

Press, Journals Department, 2840 Kolowalu Street, Honolulu, Hawai‘i

96822, USA.

Pa‘i ‘ia ma ‘Amelika Hui Pü ‘Ia.

E ka Luna Leka, e ho‘ouna mai i nä helu wahi i loli iä Ka Ho‘oilina, 2840

Kolowalu Street, Honolulu, Hawai‘i 96822, USA.

Ua kü ka pepa o nei puke i nä koina palena iki o ka American National

Standard for Library Sciences – Permanence of Paper for Publications

and Documents in Libraries and Archives ANSI/NISO Z39.48-1992

(R1997).

Ka Ho‘oilina: Puke Pai ‘Ölelo Hawai‘i (The Legacy: Journal of Hawaiian

Language Sources) is published semi-annually by Kamehameha Schools

Press in association with University of Hawai‘i Press for ALU LIKE.

Annual subscription rates (2002) for institutions are US$80; rates for

individuals are US$40. Single copies are US$50 for institutions, US$25

for individuals. Airmail delivery to non-U.S. addresses is US$24 per

year, US$12 for a single issue.

Check or money order in U.S. funds should be made payable to

University of Hawai‘i Press and sent to University of Hawai‘i Press,

Journals Department, 2840 Kolowalu Street, Honolulu, Hawai‘i 96822,

USA.

Printed in the United States of America.

Postmaster: Send address changes to Ka Ho‘oilina, 2840 Kolowalu

Street, Honolulu, Hawai‘i 96822, USA.

The paper used in this publication meets the minimum requirements

of the American National Standard for Library Sciences – Permanence

of Paper for Publications and Documents in Libraries and Archives

ANSI/NISO Z39.48-1992 (R1997).

ISSN 1535-3133

The Hawaiian Language Legacy Program

(Papahana Ho‘oilina ‘Ölelo Hawai‘i) was created

to preserve, publish and disseminate 19th and

20th century Hawaiian language materials (col -

lectively called here the “Legacy Materials”) for

the teaching and revitalization of the Hawaiian

language and culture.

The rules and policies that direct the work of the

journal exceed 100 pages and are available at the

journal’s website <http://hooilina.olelo.hawaii

.edu>.

In each issue, the journal provides information

from six major sources:

* Edited works from the “Hawaiian Ethno-

graphic Notes” (HEN) collection, consisting

of materials mainly selected and translated in

draft form by Mary Kawena Pukui, starting

with agricultural lore.

* Government documents, starting with the

constitutions.

* Chronological newspapers, starting in 1834

with the first paper.

* Chronological newspapers from historically

critical times, starting with the newspapers of

1892.

* Humanities pieces, including stories, chants

and other literature, beginning with the story

of Kahahana.

Ua ho‘okumu ‘ia ka Papahana Ho‘oilina ‘Ölelo

Hawai‘i (Hawaiian Language Legacy Program)

me ka mana‘o e mälama, ho‘opuka a ho‘olaha

aku i nä ‘ölelo Hawai‘i i palapala ‘ia ma ke

kenekulia 19 me ka 20 (i kapa ‘ia ma ‘ane‘i ‘o nä

“Palapala Ho‘oilina”) i mea a‘o e ola a laupa‘i ai

ka ‘ölelo a mo‘omeheu Hawai‘i.

No nä lula me nä kulekele e ho‘okele nei i ka

hana ma këia puke pai, e kipa i ke kahua

pünaewele <http://hooilina.olelo.hawaii.edu>.

Ma këlä pukana këia pukana o nei puke pai, e

ho‘okomo ‘ia ka ‘ike o nä molekumu nui he ‘eono.

* Nä ‘atikala i loihape ‘ia mai ka ‘ohina

“Hawaiian Ethnographic Notes” (HEN) i

koho a unuhi kämua ‘ia e Mary Kawena

Pukui, e ho‘omaka ana me ka mo‘olelo no

ka mahi‘ai ‘ana.

* Nä palapala aupuni, e ho‘omaka ana me nä

kumukänäwai.

* Nä nüpepa, e ho‘omaka ana me ka nüpepa

mua mai ka makahiki 1834.

* Nä nüpepa o nä wä huliau, e ho‘omaka ana

me nä nüpepa o ka makahiki 1892.

* Nä kumuhana päkanaka, ‘o ia ho‘i, nä

mo‘olelo, nä mele a me nä ‘ano mo‘okalaleo

‘ë a‘e, e ho‘omaka ana me ka mo‘olelo o

Kahahana.

Ka ‘Ölelo MuaNA ka Luna Ho‘oponopono

(EDITOR’S INTRODUCTION)

He Ho‘omaika‘i Küikawä i nä Känaka Maka‘ala i ka Palekana

o ka Lehulehu

(A Special Tribute to Public Safety Personnel) 138

Jason Käpena Achiu, laekahi ‘ölelo (senior language specialist)

Nä ‘Ölelo Ho‘omaika‘i

(Acknowledgments) 161

Nä Loihape (Copyeditors):

D. Mähealani Dudoit

Kaleo Kamai

Sahoa Fukushima

Nä Luna Loihape (Senior Reviewers):

‘Ioli‘i Hawkins

Naomi Losch

Puakea Nogelmeier

Kalena Silva

Pila Wilson

Ua haku ‘ia ‘o “puke pai” no ka hua ‘ölelo

Pelekänia ‘o “journal” me ka mana‘o e pai ‘ia, ‘o

ia ho‘i, e häpai ‘ia kekahi kumuhana i mua o ka

lehulehu heluhelu.

Ke ki‘i ma ka ‘ili o mua: Ka ‘ao‘ao mua o ka

pukana mua o Ka Lama Hawai‘i, ka nüpepa mua

loa o Hawai‘i, ‘o ia ka Palapala Ho‘oilina kahiko

loa ma këia pukana o Ka Ho‘oilina. Aia ma ko ke

ki‘i kä‘ei kua he moena makaloa (Cyperus laevi-

gatus). ‘O ia kekahi o nä hana lima no‘eau nani

lua ‘ole o Hawai‘i nei. ‘Ae ‘olu‘olu ‘ia mai e ka

mea pa‘i ki‘i ‘o David Franzen.

The term “puke pai” has been coined as an

equivalent for “journal” because a journal is a

publication (“puke”) that promotes (“pai”) a

subject area.

Cover photograph: The first page of the first

issue of Ka Lama Hawai‘i, the first newspaper in

Hawai‘i, and the carrier of the oldest Legacy

Material provided in this issue of Ka Ho‘oilina.

The background photograph shows a makaloa

mat, woven from the makaloa perennial sedge

(Cyperus laevigatus), a material art unique to

Hawai‘i. It is used with the kind permission of

the photographer, David Franzen.

iii

copy of the source orthography. This reflects this

journal’s commitment to recognizing the source

orthography as vital to accessing and under-

standing the materials of the Hawaiian Legacy.

Never before has an endeavor of this scope been

attempted. The several dozen individuals listed

in the Acknowledgments (pp. 161–164) all con-

tributed to this journal in their own way and are

sincerely thanked. The work of many others, not

listed, is also appreciated.

Finally, this journal would not be possible but

for the lives, knowledge and sacrifice of the

Hawaiian language authors who have passed on

and whose works are published here. Although

they have all now entered the sleep that knows

no seasons, the authors’ words may be heard

through the rustling of these pages as they are

turned. Ka Ho‘oilina is presented with love and

gratitude to those whose priceless legacy immea-

surably enriches us all.

Kalena Silva

Ka Haka ‘Ula O Ke‘elikölani

Hilo, Hawai‘i

February 2002

küpa‘a ma hope o ka waiwai nui o ka ‘ölelo

kümole ma ka ‘imi a ho‘omaopopo ‘ana i ka ‘ike.

‘A‘ole i ho‘ä‘o mua ‘ia he pähana me këia kona

nui. Ua komo ka hana a këlä me këia kanaka i

helu ‘ia ma Nä ‘Ölelo Ho‘omaika‘i i loko o nei

puke pai, a ke mahalo nui ‘ia aku nei läkou

päkahi a pau. Ua nui pü ka mahalo i nä känaka

‘ë a‘e i helu ‘ole ‘ia nä inoa ma ‘ane‘i.

E ‘ole ke ola, ka ‘ike a me ka pa‘u nui a nä mea

käkau ‘ölelo Hawai‘i i hala akula e ho‘opuka ‘ia

nei kä läkou hana ma ‘ane‘i, ua pa‘a maila ke

kahua o nei puke pai. ‘Oiai ke moe maila ia mau

mea käkau i ka moe kau a ho‘oilo, ke ö maila nö

kä läkou ‘ölelo i ka nehenehe lolelole o nä ‘ao‘ao

nei. He mau ‘ao‘ao ia e waiho ‘ia aku nei i mua

o ka lehulehu me ke aloha a me ka mahalo mao

‘ole i ia ho‘oilina waiwai nui launa ‘ole e

pömaika‘i ai käkou a me nä hanauna o këia

mua aku.

Kalena Silva

Ka Haka ‘Ula O Ke‘elikölani

Hilo, Hawai‘i

Pepeluali 2002

* Students’ materials, starting with a textbook

on anatomy from the College of Hawai‘i at

Lahaina Luna.

From time to time, special items outside of these

six areas may also be included.

As the journal’s main objectives are to preserve,

publish and disseminate primary documents, a

minimum of secondary analysis and commentary

are included.

Four columns appear for each piece. The first

column presents a copy of the original words of

the Legacy piece. The second column presents

contemporary standardized orthography (mod-

ern spelling), and generally will correct mis-

spellings from the first column. The third column

provides an English translation that may be an

edited reprinting from another source. The

fourth column, unless otherwise stated, provides

textual notes.

Each of the sections of this first issue were

worked on by one or two language specialists.

Their work was then copyedited, edited by a

group of senior reviewers and ultimately edited

by myself. Changes were made at each of these

three editorial levels. The specialists, copyeditors

and reviewers are listed in the table of contents.

A large number of additional individuals assisted

the process.

All materials within the journal are freely avail-

able in electronic and printed form, and the pub-

lic is invited to use them, with this condition:

Any quoted use of the contemporary standard-

ized orthography or the English translation must

be accompanied in the same writing or in an

associated footnote with a corresponding quoted

* Nä kumuhana haumäna, e ho‘omaka ana me

ka puke ha‘awina ‘anatomia mai ke Kulanui o

Hawai‘i ma Lahaina Luna mai.

Aia aku aia mai, e ho‘opuka ‘ia nä ‘ikamu küikawä

ma waho a‘e o nä ‘ano ma‘amau he ‘eono.

Mamuli o ka pahuhopu nui o nei puke pai, ‘o ia

ho‘i, ka mälama, ho‘opuka a ho‘olaha ‘ana a‘e i

nä palapala kuamua, ‘a‘ole i nui ke komo o nä

mana‘o kälailai me ka ho‘äkäka.

He ‘ehä kolamu o këlä me këia ‘ikamu. Aia ma

ke kolamu mua he kope o nä ‘ölelo o ka palapala

kümole. Aia ma ke kolamu ‘elua ka ‘ölelo i

hö‘ano hou ‘ia a i ho‘opololei ‘ia nä pa‘i hewa

o ke kolamu mua. Aia ma ke kolamu ‘ekolu ka

unuhi ‘ölelo Pelekänia. I kekahi manawa, ua lawe

‘ia mai ia unuhi mai kekahi kümole ‘ë a‘e. Ke ‘ole

e komo kekahi mea, aia ma ke kolamu ‘ehä nä

kuhia kikokikona.

Ua ho‘omäkaukau ‘ia këlä me këia mähele o këia

pukana mua e ho‘okahi a ‘elua paha laekahi

‘ölelo. Ua loihape ‘ia akula ia hana e kekahi o

nä loihape, ho‘oponopono ‘ia akula e nä luna

loihape a pau he ‘elima a ho‘oponopono hope

‘ia akula e a‘u. Ua komo nä loli ma ia mau pae

ho‘oponopono ‘ekolu päkahi a pau. He helu ‘ia

nä laekahi ‘ölelo, nä loihape a me nä luna loihape

ma ka papa kuhikuhi. Ua nui hou aku ka po‘e i

kökua ma këia ka‘inahana.

Ua noa i ka lehulehu äkea nä mea a pau ma loko

o nei puke pai i pa‘i ‘ia a i ho‘olele kahua

pünaewele ‘ia ho‘i me ke koina na‘e penei: Ke

ho‘ohana ‘ia ka ‘ölelo hö‘ano hou a unuhi ‘ölelo

Pelekänia paha, e ho‘okomo pü ‘ia i loko o ia

kikokikona ho‘okahi a ma ke kuhia o lalo paha,

ka ‘ölelo kümole. He hö‘ike këia i ko nei puke pai

iv v

Ka Papa Kaha(Table of Marks)

( )

[ ]

< >

†

…

Kahaapo. He ho‘okomo ‘ia ma kahi

ho‘okahi i loa‘a ma ka palapala

kümole. Ma nä wahi käka‘ikahi i loa‘a

ke kahaapo kihikihi ma ke kümole,

ua ho‘okomo ‘ia he kahaapo.

Kahaapo kihikihi. He hö‘ike i ka

hua ‘ölelo a hua palapala paha i

pöwehiwehi hapa a pöwehiwehi loa

paha. Ma kahi i hiki, ua ho‘okomo

‘ia nä hua ‘ölelo a hua palapala paha

i mana‘o ‘ia he pololei.

Kahaapo ‘oi. He hö‘ike i ka ‘ölelo hou

i ho‘okomo ‘ia ma ka unuhi ‘ölelo

Pelekänia mua i kü piha i ka ‘ölelo

H a w a i ‘ i .

Kaha kuhi. He ho‘okomo ‘ia ma mua

o ka hua ‘ölelo i känalua ka puana

‘ana a me ka mana‘o e hiki ‘ole ai ka

pela hö‘ano hou ‘ia.

Kiko kolu. He hö‘ike i ke käpae ‘ia o

kekahi mähele o ke kikokikona

k ü m o l e .

Ua hiki ke ho‘oili ‘ia nä ki‘i kikoho‘e

o nä palapala kümole mai ko ka puke

pai kahua pünaewele ma

< h t t p : / / h o o i l i n a . o l e l o . h a w a i i . e d u > .

‘A‘ole i ho‘ä‘o nei puke pai e pa‘i hou

i ke kinona hua ho‘okahi o ko nä

palapala kümole kahiko. ‘A‘ole ho‘i i

pa‘i ‘ia nä laina i kaha küikawä ‘ia ma

ka ‘ili puke a ‘ao‘ao po‘oinoa paha.

Hö‘ike ‘ia nö na‘e nä hua hiö, nä mea

i kahalalo ‘ia, NÄ HUA MA‘AKA, nä

hua na‘ina‘i, Nä Hua Ma‘aka

L i ‘ i l i ‘ i a me nä ki‘i a pau i loa‘a ma

ka palapala kümole kahiko.

Parentheses. Included where they

occur in the original source. In rare

cases where the original used square

brackets, they are reproduced in the

journal as parentheses.

Square brackets. Indicate an original

word or letter partially or completely

obscured. Where possible, suggested

letter(s) or word(s) are inserted.

Pointed brackets. Enclose material

newly added to an existing English

translation to fully reflect the original

H a w a i i a n .

Dagger. Placed at the head of a

Hawaiian word to indicate that the

word’s pronunciation and meaning

are insufficiently known to spell it in

contemporary Hawaiian.

Ellipses. Used to indicate that some of

the original text has been deleted.

Note: Images of the original Legacy

materials are available for download-

ing from the journal’s website at

< h t t p : / / h o o i l i n a . o l e l o . h a w a i i . e d u > .

Although no attempt has been made

to precisely reproduce the original

font styles, included are the original

italics, u n d e r s c o r e s, UPPER and

lower cases and Small Caps.

Illustrations within Legacy pieces are

reproduced. Specialized graphical

lines on a book cover, cover page or

elsewhere are generally not repro-

d u c e d .

Where possible in the introductions to the indi-

vidual Legacy pieces, reference is made to biblio-

graphic sources that provide background on that

Legacy piece:

“Chapin” = Helen G. Chapin; Guide to

Newspapers of Hawai‘i, 1834–2000; Honolulu:

Hawaiian Historical Society, 2000.

“Forbes” = David Forbes; Hawaiian National

Bibliography 1780–1900; 4 volumes, Honolulu:

University of Hawai‘i Press, 1999–2001; volume

4 being published.

“Judd/Bell/Murdoch” = Bernice Judd, Janet Bell

and Clare Murdoch; Hawaiian Language

Imprints, 1822–1899, a Bibliography; Honolulu:

Hawaiian Mission Children’s Society and the

University of Hawai‘i Press, 1978.

“Mo‘okini” = Esther K. Mo‘okini; The Hawaiian

Newspapers; Honolulu: Topgallant Publishing

Company, Ltd., 1974.

Ke hiki ma nä ‘ölelo ho‘olauna i këlä me këia

Palapala Ho‘oilina, kuhikuhi ‘ia nä puke kümole i

käkau ‘ia ai kekahi ‘ölelo ho‘äkäka no ia palapala

penei:

“Chapin” = Helen G. Chapin; Guide to

Newspapers of Hawai‘i, 1834–2000; Honolulu:

Hui Mö‘aukala Hawai‘i, 2000.

“Forbes” = David Forbes; Hawaiian National

Bibliography 1780–1900; ‘ehä puke, Honolulu:

Hale Pa‘i o Ke Kulanui o Hawai‘i, 1999–2001 (ke

pa‘i ‘ia nei ka puke ‘ehä).

“Judd/Bell/Murdoch” = Bernice Judd, Janet Bell

a me Clare Murdoch; Hawaiian Language

Imprints, 1822–1899, a Bibliography; Honolulu:

Hui Kamali‘i Mikiona Hawai‘i a me ka Hale Pa‘i

o Ke Kulanui o Hawai‘i, 1978.

“Mo‘okini” = Esther K. Mo‘okini; The Hawaiian

Newspapers; Honolulu: Topgallant Publishing

Company, Ltd., 1974.

Kuhia Puke Kümole(bibliographic sources)

vi 1

Agricultural Lore, Part 1

Introduction to the HEN Collection

The Hawaiian Ethnographic Notes (HEN) collection of Hawaiian manuscript material in Bishop

Museum Archives is part of the legacy of Mary Kawena Pukui’s years of employment at Bishop

Museum. The collection consists of materials she gathered from many sources, including Hawaiian

language newspapers, journals and other papers and personal accounts. (In some cases the sources of

these original materials are not known.) Although these various pieces are diverse in origin and content,

all of them are evidence of Mrs. Pukui’s efforts in gathering, interpreting and translating these many

documents for the continuing benefit of researchers, years after she completed her work. The majority

of the translations in HEN are Mrs. Pukui’s. In other cases, however, complete translations (and/or

edits) were done by different people, some of whom remain unidentified. Further study into translation

or handwriting styles may clarify who worked on each piece.

There are many levels of translation work within the collection, ranging from drafts and lists of ques-

tions and summaries to pieces that have been carefully completed. Within this assembly Mrs. Pukui’s

own growth can be seen, from the work of a young woman to the mastery of her mature years. HEN was

assembled as a repository for Mrs. Pukui herself, as well as for those seeking her assistance. With that in

mind, researchers should be aware that the translated works reflect only a portion of the knowledge that

Mrs. Pukui compiled. Those who study this material should recognize that there remained far more

than is contained here. This knowledge was held in the mind of Mrs. Pukui and was never reduced to

writing.

HEN served in part as a tool to remind and clarify subjects for Mrs. Pukui, who herself was already very

familiar with the customs and native language of the Hawaiian people. This familiarity meant that

explanations and final translations that would make the readings easier were not always included. With

this in mind, the HEN material should be utilized as an initial step or as a point of entry into whatever

original document resources are available.

This section of the journal relies upon these translations of Kawena Pukui. In keeping with standard

publishing procedures, some minor editing of the English texts has been done. (These changes are not

indicated here.) In cases where Mrs. Pukui wrote only a partial translation of an original Hawaiian piece,

an entirely new translation by a modern writer has been substituted. The authorship of such new works

is noted. For further study, the nearly 8,000 pages of the Hawaiian Ethnographic Notes are available to

everyone during Bishop Museum Archives’ public hours.

No ka Mahi‘ai ‘Ana, Mähele 1

‘Ölelo Mua no ka ‘Ohina HEN

‘O ka Hawaiian Ethnographic Notes (HEN), he ‘ohina palapala ‘ölelo Hawai‘i ia ma ke Ke‘ena Waihona

Palapala Kahiko o ka Hale Hö‘ike‘ike o Kamehameha. He mähele ia ‘ohina o ka ho‘oilina a Mary Kawena

Pukui i waiho mai ai mai kona mau makahiki e hana ana ma ka Hale Hö‘ike‘ike o Kamehameha. Aia ma

ka HEN nä ‘ano palapala like ‘ole a Mrs. Pukui i ‘ohi ai mai nä molekumu he nui e like ho‘i me nä

nüpepa ‘ölelo Hawai‘i, nä puke pai a me nä pepa a mo‘olelo pilikino (‘a‘ole i maopopo loa ka molekumu

o ia mau palapala a pau). ‘Oiai ua ‘oko‘a ke ‘ano a me ka molekumu o ia mau palapala, he hö‘ike läkou i

ko Mrs. Pukui hana nui ma ka ‘ohi ‘ana, ke kälailai ‘ana a me ka unuhi ‘ana no ka pono o nä känaka ‘imi

na‘auao a hiki loa mai i këia wä. Na Mrs. Pukui ka nui o nä unuhi ma ka HEN. Na kekahi po‘e ‘ë a‘e, i

pa‘a ‘ole mai ka inoa o ka nui, ke koena o nä unuhi a me nä ho‘oponopono ‘ana. E möakäka hou mai

paha ka mea näna i hana ma këlä palapala këia palapala i ke kilo ‘ana i ke kaila unuhi a lima käkau paha.

Ua nui nä pae unuhi i loko o ka HEN, mai ke kämua me ka papa helu o nä nïnau a me ka hö‘ulu‘ulu

mana‘o i nä unuhi no‘eau i ho‘opa‘a maiau ‘ia. I loko o ia ‘ohina e ‘ike ‘ia ai ka ulu ‘ana o ka mäkaukau o

Mrs. Pukui, mai ka hana a ke kaikamahine ‘öpiopio a hiki i ka loea launa ‘ole o ka wahine o‘o. Ua ‘ohi ‘ia

ka HEN i waihona no Mrs. Pukui pono‘ï iho nö, a no ka nui po‘e e noi mai ana i kona kökua. No laila, e

ho‘omaopopo ke kanaka noi‘i ë he mähele wale nö ia mau unuhi o ka ‘ike a Mrs. Pukui i ‘ohi ai. Ua nui

ho‘i ka ‘ike i koe i mälama ‘ia i ka waihona no‘ono‘o o Mrs. Pukui äna i ho‘opa‘a ‘ole iho ai ma luna o ka

pepa.

Ma kekahi ‘ano, he mea kökua ka HEN iä Mrs. Pukui i maopopo a möakäka hou mai ai nä kumuhana

like ‘ole, ‘oiai ua pa‘a mua iä ia ka ‘ölelo a me nä kuluma o ka po‘e Hawai‘i. No ia ‘ike i pa‘a mua iä ia,

‘a‘ole ‘o ia i ho‘okomo mau i nä wehewehe ‘ana a me nä unuhi piha pono e ma‘alahi hou mai ai ka

heluhelu ‘ana o ka po‘e ‘ike ‘ole. No laila, e ho‘ohana ‘ia ka HEN i ke‘ehi mua a puka komo paha i loko

o nä waihona palapala molekumu ‘ë a‘e he nui.

Na Kawena Pukui ka nui o nä unuhi ma këia mähele o nei puke pai. E like me nä hana ho‘opuka puke

ma‘amau, ua ho‘oponopono iki ‘ia kekahi o nä unuhi ‘ölelo Pelekänia. (‘A‘ole i hö‘ike ‘ia ma ‘ane‘i nä

mea i ho‘oponopono ‘ia.) No ka palapala i unuhi hapa ‘ia e Mrs. Pukui, ua hana ‘ia he unuhi hou loa na

kekahi o nä lae‘ula ‘ölelo o Ka Ho‘oilina (ua hö‘ike ‘ia ka inoa o ia lae‘ula). No ke kilo a noi‘i hou ‘ana

aku, ua noa ka HEN – he ‘ane‘ane nö e piha 8,000 ‘ao‘ao – i nä po‘e a pau ma nä hola e hämama ai ke

Ke‘ena Waihona Palapala Kahiko o ka Hale Hö‘ike‘ike o Kamehameha.

2 3

kolamu (column) 2

1. Ua ho‘ololi ‘ia ‘o “nahelehe” ‘o ia ‘o “nähelehele.”

“Nahelehe” was changed to “nähelehele.”

1. Cultivating Wetland.

This was the method of cultivating wetland in

ancient times. The man will go to cultivate his

taro terrace; he will remove all weeds and leave

them till (they were treated with) the grass he

had prepared, when he will work over the patch

again to see the proper way for its planting,

whereupon he will obtain the taro tops and,

reaching his patch, will first hill up the patch in

circular mounds, then set out all the taro tops

therein, its full extent, resting a short while

thereafter; when the grass grows, the man will

proceed to cultivate. The method of cultivation is

the patch must be allowed to develop: when three

leaves have opened up he will trim them, and

afterwards pluck the leaves of the taro, plentifully,

wrapping them securely, will light the fire and

cook these leaves on the coals as greens, and

removing all injured portions, then removing the

cover of the calabash will offer prayer to the god,

in this manner:

1a. “O Käne of the living water,

Here are the greens,

The first leaves of our food,

O Käne, go and eat,

Preserve me an offspring, to cultivate,

To build a house, to fish also,

Till old and enfeebled, man of the day

preserved by thee, the god,

Amen, ’tis free, it flies away.”

In this letter about the preparation of wetland for planting taro, the author reveals one important tradi-

tional practice of the farmer, namely piety. In order to ensure the life of the land, people regularly

prayed to the gods. Published in Ka Hökü o ka Päkïpika (The Star of the Pacific) newspaper, May 15,

1862, under the title “Cultivating Wetland.” It is not clear who wrote this letter. However, it was proba-

bly John Käneali‘i because this article was reproduced and enlarged in his letter of the following year,

“Concerning Farming in Ancient Times,” published on December 19, 1863, in Ka Nüpepa Kü‘oko‘a (The

Independent Press).

Cultivating Wetland

1. Mahi‘ai ‘ana i ka ‘Äina wai.

Eia ho‘i ke ‘ano o ka mahi‘ai ‘ana ma ka ‘äina wai

i ka wä kahiko. Hele ke kanaka mahi‘ai a kona

lo‘i, külapa ‘o ia i ka nähelehele1 a pau, waiho

aku a pulu ka mau‘u äna i hana ai ma mua, a

laila, küpele hou ka lo‘i, a ‘ike ‘o ia i ke ‘ano

küpono o ke kanu ‘ana, a laila, ki‘i këia i ka pü‘ä

huli, lawe a hiki i ka lo‘i äna, pu‘epu‘e mua a pau

ka lo‘i, a laila, kanu ka huli a pa‘a ka lo‘i, a laila,

noho aku a li‘uli‘u, ulu a‘ela ka mau‘u, hele ke

kanaka e mahi‘ai. ‘O ke ‘ano o ia mahi‘ai ‘ana, he

au lo‘i, a ‘ekolu lau o ka ‘ai i möhala, a laila,

laupa‘i ka ‘ai, a laila, ki‘i ke kanaka ‘ako i ka lau

o ka ‘ai, a nui, a laila, ‘ope a pa‘a, hö‘ä ke ahi

pülehu i ua ‘ope lü‘au nei a mo‘a, wehe ‘o ia i ke

‘ino a pau, a laila, wehe ke po‘i o ka ‘umeke, pule

aku i ke akua, penei ka pule ‘ana,

1a. “E Käne i ka wai e ola,

Eia ka lä‘au,

Ka lau mua o ka ‘ai a käua,

E Käne, e ho‘i e ‘ai,

E ola ia‘u i ka pulapula, i mahi‘ai,

i kükulu hale, i lawai‘a nö ho‘i,

a kaniko‘o, pala lau hala kanaka i ke

ao,

Käu ola ia e ke Akua,

‘ämama ua noa,

lele wale ho‘i.”

1. Mahiai ana i ka Aina wai.

Eia hoi ke ano o ka mahiai ana ma ka aina wai i

ka wa kahiko. Hele ke kanaka mahiai a kona loi,

kulapa oia i ka nahelehe a pau, waiho aku a pulu

ka mauu ana i hana ai mamua, alaila, kupele hou

ka loi, a ike oia i ke ano kupono o ke kanu ana,

alaila, kii keia i ka puahuli lawe a hiki i ka loi ana,

puepue mua a pau ka loi, alaila, kanu ka huli a

paa ka loi, alaila, noho aku a liuliu, ulu ae la ka

mauu hele ke kanaka e mahiai, o ke ano oia

mahiai ana, he au loi, a ekolu lau o ka ai i

mohala, alaila, lau pai ka ai, alaila, kii ke kanaka

ako i ka lau o ka ai, a nui, alaila, ope a paa, hoa ke

ahi pulehu i ua ope luau nei a moa, wehe oia i ke

ino a pau, alaila, wehe ke poi o ka umeke, pule

aku i ke Akua, penei ka pule ana, e kane i ka wai

e ola, eia ka laau, ka lau mua o ka ai a kaua, e

kane, e hoi e ai, e ola ia’u i ka pulapula, i mahiai,

i kukulu hale, i lawaia no hoi, a kani koo pala lau

hala kanaka i ke ao, kau ola ia e ke akua, amama

ua noa, lele wale hoi, pau ka pule ana, alaila, ai ka

ai a maona, noho a hiki i ke o-o ana o ke kalo,

alaila, hele ua mahiai nei a ka loi ana, ku iho la ua

kanaka mahiai nei ma kuauna, kahea aku la ia i

ke akua hooulu ai. Panei ke kahea ana. E

Kuikeolowalu, he olowalu kalo, he pa maia ka ha,

he lau maia ka lau, e Kuikeolowalu, nalo wale

kanaka iloko o kakau kalo la, e Kuikeolowalu,

kuu akua i ke oo ana o ka ai, e Kuikeolowalu, e

uhuki ka ai a kaua la, e Kuikeolowalu, lawe au i

ke kalo, me na oha, me na ka mau, koe aku ka

Ma këia leka e pili ana i ka ho‘omäkaukau ‘ana i ka ‘äina wai no ke kanu ‘ana i ke kalo, hö‘ike mai ka

mea käkau i kekahi o nä loina ko‘iko‘i o ka mahi‘ai, ‘o ia ho‘i ‘o ka pule mau i ke akua i mea e ola ai ka

‘äina. Ua pa‘i ‘ia ma Ka Hökü o ka Päkïpika, i ka lä 15 o Mei, 1862, ma lalo o ke po‘omana‘o “Ka Mahi‘ai

‘Ana i ka ‘Äina Wai.” ‘A‘ole i hö‘ike pono ‘ia ka mea näna i käkau i këia leka, akä, na John Käneali‘i nö

paha, ‘oiai ua käkau hou ‘ia a ho‘omöhala ‘ia këia mo‘olelo i kekahi makahiki mai ma käna leka “No ka

Mahi‘ai ‘Ana i ka Wä Kahiko,” o ka lä 19 o Dekemapa, 1863 ma Ka Nüpepa Kü‘oko‘a.

Mahi‘ai ‘Ana i ka ‘Äina Wai

4 5

no ka mahi‘ai ‘ana, mähele 1 76 ka ho‘oilina: journal of hawaiian language sources ● march 2002

kolamu (column) 2

2. Ua ho‘ololi ‘ia ‘o “panei” ‘o ia ‘o “penei.”

“Panei” was changed to “penei.”

3. Ua ho‘ololi ‘ia ‘o “pa” ‘o ia ‘o “pü.”

“Pa” was changed to “pü.”

4. Ua ho‘ololi ‘ia ‘o “kakau” ‘o ia ‘o “‘kä käkou.”

“Kakau” was changed to “‘kä käkou.”

5. ‘O kekahi pela ‘ana, me ka mana‘o ‘oko‘a, ‘o ia ‘o

“kua‘i.”

An alternative spelling here, with a different meaning,

could be “kua‘i.”

6. Ua ho‘ololi ‘ia ‘o “ae” ‘o ia ‘o “‘ai” no ko Mary Kawena

Pukui unuhi ‘ana ‘o “food.”

“Ae” was changed to “‘ai” to reflect Mary Kawena

Pukui’s use of “food” (“‘ai”).

kolamu (column) 3

1. ‘O këia kekahi mana‘o o ka hopuna ‘ölelo hope:

“And if there remains anything else, it will be covered,

except for the beach lands, which will be covered

later.”

The meaning of the final sentence could also be:

“And if there remains anything else, it will be covered,

except for the beach lands, which will be covered

later.”

1b. The prayer ended, he eats of the food till sat-

isfied, then rests till the time of digging the taro,

when he will go to his patch, and standing on its

bank will call on the god of food growth, in this

manner:

1c. “O Küikeolowalu, a taro storehouse,

the stem is (as large as) a banana

stalk and the leaves (are as large as)

a banana leaf,

O Küikeolowalu, let man be lost in our

taro field,

O Küikeolowalu, my god in digging the

food,

O Küikeolowalu, pull our food,

O Küikeolowalu, I gather the taro, with

its suckers, and steady vines, leaving

the hills to live, as sprigs for our

preservation,

O Küikeolowalu, mix our food, carry

our food, light our oven fire, cook

the food till done, pound and mix

our food,

O Küikeolowalu, dip it into our cal-

abash, reduce our food till soft,

O Küikeolowalu, split the firewood,

light the oven fire, strangle the pig,

place it on the oven, remove its hair,

rub the pig, bake it in our under-

ground oven, say,

O Küikeolowalu, when the pig is

cooked, cut it up and fill the platters,

as food for man, for woman, and the

child in our house, say,

O Küikeolowalu, multiply it, multiply it

greatly, dig repeatedly sacred, dig

repeatedly free, gratuitous food, ’tis

free, restrictions are removed.”

1d. When this is done go and gather up the taro.

This completes the method of cultivating wet-

land, that of remaining land may be told later.1

1b. Pau ka pule ‘ana, a laila, ‘ai ka ‘ai a mä‘ona,

noho a hiki i ke o‘o ‘ana o ke kalo, a laila, hele ua

mahi‘ai nei a ka lo‘i äna, kü ihola ua kanaka

mahi‘ai nei ma kuäuna, kähea akula ia i ke akua

ho‘oulu ‘ai. Penei2 ke kähea ‘ana.

1c. “E Küikeolowalu, he olowalu kalo, he

pü3 mai‘a ka hä, he lau mai‘a ka lau,

E Küikeolowalu, nalowale kanaka i

loko o kä käkou4 kalo lä,

E Küikeolowalu, ku‘u Akua i ke o‘o

‘ana o ka ‘ai,

E Küikeolowalu, e uhuki ka ‘ai a käua

lä,

E Küikeolowalu, lawe au i ke kalo, me

nä ‘ohä, me nä kä mau, koe aku ka

pu‘u i ola, i huli no ka ‘ama‘u a käua

lä,

E Küikeolowalu, huihui ka ‘ai a käua lä,

‘auamo ka ‘ai, hö‘ä ka imu o ka ‘ai a

käua lä, kälua ka ‘ai a mo‘a, a ku‘i a

wali ka ‘ai a käua lä,

E Küikeolowalu, haohao i ka ‘umeke, a

ho‘owali a wali ka ‘ai a käua lä,

E Küikeolowalu ë, käkä ka wahie, hö‘ä

ka imu, ‘u‘umi ka pua‘a, kau i ka

imu, unünu ka hulu, kuai5

ka pua‘a, kälua ka imu o ka pua‘a a

käua lä, ‘eä,

E Küikeolowalu, a mo‘a ka pua‘a,

‘oki‘oki a piha ke pä lä‘au, e ‘ai ke

käne, e ‘ai ka wahine, e ‘ai ke keiki i

ka pua‘a, i ke kalo a käua, ‘eä,

E Küikeolowalu, a papa iki, a papa nui,

‘eli‘eli kapu, ‘eli‘eli noa, i ‘ai 6 na

honua ua noa, pau ke kapu.”

1d. A pau këia, e ki‘i e ‘ohi i ke kalo. Ua pau a‘ela

ke ‘ano o ka mahi‘ai ‘ana i ka ‘äina wai, a inä he

koena kahi e ha‘i mai nö, koe na‘e nä kai ma

hope aku.

puu i ola, i huli no ka amau a kaua la, e

Kuikeolowalu, huihui ka ai a kaua la, auamo ka

ai, hoa ka imu o ka ai a kaua la, kalua ka ai a

moa, a kui a wali ka ai a kaua la, e Kuikeolowalu,

haohao i ka umeke, a hoowali a wali ka ai a kaua

la, e Kuikeolowalu e, kaka ka wahie, hoa ka imu,

u-umi ka puaa, kau i ka imu, ununu ka hulu, kuai

ka puaa, kalua ka imu o ka puaa a kaua la, ea e

Kuikeolowalu, a moa ka puaa, okioki a piha ke pa

laau, e ai ke kane, e ai ka wahine, e ai ke keiki i ka

puaa, i ke kalo a kaua, ea e Kuikeolowalu, a papa

iki, a papa nui, elieli kapu, elieli noa, i ae na

honua ua noa, pau ke kapu, a pau keia e kii e ohi

i ke kalo. Ua pau ae la ke ano o ka mahiai ana i ka

aina wai, aina he koena kahi e hai mai no, koe

nae na kai mahope aku.

1. CALENDAR OF THE ANCIENTS

OF HAWAI‘I AND WHAT IT WAS LIKE

Mr. Editor of the Kü‘oko‘a: Much aloha to you.

Because of the request voiced to me by some

people, asking that if I know the counting of the

months of old Hawai‘i wouldn’t I please publish

it in the Kü‘oko‘a newspaper, I have therefore

agreed to their request.

2. The counting of the months was put in order

when Keawe was king of Hawai‘i. This song men-

tions him:

3. How we love Hawai‘i,

Great island of Keawe,

It seems to swim alone,

In the great billows of the sea.

4. Nana – was the first month in the Hawaiian

way of counting. In English it is January. This is

why it was so named.

5. In the month of Kaulua, that is December,

that was the time when the birds remained quiet

and did not fly away. They remained in the hol-

lows until the month of Nana, then the birds

began to wing their way about. The storms were

The Calendar of the Ancients of Hawai‘i and What It Was Like

Z. P. K. Kawaikaumaiikamakaoka‘öpua wrote this letter to fulfill the request made by some people that

he explain the Hawaiian months. While ancient Hawaiians observed the changing seasons, this author

arranged the seasons in order to compare them to the Gregorian calendar. He explains the characteris-

tics of each month by describing the severity of rain and wind, and the nature of birds, crops and ocean

fishes. Published in Ka Nüpepa Kü‘oko‘a (The Independent Press), August 30, 1923, page 7.

1. KA HELU MALAMA A KA PO‘E

KAHIKO O HAWAI‘I A ME KO

LÄKOU ‘ANO

E Mr. Luna Ho‘oponopono o Ka Nüpepa

Kü‘oko‘a, aloha a nui: Ma muli o nä leo nonoi a

kekahi po‘e ia‘u, inä ua loa‘a ia‘u ka helu malama

Hawai‘i a ka po‘e kahiko o Hawai‘i nei, e ‘olu‘olu

au e ho‘okomo i loko o Ka Nüpepa Kü‘oko‘a, no

laila, ke ‘ae nei au i kä läkou nonoi ia‘u.

2. Ua ho‘oponopono ‘ia ka helu malama i ka wä

e noho mö‘ï ana ‘o Keawe no Hawai‘i nei. Nona

iho këia ho‘oheno ‘ana:

3. I aloha ‘ia nö Hawai‘i,

‘O ka mokupuni ‘oi o Keawe,

E ‘au ho‘okahi aku nei,

Ma nä ‘ale kai hänupanupa.

4. ‘O Nana ka malama mua ma ka helu Hawai‘i;

a ma ka Haole ho‘i ‘o Ianuali. Penei ke ‘ano i

kapa ‘ia ai.

5. I ka malama ‘o Kaulua, ‘o ia ho‘i ‘o

Dekemapa, aia ho‘i ma këia malama ihola i noho

höpue ai nä manu, ‘a‘ole lele. Ua noho läkou i

loko o nä lua; a i ka hiki ‘ana i ka malama ‘o

Nana, ‘akahi nö a ho‘onanana a lelele ka manu.

1. KA HELU MALAMA A KA POE

KAHIKO O HAWAII AME KO

LAKOU ANO.

E Mr. Lunahooponopono o ka Nupepa Kuokoa;

Aloha a nui: Mamuli o na leo nonoi a kekahi poe

ia’u, ina ua loaa ia’u ka helu malama Hawaii a ka

poe kahiko o Hawaii nei, e oluolu au e hookomo

iloko o ka Nupepa Kuokoa, nolaila, ke ae nei au i

ka lakou nonoi ia’u.

2. Ua hooponoponoia ka helu malama i ka wa e

noho moi ana o Keawe no Hawaii nei; nona iho

keia hooheno ana.

3. I alohaia no Hawaii,

O ka mokupuni oi o Keawe,

E au hookahi aku nei,

Ma na ale kai hanupanupa.

4. O Nana ka malama mua ma ka helu Hawaii; a

ma ka haole hoi o Ianuari. Penei ke ano i kapaia ai.

5. I ka malama o Kaulua, o ia hoi o Dekemaba,

aia hoi ma keia malama iho la i noho hopue ai

na manu aole lele, ua noho lakou iloko o na lua;

a i ka hiki ana i ka malama o Nana, akahi no a

hoonanana a lelele ka manu. Ua hala ka ino, a

Ka Helu Malama a ka Po‘e Kahiko o Hawai‘i a me Ko Läkou ‘Ano

Ua käkau mai ‘o Z. P. K. Kawaikaumaiikamakaoka‘öpua i këia leka i mea e ho‘okö ai i ke noi a

kekahi po‘e iä ia e wehewehe i nä malama Hawai‘i. ‘Oiai ua ‘ike ka po‘e kahiko i ka loli ‘ana o nä kau,

ho‘onohonoho ka mea käkau i ia mau kau ma ke ka‘ina malama i ho‘ohälike ‘ia me ka ‘Alemanaka

Kelekolio. Wehewehe ‘o Kawaikaumaiikamakaoka‘öpua i ke ‘ano o këlä me këia malama, ka nui o ka

ua a me ka makani, me ke külana o nä manu, nä mea kanu a me nä i‘a o kai. Ua pa‘i ‘ia ma Ka Nüpepa

Kü‘oko‘a i ka lä 30 o ‘Aukake 1923, ma ka ‘ao‘ao 7.

8 9

no ka mahi‘ai ‘ana, mähele 1 1 11 0 ka ho‘oilina: journal of hawaiian language sources ● march 2002

gone and the weather was good. That is why the

month was so named, because the birds winged

their way about from the places where they

remained quietly.

6. Welo – This is the second in the Hawaiian

count and in English it is February. This was the

month in which the plants sprouted and grew,

such as the hoi and the pi‘a, a plant called huelo-

kü (upright-tail) by the ancients. These two, at

their first appearance from the bud resembled

rat tails and were often mistaken by hawks and

owls for the tails of rats and so they pounced

down upon the budding hoi and pi‘a (bulbs).

7. Ikiiki – This is the third in the Hawaiian count

and March in English. This was an unpleasantly

stifling month for sickness, the sun was very

warm and there was death and famine. If a man,

woman, or child was sick unto death and then

recovered, that person would never be ill.

8. Ka‘aona – This is the fourth month in the

Hawaiian count and April in English. It was

named Ka‘aona because that was when the fishes

came from a distance and remained quietly in

hollows in the rocks. When the pöuouo net was

used many were caught. The fishes came out

about the time when the lehua-bearing ‘öhi‘a

trees bloomed.

9. Hinaia‘ele‘ele – This is the fifth month in the

Hawaiian count and May in English. This month

was named Hinaia‘ele‘ele because that was when

the plovers and other birds were fat. The breasts

of the birds were darkened by fat. The second

reason was that this was the month of famine

when the men went up to the mountains to cut

häpu‘u and ma‘u ferns for food. These were car-

ried on the (backs of the) necks to the shore. The

shoulders were darkened and chafed into depres-

sions and some actually chafed through the skin.

When the wounds healed they were said to turn

black.

Ua hala ka ‘ino, a ua mälie. Pëlä i kapa ‘ia aku ai

këia malama, no ka ho‘onanana a lele ‘ana o nä

manu mai ko läkou wahi e noho höpue ana.

6. Welo. ‘O ka ‘elua këia o nä malama ma ka

helu Hawai‘i, a ‘o Pepeluali ho‘i ka helu Haole. ‘O

këia malama ka malama e kupu ai nä mea ulu, a

ulu ka hoi, ke pi‘a, a kapa ‘ia e ka po‘e kahiko, ka

huelo kü. Ua ulu a‘ela ko läua maka a kohu huelo

o ka ‘iole, a ua kuhi hewa ka manu ‘io a me ka

manu pueo he huelo no ka ‘iole, ua po‘i hewa i ka

maka o ka hoi a me ke pi‘a.

7. Ikiiki. ‘O ka ‘ekolu këia o nä malama ma ka

helu Hawai‘i, a ‘o Malaki ho‘i i ka helu Haole. He

ikiiki këia malama i ka ma‘i, i ka wela a ka lä, i

ka make, i ka wï. A inä ua ma‘i ‘ia kekahi käne, a

wahine, a mau keiki paha, a kokoke e make, a ola

mai loko mai o ia make, ‘a‘ole ‘o ia e loa‘a hou

ana i ka ma‘i.

8. Ka‘aona. ‘O ka ‘ehä këia o nä malama ma ka

helu Hawai‘i, a ‘o ‘Apelila ho‘i i ka helu Haole.

‘O ka mea i kapa ‘ia ai këia malama Ka‘aona, ‘o

këia ka malama e puka mai ai ka i‘a he maomao

e noho höpue ana i loko o ko läkou mau ‘älualua

pöhaku a e hei ai i nä ‘upena pöuouo, ‘oiai, ua

muia, a ona a‘ela i waho, a ho‘omaka maila nö

ho‘i e pua nä lehua ‘öhi‘a.

9. Hinaia‘ele‘ele. ‘O ka ‘elima këia o nä malama

ma ka helu Hawai‘i, ‘o Mei ho‘i i ka helu Haole.

‘O ka mea i kapa ‘ia ai këia malama Hinaia‘ele‘ele,

‘o këia ka malama e momona ai ka manu kölea a

me nä manu a pau; a no ka ‘ele‘ele o ka umauma

o ka manu i ka momona i kapa ‘ia ai. ‘O ka lua,

he malama wï këia, a e pi‘i ana nä käne i ke

kuahiwi i ke ‘oki häpu‘u a me ke ma‘u i ‘ai; a ua

‘auamo maila ma ka ‘ä‘ï a i ka hiki ‘ana i kahakai,

ua ‘ele‘ele a ‘ano puka nä kïpo‘ohiwi, a puka nö

ke kïpo‘ohiwi o kekahi po‘e; a i ke ola ‘ana a‘e, ua

‘ele‘ele a‘ela kahi i ‘ölelo ‘ia.

ua malie. Pela i kapaia aku ai keia malama, no ka

hoonanana, a lele ana o na manu mai ko lakou

wahi e noho hopue ana.

6. Welo. O ka elua keia o na malama ma ka helu

Hawaii, a o Feberuari hoi ka helu haole. O keia

malama ka malama e kupu ai na meaulu, a ulu

ka hoi, ke pi’a, a kapaia e ka poe kahiko, ka huelo

ku. Ua ulu ae la ko laua maka a kohu huelo o ka

iole, a ua kuhihewa ka manu io, ame ka manu

pueo he huelo no ka iole, ua po’i hewa i ka maka

o ka hoi, ame ke pi’a.

7. Ikiiki. O ka ekolu keia o na malama ma ka

helu Hawaii, a o Maraki hoi i ka helu haole. He

ikiiki keia malama i ka ma’i, i ka wela a ka la, i

ka make, i ka wi. A ina ua ma’iia kekahi kane, a

wahine, a mau keiki paha, a kokoke e make, a

ola, mailoko mai o ia make, aole oia e loaa hou

ana i ka ma’i.

8. Kaaona. O ka eha keia o na malama ma ka

helu Hawaii; a o Aperila hoi i ka helu haole; o ka

mea i kapaia ai keia malama Kaaona, o keia ka

malama e puka mai ai ka i’a, he maomao e noho

hopue ana iloko o ko lakou mau alualua pohaku,

a e hei ai i na upena pououo, oiai, ua muia, a ona

ae la iwaho, a hoomaka mai la no hoi e pua na

lehua ohia.

9. Hinaiaeleele. O ka elima keia o na malama ma

ka helu Hawaii; o Mei hoi i ka helu haole. O ka

mea i kapaia ai keia malama Hinaiaeleele, o keia

ka malama e momona ai ka manu kolea, ame

na manu apau; a no ka eleele o ka umauma o

ka manu i ka momona i kapaia ai; o ka lua, he

malama wi keia, a e pii ana na kane i ke kuahiwi

i ke oki hapuu ame ke ma’u i ai; a ua auamo mai

la ma ka a-i a i ka hiki ana i kahakai, ua eleele a

ano puka na kipoohiwi, a puka no ke kipoohiwi

o kekahi poe; a i ke ola ana ae, ua eleele ae la kahi

i oleloia.

no ka mahi‘ai ‘ana, mähele 1 1 31 2 ka ho‘oilina: journal of hawaiian language sources ● march 2002

kolamu (column) 2

1. Ua ho‘ololi ‘ia ‘o “kuhiwi” ‘o ia ‘o “kuahiwi.”

“Kuhiwi” was changed to “kuahiwi.”

10. Mähoe Hope – This was the seventh month

in the Hawaiian count and July in English. This

was the first of the six rainy months and was

exactly like the one before it (Mähoe Mua). These

were the months in which the fruits ripened,

such as the mountain apples and the native

pineapples. This was the month in which the

fishes of the sea grew fat. The sea became calm

and sea moss grew on the canoes because they

were used so much.

11. ‘Ikuwä – This (Loud Noises) was the eighth

month in the Hawaiian count and August in the

English. It was called ‘Ikuwä (Noisy) because

there was rain and thunder and the saying is,

“‘Ikuwä i ka pohä kö‘ele‘ele” or “‘Ikuwä of the

black thunderstorms.” This was a month of

thunderstorms.

12. Kä‘elo (Drench) – This was the ninth month

in the Hawaiian count and September in the

English. It was so called because it was a wet

month, a soaking in the rain.

13. Makali‘i (Small Eyes) – This was the tenth

month in the Hawaiian count and October in the

English. It was so called because of the crackling

heat. This was a sunny month and whatever fruit

was left on the tree shriveled up and crackled like

Chinese firecrackers, snapping together with

other dry things.

14. Welehu – This was the eleventh month in the

Hawaiian count and November in the English.

This was the month spoken of by the ancients,

“Lay your head on the pillow, the month is

Welehu.”

15. Storms began in this month, high sea, winds

and pouring rains. A man found it impossible to

do anything else but sleep.

10. Mähoe hope. ‘O ka ‘ehiku këia o nä malama

ma ka helu Hawai‘i, a ‘o Iulai ho‘i i ka helu

Haole. ‘O këia ka malama mua o nä malama

‘eono o ka ho‘oilo, a ua like nö ko läua ‘ano a me

kä läua hana, a he mau mahina pala këia o nä

hua‘ai, e la‘a ka ‘öhi‘a kü kuahiwi,1 ka hala

Hawai‘i, a ‘o nä mahina kai ihola këia ‘o ka ulu a

momona nö ho‘i, a me ka mälie pü o ke kai, a ulu

ka limu i ka wa‘a no ka holo mau ‘ia.

11. ‘Ikuwä. ‘O ka ‘ewalu këia o nä malama ma

ka helu Hawai‘i, a ‘o ‘Aukake ho‘i i ka helu Haole.

‘O ka mea i kapa ‘ia ai këia malama ‘Ikuwä, he

ua, he hekili, a ‘ölelo ‘ia ai, “‘Ikuwä i ka pohä

kö‘ele‘ele.” He malama hekili këia.

12. Kä‘elo. ‘O ka ‘eiwa këia o nä malama ma ka

helu Hawai‘i, a ‘o Kepakemapa ho‘i i ka helu

Haole. ‘O ka mea i kapa ‘ia ai këia malama, he

malama ua këia, a pulu ‘elo, a ‘elo‘elo nö ho‘i i ka

pulu i ka ua.

13. Makali‘i. ‘O ka ‘umi këia o nä malama ma ka

helu Hawai‘i, a ‘o ‘Okakopa ho‘i i ka helu Haole.

‘O ka mea i kapa ‘ia ai këia malama ‘o Makali‘i ka

‘auhuhu pa‘ina. He malama nui këia o ka lä. ‘O

nä hua e kau ana e malo‘o ana i ka lä, a e

pa‘apa‘a‘ina ana, me he mea ho‘opahüpahü lä a

ka Päkë, a e pohäpohä like ana me nä päpapa ‘ë

a‘e.

14. Welehu. ‘O ka ‘umikumamäkahi këia o nä

malama ma ka helu Hawai‘i, a ‘o Nowemapa ho‘i

i ka helu Haole. ‘O ka malama këia e ‘ölelo ‘ia ai e

ka po‘e kahiko, kau ke po‘o i ka uluna ‘o

“Welehu ka malama.”

15. I këia malama e ho‘omaka ai ka ‘ino: ua, kai

ko‘o, makani, ua lanipili. ‘A‘ole hana e loa‘a i ke

kanaka; he hiamoe ka hana.

10. Mahoe hope. O ka ehiku keia o na malama

ma ka helu Hawaii, a o Iulai hoi i ka helu haole.

O keia ka malama mua o na malama eono o ka

hooilo, a ua like no ko laua ano ame ka laua

hana, a he mau mahina pala keia o na huaai; e

laa ka ohia ku kuhiwi, ka hala Hawaii, a o na

mahina kai iho la keia o ka ulu a momona no hoi,

ame ka malie pu o ke kai, a ulu ka limu i ka waa,

no ka holo mau ia.

11. Ikua. O ka ewalu keia o na malama ma ka

helu Hawaii, a o Augate hoi i ka helu haole. O

ka mea i kapaia ai keia malama Ikua, he ua, he

hekili, a olelo ia ai, “Ikua i ka pohakoeleele.” He

malama hekili keia.

12. Kaelo. O ka eiwa keia o na malama ma ka

helu Hawaii, a o Sepatemaba hoi i ka helu haole.

O ka mea i kapaia ai keia malama he malama ua

keia, a puluelo, a eloelo no hoi i ka pulu i ka ua.

13. Makalii. O ka umi keia o na malama ma ka

helu Hawaii, a o Okatoba hoi i ka helu haole. O

ka mea i kapaia ai keia malama o Makalii ka

auhuhu paina. He malama nui keia o ka la; o na

hua e kau ana e maloo ana i ka la, a e paapaaina

ana, me he mea hoopahupahu la a ka Pake, a e

pohapoha like ana me na papapa e ae.

14. Welehu. O ka umi-kumamakahi keia o na

malama ma ka helu Hawaii, a o Novemaba hoi i

ka helu haole. O ka malama keia e oleloia ai e ka

poe kahiko, kau ke poo i ka uluna o “welehu ka

malama.”

15. I keia malama e hoomaka ai ka ino; ua,

kaikoo, makani, ua lanipili. Aole hana e loaa i ke

kanaka; he hiamoe ka hana.

no ka mahi‘ai ‘ana, mähele 1 1 51 4 ka ho‘oilina: journal of hawaiian language sources ● march 2002

16. Kaulua – This was the twelfth month in the

Hawaiian count and December in English. The

leaves of the bananas fell one over the other as

they were blown and made to hang by the wind,

the pelting of the rain; and when one was sent to

go upland for taro, he’d refuse to go.

17. As the storms raged ceaselessly, those who

had some food at home, such as some mounds of

sweet potatoes in front of the house, found life

for the family.

18. To this month belonged the yearning and

patient waiting for the storm to subside, but the

storm did not clear in the least.

19. If no problems arise, I will tell you the char-

acters of the children born in these months.

20. My regards to the printers and much aloha

to the editor.

21. Z. P. K. KAWAIKAUMAIIKAMAKAOKA‘ÖPUA.

Child of the ivory pen.

Näpo‘opo‘o, Kona, Hawai‘i.

16. Kaulua. ‘O ka ‘umikumamälua këia o nä

malama ma ka helu Hawai‘i, a ‘o Dekemapa ho‘i

i ka helu Haole. ‘O Kaulua këia, ha‘a ka lau o ka

mai‘a, lohaloha i ka pä mau ‘ia e ka makani, e ka

‘üpä mau ‘ia e ka ua, a ke kënä aku kekahi e pi‘i i

wahi ‘ai, ‘a‘ole ‘ae mai.

17. ‘Oiai ka ‘ino e hana mao ‘ole ana, a ‘o ka po‘e

he wahi külana pala‘ai ko kauhale, a he mau pu‘e

‘uala ko ka ‘ïpuka hale, ola nö ka ‘ohana.

18. No këia mahina ke ulua a me ke ka‘ulua e

kali ana ‘o ka mälie a‘e, ‘a‘ole na‘e he mälie iki

‘o ka ‘ino.

19. Inä ‘a‘ole e loa‘a kekahi pilikia, e hö‘ike ‘ia

aku ana ke ‘ano o nä keiki hänau i loko o këia

mau malama.

20. Me nä keiki ho‘onoho hua ka ‘ano‘i, a ‘o ku‘u

aloha nui pau ‘ole me ka Luna ho‘oponopono.

21. Z. P. K. KAWAIKAUMAIIKAMAKAOKA‘ÖPUA.

Keiki o ka maka kila niho ‘elepani.

Näpo‘opo‘o, Kona, Hawai‘i.

16. Kaulua. O ka umi-kumamalua keia o na

malama ma ka helu Hawaii, a o Dekemaba hoi

ka helu haole. O kaulua keia haa ka lau o ka

maia, lohaloha i ka pa mau ia e ka makani, e ka

upa mau ia e ka ua, a ke kena aku kekahi e pii i

wahi ai, aole ae mai.

17. Oiai, ka ino e hana mao ole ana, a o ka poe

he wahi kulana palaai ko kauhale, a he mau pu’e

uala ko ka ipuka hale, ola no ka ohana.

18. No keia mahina ke ulua ame ke kaulua e kali

ana o ka malie ae, aole nae he malie iki o ka ino.

19. Ina aole e loaa kekahi pilikia, e hoikeia aku

ana ke ano o na keiki hanau iloko o keia mau

malama.

20. Me na keiki hoonohohua ka anoi, a o kuu

aloha nui pau ole me ka Lunahooponopono.

21. Z. P. K. KAWAIKAUMAIIKAMAKAOKAOPUA.

Keiki o ka makakila niho elepani.

Napoopoo, Kona, Hawaii.

kolamu (column) 2

1. Na Kamuela Kumukahi no ‘Ökoe, Kona, Hawai‘i, ka

puana me ka mana‘o o ka hua ‘ölelo “hä‘ao,” ‘o ia

ho‘i, ka ‘uala i kanu ‘ia i ka nahele.

The pronunciation and meaning of the word “hä‘ao”

(sweet potatoes planted in the wild), which is not a

dictionary entry, was provided by Kamuela

Kumukahi of ‘Ökoe, Kona, Hawai‘i.

1. SWEET POTATOES! SWEET POTATOES!

“Following the announcement of the President of

the Board of Education.” Greetings to you.

Clarifying issue 40, page 158, which was saying

that someone should identify the ancient vari-

eties of sweet potatoes found on the island and

perhaps in the districts where they reside.

2. South American Sweet Potatoes, namely new

sweet potatoes. Kama‘ipelekäne brought this

sweet potato after the end of the Citizen’s

Association. The place where he first distributed

this sweet potato, that is, the first district, was

Kalaupapa, because that was the place where he

first landed.

3. This (South American) sweet potato is wide-

spread here in Kalaupapa, and it appears that

there are numerous varieties; however, all of

these different sweet potatoes are new varieties.

They are saying, according to hearsay, that these

are Japanese and Californian Sweet Potatoes.The

majority of these sweet potatoes cultivated by

people were cultivated in mounds, and some

have been planted in the wild and so on; but per-

haps later we shall see the fruit of this labor when

God grants his greater salvation and we no

longer dig into the earth as the earth has been

dug up in times past.

4. Kalaupapa Sweet Potatoes, namely, sweet

potatoes from ancient times. The sum of what I

have seen here in Kalaupapa is 19: nine dark

Sweet Potatoes! Sweet Potatoes!

This letter appeared in Ka Hae Hawai‘i (The Hawaiian Flag newspaper) on March 4, 1857. M. L.

Näp i h e l u a ’ s letter clarifies the types of sweet potatoes planted and sold in Kalaupapa in the year 1857,

and is a response to Richard Armstrong’s article, “New Sweet Potatoes,” that was published in Ka Hae

Hawai‘i, on December 3, 1856. Translation by Noelani Arista.

1. ‘UALA! ‘UALA!

“Ma muli o ka ‘ölelo ho‘olaha a ka Peresidena o

ka Papa Ho‘ona‘auao.” Aloha ‘oe. E ho‘äkäka ana

ma ka helu 40, ‘ao‘ao 158, e ‘ï mai ana, “E pono e

hö‘ike aku kekahi i ke ‘ano o nä ‘uala kahiko ma

ka Mokupuni, a ma ka ‘Äpana paha, kahi a läkou

i noho ai.”

2. ‘Uala ‘Amelika Hema. ‘O ia ho‘i ka ‘uala hou.

Ua lawe mai ‘o Kama‘ipelekäne i këia ‘uala ma

hope mai o ka pau ‘ana o ka ‘Ahahui

Maka‘äinana. ‘O kahi äna i ho‘olaha mua ai i këia

‘uala, ‘o ia ho‘i ka ‘Äpana mua, ‘o Kalaupapa, no

ka mea, ‘o kahi nö këia äna i kü mua ai.

3. Ua laha këia ‘uala ma Kalaupapa nei, a lehulehu

nö ke ‘ano i ka ‘ike ‘ana aku; akä, ‘o këia mau

‘uala, he mau ‘uala hou mai nö läkou a pau. Ke

‘ölelo nei läkou ma muli o ka lohe, he ‘uala

Iäpana a he ‘uala Kaleponi. ‘O ka nui o këia ‘uala

i ho‘olaha ‘ia e nä känaka, he mau pu‘e kä

kekahi, a he hä‘ao1 kä kekahi, a pëlä aku; akä, ma

hope paha käkou e ‘ike ai i ka hua o këia hana

‘ana, ke waiho mai ke Akua i kona ola a ‘oi aku, a

ke ho‘olualua ‘ole mai ho‘i i ka honua, e like me

ka lualua ‘ana o ka honua i nä lä i hala a‘e nei.

4. ‘Uala Kalaupapa. ‘O ia ho‘i ka ‘uala kahiko.

‘O ka huina nui o ka‘u mau ‘uala i ‘ike ai ma

Kalaupapa nei, he ‘umi a me kumamäiwa (19):

1. UALA! UALA!

“Mamuli o ka Olelo Hoolaha a ka Peresidena o ka

Papa Hoonaauao.” Aloha oe[.] E hoakaka ana ma

ka (Helu 40, aoao 158) E i mai ana, e pono e

hoike aku kekahi i ke ano o na uala kahiko ma ka

Mokupuni, a ma ka Apana paha, kahi a lakou i

noho ai.

2. Uala Amerika Hema. Oia hoi ka uala hou[.]

Ua lawe mai o Kamaipelekane i keia uala,

mahope mai o ka pau ana o ka Ahahui

Makaainana. O kahi ana i hoolaha mua ai i keia

uala, oia hoi ka Apana mua o Kalaupapa, no ka

mea, o kahi no keia ana i ku mua’i.

3. Ua laha keia uala ma Kalaupapa nei, a lehulehu

no ke ano i ka ike ana’ku; aka, o keia mau uala,

he mau uala hou mai no lakou a pau. Ke olelo nei

lakou mamuli o ka lohe, he uala Iapana a he uala

Kaleponi. O ka nui o keia uala i hoolahaia e na

kanaka, he mau pue ka kekahi, a he haao ka

kekahi a pela’ku; aka, mahope paha kakou e ike

ai i ka hua o keia hana ana, ke waiho mai ke

Akua i kona ola a oi aku, a ke hoolualua ole mai

hoi i ka honua, e like me ka lualua ana o ka

honua i na la i hala ae nei.

4. Uala Kalaupapa. Oia hoi ka uala kahiko. O ka

huina nui o ka’u mau uala i ike ai ma Kalaupapa

nei. He umi a me kumamaiwa (19.)–Eiwa uala

‘Uala! ‘Uala!

Ua puka këia leka i Ka Hae Hawai‘i i ka lä 4 o Malaki, 1857. He ho‘äkäka ko M. L. Näpihelua leka i ke

‘ano o nä ‘uala i kanu a kü‘ai ‘ia ma Kalaupapa i ka makahiki 1857. He pane ia leka i ka ‘atikala a

Limaikaika, ‘o “Ka ‘Uala Hou,” i pa‘i ‘ia ma Ka Hae Hawai‘i, ma ka lä 3 o Dekemapa, 1856. Unuhi ‘ia e

Noelani Arista.

16 17

no ka mahi‘ai ‘ana, mähele 1 1 91 8 ka ho‘oilina: journal of hawaiian language sources ● march 2002

kolamu (column) 2

2. Ua ho‘ololi ‘ia ‘o “elele” ‘o ia ‘o “‘ele‘ele.”

“Elele” was changed to “‘ele‘ele.”

3. Ua ho‘ololi ‘ia ‘o “loiloli” ‘o ia ‘o “loliloli.”

“Loiloli” was changed to “loliloli.”

sweet potato varieties and ten white. Of the dark

sweet potatoes previously mentioned, only three

are good, the ‘apo, likolehua and the hälonaipu.

These may be the names by which they are

known on other islands, or maybe they have

other names in some places. I have heard that

the name of the hälonaipu on Kaua‘i is möhihi.

These three sweet potatoes mentioned above are

always sold by those of Kalaupapa, with the addi-

tion of some white and some dark sweet pota-

toes. However, when the likolehua and hälonaipu

are sold, they are heaped up at the port like

bruised mountain apples on the beach, dark pur-

ple against the pähoehoe, causing the eyes of the

people to rove up and down with desire for the

farmer’s produce.

5. Regarding the request of the President of the

Board of Education, which asked us to report all

the undesireable sweet potatoes; that is, those

sweet potatoes that are watery and blighted: All

of the white sweet potatoes are the ones which

are watery and blighted since they became

spoiled because the white men did not want

them. However, according to the order, all of the

unsuitable sweet potatoes are to be eradicated.

Let us pause there. Perhaps the best thing to do

is to set aside the unwanted sweet potatoes for

families and animals, because we know that

Hawaiians have large appetites, they are always

eating, that is how their bellies become swollen,

from consuming the vegetables of Ma‘iola. And

we should set aside the darker traditional sweet

potatoes and the South American varieties for

trading with ships.

6. Kalaupapa is a land suited for crops because

the crops which are planted flourish and the

yield is large. They are not destroyed by caterpil-

lars or worms, there is only one big pest and that

is the mouths of the animals. From Kalaupapa

to Waikolu there are about a hundred or more

animals, cows, horses, mules and donkeys. The

‘eiwa ‘uala ‘ele‘ele (9), he ‘umi ‘uala ke‘oke‘o

(10). ‘O këlä mau ‘uala ‘ele‘ele i ha‘i ‘ia ma luna,

‘ekolu wale nö o läkou i maika‘i, ‘o ka ‘apo,

likolehua, me ka hälonaipu. ‘O ia paha ka inoa

o këia mau ‘uala i laha a‘e ma kekahi mau

Mokupuni, he inoa ‘ë a‘e paha ma kauwahi. Ua

lohe wau, ‘o ka inoa o ka hälonaipu ma Kaua‘i,

he möhihi. ‘O këia mau ‘uala ‘ekolu i ha‘i ‘ia a‘e

ma luna, ‘o ko Kalaupapa mau ‘uala kü‘ai mau

‘ia nö këia, o komo nä ke‘oke‘o a me kekahi mau

‘uala ‘ele‘ele.2 Akä, ‘o ka likolehua, a me ka

hälonaipu, i ka wä e kü‘ai ai, ahu iho i ke awa

kü moku me he ‘öhi‘a pë lä i kahakai, ka uliuli

polohua i ka papa pähoehoe. Ka holo nö ia a ka

‘önohi i luna i lalo, i ka makemake i ka hua o ka

mahi‘ai.

5. Ma muli o ka ‘ölelo noi a ka Pelekikena o ka

Papa Ho‘ona‘auao, e ‘ï mai ana, e ha‘i aku i nä

‘uala i makemake ‘ole ‘ia, ‘o ia ho‘i nä ‘uala

loliloli3 a makika. ‘O nä ‘uala ke‘oke‘o a pau, ‘o

läkou kai loliloli a makika, no ka mea, e like me

ka makemake ‘ole o ka Haole pëlä nö läkou i

loliloli ai a pau. Akä ho‘i, ma muli o ke kauoha,

e kinai aku i nä ‘uala pono ‘ole a pau. ‘Eä, alia iki

käua ma laila, eia paha ka pono, e ho‘oka‘awale i

nä ‘uala i makemake ‘ole ‘ia no nä ‘ohana a me

nä holoholona, no ka mea, ua ‘ike nö käua i ka

Hawai‘i he ‘öpü nui, pä ko‘u iho nö pä ko‘u iho

nö, pëlä ka pehu o ka ‘öpü i ke komo a ka lau ‘ai

a Ma‘iola. A e ho‘oka‘awale i nä ‘uala ‘ele‘ele

kahiko a me ka ‘uala ‘Amelika Hema i mea

kälepa aku me nä moku.

6. He ‘äina maika‘i ‘o Kalaupapa no nä mea

kanu, he puka ke kanu aku, a he mähuahua ka

loa‘a ‘ana mai. ‘A‘ole pau i ka ‘enuhe a me ka

poko. Ho‘okahi nö pe‘elua nui, ‘o ia ka waha o

nä holoholona ma Kalaupapa a hiki ma Waikolu,

haneli a keu aku nä holoholona. Pipi, lio, miula,

hoki, ‘a‘ole i pau ka moni ‘ana ma këia mau mea,

eleele, (9.) He umi uala keokeo, (10) O kela mau

uala eleele i haiia maluna, ekolu wale no o lakou i

maikai, o ka apo, likolehua, me ka halonaipu, oia

paha ka inoa o keia mau uala i laha ae ma kekahi

mau Mokupuni, he inoa e ae paha ma kauwahi.

Ua lohe wau, o ka inoa o ka halonaipu ma Kauai,

he mohihi. O keia mau uala ekolu i haiia ae

maluna, o ko Kalaupapa mau uala kuai mau ia

no keia, o komo na keokeo a me kekahi mau uala

elele. Aka, o ka likolehua, a me ka halonaipu, i ka

wa e kuai ai; ahu iho i ke awa ku moku; me he

ohia pe la i kahakai, ka uliuli polohua i ka papa

pahoehoe, ka holo no ia a ka onohi iluna i lalo, i

ka makemake i ka hua o ka mahiai.

5. Mamuli o ka olelo noi a ka Peresidena o ka

Papa Hoonaauao, e i mai ana, e hai aku i na uala

i makemake ole ia, oia hoi na uala loiloli a

makika, o na uala keokeo a pau, o lakou ka i

loliloli a makika, no ka mea, e like me ka make-

make ole o ka haole pela no lakou i loliloli ai a

pau. Aka hoi, mamuli o ke kauoha, e kinai aku i

na uala pono ole a pau. Ea, alia iki kaua malaila,

eia paha ka pono, e hookaawale i na uala i make-

make ole ia, no na ohana a me na holoholona, no

ka mea, ua ike no kaua i ka Hawaii he opu nui,

pa ko’u iho no pa ko’u iho no, pela ka pehu o ka

opu, i ke komo a ka lau ai a maiola. A e

hookaawale i na uala eleele kahiko a me ka uala

Am. Hema, i mea kalepa aku me na moku.

6. He aina maikai o Kalaupapa no na mea kanu,

he puka ke kanu aku, a he mahuahua ka loaa ana

mai, aole pau i ka enuhe a me ka poko, hookahi

no peelua nui, oia ka waha o na holoholona ma

Kalaupapa, a hiki ma Waikolu, haneri a keu aku

na holoholona. Bipi, Lio, Miula, Hoki, aole i pau

ka moni ana ma keia mau mea, ke mauu nei no.

no ka mahi‘ai ‘ana, mähele 1 2 12 0 ka ho‘oilina: journal of hawaiian language sources ● march 2002

kolamu (column) 2

4. Ua ho‘ololi ‘ia ‘o “mawah” ‘o ia ‘o “ma waho.”

“Mawah” was changed to “ma waho.”

5. Ua ho‘ololi ‘ia ‘o “pelekai” ‘o ia ‘o “palekai.”

“Pelekai” was changed to “palekai.”

animals don’t stop at eating these things; they

are also grazing. People are wrong to think that

the land is productive, for it is just the same. It is

the animals that are increasing, raiding and raid-

ing. Our gardens are like where the rigging ropes

hang outside on the rails of the whale ships as

they lurch through the sea, not a thought is given

to bailing out the seawater (that is, the gardens

are not well taken care of).

7. A great deal of sweet potatoes are being plant-

ed now, with three, four, or more gardens per

person. The extent of planting watermelons is

even greater, and they are planting string beans,

pole beans and onions. Be alert, traders, because

Kalaupapa is foremost on Moloka‘i island for

best prices and good work. All of the California

ships moor at Kalaupapa. This is my humble

opinion, with my regards.

M. L. NÄPIHELUA.

8. Kalaupapa, Moloka‘i, January 31, 1857.

ke mau‘u nei nö. He kuhi hewa ko nä känaka e

pane‘e aku ana ka ‘äina, ‘o kona mau nö ia e

waiho nei. ‘O ka holoholona ke pane‘e nei,

ho‘ouka iho nö ho‘ouka iho nö. Ua like ko mäkou

wahi kïhäpai me kahi ho‘omaha o nä kaula likini

ma waho4 o nä palekai5 o nä moku ‘ö koholä ka

‘oni i loko o ke kai, ‘a‘ole mana‘o iki no ka liu

kauwahi.

7. Ua nui ka ‘uala e kanu ‘ia nei i këia manawa.

‘Ekolu, ‘ehä, a ‘oi aku ka nui o nä mäla a ke

kanaka. ‘O ka ipu haole na‘e ka ‘oi o ka nui, ke

kanu nei ka päpapa hiki, a me ka päpapa ‘aukä, a

me ke ‘aka‘akai. E maka‘ala ‘oukou, e nä mea

kälepa, no ka mea, ‘o Kalaupapa ke po‘okela o ko

Moloka‘i nei Mokupuni i ka nui o ke kumu kü‘ai,

a me ka holo o ka hana ‘ana. Ma Kalaupapa e kü

ai nä Kaleponi a pau. ‘O ia ko‘u wahi mana‘o me

ke aloha pü kekahi. Na M. L. NÄPIHELUA.

8. Kalaupapa, Moloka‘i, Ianuali 31, 1857.

He kuhihewa ko na kanaka e panee aku ana ka

aina, o kona mau no ia e waiho nei, o ka

holoholona ke panee nei, hoouka iho no hoouka

iho no, ua like ko makou wahi kihapai me kahi

hoomaha o na kaula likini mawah o na pelekai o

na moku okohola ka oni iloko o ke kai, aole

manao iki no ka liu kau wahi.

7. Ua nui ka uala e kanu ia nei i keia manawa,

ekolu eha a oi aku ka nui o na mala a ke kanaka,

o ka ipu haole nae ka oi o ka nui, ke kanu nei ka

papapa hiki, a me ka papapa auka, a me ke

akaakai. E makaala oukou e na mea kalepa, no ka

mea; o Kalaupapa ke pookela o ko Molokai nei

Mokupuni, i ka nui o ke kumu kuai, a me ka holo

o ka hana ana, ma Kalaupapa e ku ai na Kaleponi

a pau. Oia ko’u wahi manao me ke aloha pu

kekahi. Na M. L. NAPIHELUA.

8. Kalaupapa, Molokai, Ian. 31, 1857.

kolamu (column) 2

1. Ua ho‘ololi ‘ia ‘o “nui” ‘o ia ‘o “niu.”

“Nui” was changed to “niu.”

1. Concerning the Coconut Tree.

Greetings to you, O Friends, the readers of the

Hae Hawai‘i. I am going to tell you of a thing

very important to the natives of Fatu Hiva, Hiva

Oa and Tahuata.

2. The success or failure of the natives of Fatu

Hiva, Hiva Oa and Tahuata depends on the tree

we call niu (coconut). That is the thing called ‘ehi

by the natives of the Marquesas Islands.

3. When I first landed at the Marquesas Islands,

I was very desirous of obtaining coconut water

and when I received it, the sea sickness and

dizziness ended.

4. During the time we lived there, six years, I

saw what the natives used the coconut trees for

and I felt admiration for the many uses that peo-

ple made of it. I also learned to regret that so

many people became intoxicated and died. I will

first tell you of the many blessings to people from

the coconut tree.

5. 1. Its body is used for fuel, from trunk to

leaves; all of it can be used for fuel. If dry, all can

be used for fuel.

Concerning the Coconut Tree

This is a letter from Rev. Samuel Kauwëaloha, one of the Hawaiian ministers who sailed to Fatu Hiva in

the year 1853 and resided there for many years. Hawaiian ministers and their families frequently wrote

letters home to the brethren in Hawai‘i and these letters were a regular feature in various newspapers. In

this letter, Kauwëaloha shows his admiration for the ingenuity of the Fatuhivans and compiles a list of

the different ways the natives of that place used niu, or ‘ehi as they called it. Published in the newspaper

Ka Hae Hawai‘i (The Hawaiian Flag), January 23, 1861, page 178.

1. No Ka Lä‘au Niu.

Aloha ‘oukou e nä makamaka, e ka po‘e e

heluhelu iho ana i Ka Hae Hawai‘i: E ha‘i aku ana

au iä ‘oukou i kekahi mea nui a‘u i ‘ike iho nei i

waena o nä känaka kama‘äina o Fatu Hiva me

Hiva Oa a me Tahuata.

2. ‘O ka pömaika‘i nui ‘ana a me ka pö‘ino nui o

nä känaka ma Fatu Hiva, Hiva Oa, Tahuata, no

loko mai o ka lä‘au i kapa ‘ia e käkou he niu, ‘o ia

nö ho‘i ka mea i kapa ‘ia e nä känaka ma ko

Nu‘uhiva Pae ‘Äina he ‘ehi.

3. I ko‘u pae mua ‘ana ma Fatu Hiva, ‘i‘ini maila

ko‘u na‘au e loa‘a kekahi wai o ka niu; a i ka loa‘a

‘ana, ua pau ke poluea me ka maka pöniuniu.

4. A i ka noho ‘ana o mäkou ma ka ‘äina a hala

kekahi mau makahiki ‘eono, nänä akula au i ka

hana a nä kama‘äina no ka lä‘au niu; a loa‘a

ia‘u ka mahalo aku i ka niu, no ka nui ‘ana o ko

känaka waiwai i loko ona. A loa‘a pü nö ho‘i ia‘u

ka menemene i ka nui o nä känaka e ‘ona ana,

a e make ana. E ha‘i mua aku au i ka nui o ko

känaka pömaika‘i no loko o ka niu.1

5. 1. He mea wahie kona kino, mai ke kumu a

me nä lau; pau loa kona mau mea i ka lilo i

wahie. Inä e malo‘o, ua pau loa i mea wahie.

1. No ka laau Niu.

Aloha oukou e na makamaka, e ka poe e heluhelu

iho ana i ka Hae Hawaii: E hai aku ana au ia

oukou i kekahi mea nui au i ike iho nei iwaena o

na kanaka kamaaina o Fatuiva me Hivaoa a me

Tahuata.

2. O ka pomaikai nui ana a me ka poino nui o na

kanaka ma Fatuiva, Hivaoa, Tahuata, noloko

mai o ka laau i kapaia e kakou he niu, oia no hoi

ka mea i kapaia e na kanaka ma ko Nuuhiva Pae

Aina he ehi.

3. I ko’u pae mua ana ma Fatuiva; iini mai la

ko’u naau e loaa kekahi wai o ka niu; a i ka loaa

ana, ua pau ke poluea, me ka maka poniuniu.

4. A i ka noho ana o makou ma ka aina a hala

kekahi mau makahiki eono, nana aku la au i ka

hana a na kamaaina no ka laau niu; a loaa ia’u ka

mahalo aku i ka niu, no ka nui ana o ko kanaka

waiwai iloko ona, a loaa pu no hoi ia’u ka

menemene i ka nui o na kanaka e ona ana, a e

make ana. E hai mua aku au i ka nui o ko kanaka

pomaikai noloko o ka nui.

5. 1. He mea wahie kona kino, mai ke kumu a

me na lau; pau loa kona mau mea i ka lilo i

wahie. Ina e maloo, ua pau loa i mea wahie.

No ka Lä‘au Niu

He leka këia na Samuel Kauwëaloha, kekahi o nä kähuna pule Hawai‘i i holo aku i Fatu Hiva i ka makahiki

1853 a i noho lö‘ihi ma laila. Ua leka pinepine mai nä kähuna pule a me nä ‘ohana i nä hoa ma Hawai‘i

nei, a ‘ike pinepine ‘ia ia mau leka ma nä nüpepa Hawai‘i. Ma käna leka, hö‘ike ‘o Kauwëaloha i kona

mahalo i ke akamai o ka po‘e Fatu Hiva, a helu ho‘i ‘o ia i nä ‘ano like ‘ole e ho‘ohana ‘ia ai ka niu, ka mea

i kapa ‘ia e läkou he ‘ e h i. Ua pa‘i ‘ia ma Ka Hae Hawai‘i i ka lä 23 o Ianuali, 1861, ma ka ‘ao‘ao 178.

22 23

no ka mahi‘ai ‘ana, mähele 1 2 52 4 ka ho‘oilina: journal of hawaiian language sources ● march 2002

kolamu (column) 2

2. Ua ho‘ololi ‘ia ‘o “kaulua” ‘o ia ‘o “kälua.”

“Kaulua” was changed to “kälua.”

6. 2. It is used to cover the tops of houses. The

leaves are used to thatch people’s houses and it is

good for two years.

7. 3. It is used for brooms to sweep houses or

ships with. The part called the nï‘au (is used),

that is the midrib of the coconut leaf. It makes a

very good house broom and such brooms are

sold by children to the foreigners on the ships.

8. 4. It is used for mats. The leaves of the

coconut are much used by people to sleep on, to

spread underneath. There are very few lauhala

mats, most of them are of coconut leaves.

9. 5. It is used for timber in building houses. The

trunks of the coconut trees make good posts or

beams. The wood is hard.

10. 6. It is used for food. The meat and water are

very good. Young coconuts are good for small

children and for adults. The meat is delicious.

The people like the meat and water to mix with

breadfruit poi and to roast with taro and sweet

potatoes. Coconut milk is almost like cow’s milk.

11. 7. It is used for lamp oil. The oil of the

coconut is good for lighting the house. Coconut

oil does not have the stench of whale oil. It is a

fragrant oil, therefore it is good to make scented

oil of coconut.

12. 8. It is used for medicines. The water of the

coconut, heated and mixed with other ingredi-

ents to be ingested, does not take long to act on

the bowels and causes vomiting. It relieves the

stomach.

13. 9. It is used in making sennit ropes. The

coconut husk is used to make ropes for houses,

ropes for canoes, for nets and other things.

6. 2. He mea uhi hale ma luna iho. ‘O ka lau niu

ka mea e ako ai i nä hale o nä känaka, e mau nö

ka pa‘a a hala nä makahiki ‘elua.

7. 3. He mea pülumi hale a pülumi no nä moku.

‘O ka mea i kapa ‘ia he nï‘au, ‘o ia ka iwi o ka lau

niu. Maika‘i këlä mea i mea pülumi hale, a he

mea kü‘ai a nä kamali‘i me nä Haole moku.

8. 4. He mea moena. ‘O ka lau niu, ‘o ia ka nui o

nä mea e moe ai nä känaka, i mea häli‘ili‘i ma

lalo. He mea käka‘ikahi nä moena lau hala maoli,

‘o ka lau niu ka mea nui.

9. 5. He mea lä‘au hale. ‘O ke kino o ka niu, he

lä‘au maika‘i i mea pou hale, a i mea kua hale. He

lä‘au ‘o‘ole‘a.

10. 6. He mea ‘ai. ‘O ka ‘i‘o a me ka wai kona

mea päkela loa i ka maika‘i. Maika‘i nä niu ‘öpio,

no nä keiki li‘ili‘i a me nä känaka nunui, he mea

‘ono kona ‘i‘o. Makemake nui nä känaka i ka ‘i‘o

a me ka wai niu, he mea e käwili me ka poi ‘ulu, a

e kälua2 pü me ke kalo a me ka ‘uala. Ua ‘ane like

ka wai niu me ka waiü o ka pipi.

11. 7. He ‘aila kukui: He maika‘i ka ‘aila o ka niu

i mea mälamalama no ka hale. ‘A‘ole pilau o ka

‘aila niu e like me ka ‘aila koholä. He ‘aila ‘a‘ala,

no laila i maika‘i ai ke hana ‘ia i ‘aila mano‘i.

12. 8. He mea hana i lä‘au lapa‘au. ‘O ka wai niu

i kunu ‘ia a wela a käwili me kekahi lä‘au ‘ë a‘e,

‘o ia ka mea e inu ai, ‘a‘ole e li‘uli‘u a hï, a me ka

lua‘i ma luna. Ua loa‘a ka ‘olu‘olu ma ka ‘öpü.

13. 9. He mea hana i kaula ‘aha. ‘O ka pulu o ka

niu, ‘o ia ka mea e hana ai i kaula hale, a i kaula

wa‘a, a i mea ‘upena, a me kekahi hana ‘ë a‘e.

6. 2. He mea uhi hale maluna iho; o ka lau niu ka

mea e ako ai i na hale o na kanaka; e mau no ka

paa a hala na makahiki elua.

7. 3. He mea burumi hale a burumi no na moku;

o ka mea i kapaia he niau; oia ka iwi o ka lau niu,

maikai kela mea i mea burumi hale, a he mea

kuai a na kamalii me na haole moku.

8. 4. He mea moena. O ka lau niu, oia ka nui o

na mea e moe ai na kanaka, i mea haliilii malalo;

he mea kakaikahi na moena lauhala maoli, o ka

launiu ka mea nui.

9. 5. He mea laauhale; o ke kino o ka niu, he laau

maikai i mea pou hale, a i mea kua hale, he laau

oolea.

10. 6. He mea ai, o ka io a me ka wai kona mea

pakela loa i ka maikai. Maikai na niu opio, no na

keiki liilii a me na kanaka nunui, he mea ono

kona io; makemake nui na kanaka i ka io a me ka

wai niu, he mea e kawili me ka poi ulu, a e

kaulua pu me ke kalo a me ka uwala; ua ane like

ka wai niu, me ka waiu o ka bipi.

11. 7. He aila kukui: He maikai ka aila o ka niu i

mea malamalama no ka hale; aole pilau o ka aila

niu e like me ka aila kohola, he aila aala, nolaila i

maikai ai ke hanaia i aila manoi.

12. 8. He mea hana i laau lapaau. O ka wai niu i

kunu ia a wela a kawili me kekahi laau e ae; oia

ka mea e inu ai; aole e liuliu a hi, a me ka luai

maluna. Ua loaa ka oluolu ma ka opu.

13. 9. He mea hana i kaula aha, o ka pulu o ka

niu, oia ka mea e hana ai i kaula hale, a i kaula

waa, a i mea upena, a me kekahi hana e ae.

no ka mahi‘ai ‘ana, mähele 1 2 72 6 ka ho‘oilina: journal of hawaiian language sources ● march 2002

14. 10. It is used for animal food, for pigs, dogs,

cats and chickens. The animals fatten on this

good food.

15. 11. It is used in making fans. It is very good

looking. The young coconut leaves and the leaf

stalk are used in plaiting into a fan. Such fans are

much liked by the people to carry in their hands

and are pretty to look at.

16. 12. It is used for trading with foreigners on

ships. The natives trade the coconuts to the

Whites for knives, necklaces, cloth, files, bullets,

flint and many other things.

17. 13. It is used for water bottles. The coconut

shells are used by the people for carrying water

and also for food containers. If all the meat is

taken out, the shell is good.

18. These are the uses made by the natives of the

coconut tree. It is a good thing that it was given

to the people of these islands.

19. God made things of benefit for the people

from the coconut. I have explained previously

and you have seen clearly and perhaps you

admire it for the many benefits to man. It is truly

beneficial. The coconut tree is like a treasure

chest to man.

20. The natives of these islands cannot fail to

recognize the usefulness of every kind, nor can

they change it, for they are used to the blessings I

have already mentioned. These are the customs

they have inherited from their ancestors.

21. About the year 1851, an English sailor

deserted and lived by ‘O‘omoa stream. He joined

Tommy Clark, an Englishman who lived there a

long time. The two foreigners got together to

make the sap flow out of the young coconuts.

14. 10. He mea ‘ai na nä holoholona, na ka

pua‘a, me ka ‘ïlio, pöpoki, me ka moa. Momona

nä holoholona i këia ‘ai maika‘i.

15. 11. He mea hana pe‘ahi. ‘O ia ka mea maika‘i

i ka nänä ‘ana. ‘O ka lau niu ‘öpiopio, a ‘o ka iwi i

loko, ‘o ia ka mea e nala ai i pe‘ahi makani. He

mea makemake nui ‘ia e nä känaka i mea lawe

ma ko läkou mau lima, he nani i ka nänä ‘ana.

16. 12. He mea kü‘ai aku me nä Haole o nä

moku. ‘O ka niu kä nä kama‘äina e kü‘ai aku ai

me nä Haole, a loa‘a mai ka pahi, me ka lei, me

ka lole, a me ke apuapu, a me ka pökä, ka

pöhaku paea, a me kekahi mau mea ‘ë a‘e he nui.

17. 13. He mea hue wai. ‘O nä ipu niu ‘o ia ka

mea lawe wai o nä känaka a me kä läkou mau ipu

‘ai. ‘O ka iwi o nä niu, inä e pau ka ‘i‘o ma loko,

‘o ia ka mea maika‘i.

18. ‘O ia kä nä känaka kama‘äina waiwai no loko

mai o ka lä‘au niu. He mea maika‘i wale nö kä ka

niu i hä‘awi mai i nä känaka ma këia pae ‘äina.

19. Ua hana mai ke Akua i nä mea e pömaika‘i ai

nä känaka no loko o ka niu. Ua ho‘äkäka a‘ela au

ma mua, a ua ‘ike akäka le‘a ‘oukou, a mahalo

loa paha ‘oukou i ka nui o ka pömaika‘i o nä

känaka. He ‘oia‘i‘o nö ka pömaika‘i o nä känaka,

me he pahu waiwai lä ka lä‘au niu no ke kanaka.

20. ‘O nä kama‘äina ma këia pae moku, ‘a‘ole e

hiki iä läkou ke hö‘ano ‘ë a‘e i ka waiwai i këlä

‘ano këia ‘ano, ‘a‘ole e hiki ke ho‘okähuli. Ua

ma‘a läkou i nä pömaika‘i a‘u i ha‘i a‘ela ma mua,

‘o ia wale nö, ua ma‘a läkou mai nä küpuna mai.

21. A i ka makahiki 1851 paha, mahuka a‘ela

kekahi wahi Haole luina Pelekäne, a noho ma ke

kahawai ‘o ‘O‘omoa, a hui pü këlä wahi Haole me

Tomi Clerk, he Haole Pelekäne i noho lö‘ihi ma

laila. Ua hui këlä mau Haole e ho‘okahe i ka wai

14. 10. He mea ai na na holoholona, na ka puaa,

me ka ilio, popoki, me ka moa. Momona na

holoholona i keia ai maikai.

15. 11. He mea hana peahi: Oia ka mea maikai i

ka nana ana. O ka lau niu opiopio, a o ka iwi

iloko, oia ka mea e nala ai i peahi makani; he

mea makemake nui ia e na kanaka i mea lawe

ma ko lakou mau lima; he nani i ka nana ana.

16. 12. He mea kuai aku me na haole o na moku.

O ka niu ka na kamaaina e kuai aku ai me na

haole, a loaa mai ka pahi, me ka lei, me ka lole,

a me ke apuapu, a me ka poka, ka pohaku paea,

a me kekahi mau mea e ae he nui.

17. 13. He mea hue-wai: o na ipu niu oia ka mea

lawe wai o na kanaka, a me ka lakou mau ipu ai;

o ka iwi o na niu. Ina e pau ka io maloko, oia ka

mea maikai.

18. Oia ka na kanaka kamaaina waiwai noloko

mai o ka laau niu. He mea maikai wale no ka ka

niu i haawi mai i na kanaka ma keia pae aina.

19. Ua hana mai ke Akua i na mea e pomaikai ai

na kanaka noloko o ka niu; ua hoakaka ae la au

mamua, a ua ike akaka lea oukou; a mahalo loa

paha oukou i ka nui o ka pomaikai o na kanaka.

He oiaio no ka pomaikai o na kanaka, me he

pahu waiwai la ka laau niu no ke kanaka.

20. O na kamaaina ma keia pae moku, aole e hiki

ia lakou ke hoano e ae i ka waiwai i kela ano keia

ano; aole e hiki ke hookahuli, ua maa lakou i na

pomaikai a’u i hai ae la mamua; oia wale no, ua

maa lakou mai na kupuna mai.

21. A i ka makahiki 1851 paha; mahuka ae la

kekahi wahi haole luina Beretane, a noho ma ke

kahawai o Oomoa, a huipu kela wahi haole me

Tomi Clerk, he haole Beretane i noho loihi

malaila. Ua hui kela mau haole e hookahe i ka

no ka mahi‘ai ‘ana, mähele 1 2 92 8 ka ho‘oilina: journal of hawaiian language sources ● march 2002

kolamu (column) 2

3. Ua ho‘ololi ‘ia ‘o “o” ‘o ia ‘o “a.”

“O” was changed to “a.”

4. “‘A‘ole i pau” (Not finished): ‘Oiai kü ho‘okahi këia

mo‘olelo nei, ua ho‘omau ‘ia ma kekahi pukana o Ka

Hae Hawai‘i.

“‘A‘ole i pau” (Not finished): Although this article

stood on its own, it was continued in the next issue of

Ka Hae Hawai‘i.

The natives saw the foreigners doing it and imi-

tated them. In doing it, much sap flowed which

was gathered into long bamboos for five or six

days. They brewed rum in an iron pot and out of

it came rum of coconut sap. The fluid that flowed

out was an intoxicant. The white men and the

native who first made it drank and became

drunk. The other men looked and thought of

tasting. They tasted a little and a little more until

men and women liked rum drinking. Because

some knew how to make it, they traded it for

tapa, loincloths, breadfruit and fish. That was

when we landed at ‘O‘omoa in August 26, 1853.

(To be continued.) S. KAUWËALOHA.

no loko mai o ka lolo niu ‘öpio. A hana läua, a

‘ike maila nä kama‘äina i ka hana a3 këia mau

Haole, ho‘omähu‘i pü maila e hana. A i ka hana

‘ana, kahe nui maila ka wai, a hö‘ili‘ili läkou a

piha nä ‘ohe loloa. A hala nä lä ‘elima a ‘eono,

puhi lama läkou i loko o kekahi ipu hao, a kahe

maila ka lama wai niu. ‘O këlä mea i kahe mai,

he lama ‘ona, inu ihola nä haole a me nä känaka

i hana mua i ka lama, a ‘ona. Nänä maila nä

känaka ‘ë a‘e, a kuko e ho‘ä‘o. Ho‘ä‘o iki, a ho‘ä‘o

iki, a makemake like nä käne a me nä wähine i ka

inu lama. A no ka hapa o ka po‘e i ‘ike i ka hana

lama, ua kü‘ai mai me ke kapa, me ka malo, a me

ka ‘ulu, me ka i‘a. ‘O ia nö ho‘i nä lä o ko mäkou

pae ‘ana ma ‘O‘omoa, ‘Aukake 26, 1853.

(‘A‘ole i pau.)4 S. KAUWËALOHA.

wai noloko mai o ka lolo niu opio; a hana laua

a ike mai la na kamaaina i ka hana o keia mau

haole, hoomahui pu mai la e hana; a i ka hana

ana, kahe nui mai la ka wai; a hoiliili lakou a piha

na ohe loloa, a hala na la elima a eono, puhi rama

lakou iloko o kekahi ipu hao, a kahe mai la ka

rama wai niu. O kela mea i kahe mai; he rama

ona, inu iho la na haole a me na kanaka i hana

mua i ka rama, a ona; nana mai la na kanaka e ae;

a kuko e hoao, hoao iki, a hoao iki; a makemake

like na kane a me na wahine i ka inu rama. A no

ka hapa o ka poe i ike i ka hana rama, ua kuai

mai, me ke kapa, me ka malo, a me ka ulu, me ka

ia. Oia no hoi na la o ko makou pae ana ma

Oomoa Aug. 26, 1853.

(Aole i pau.) S. KAUWEALOHA.

kolamu (column) 2

1. ‘Oihana 17:26 o ka Paipala.

Acts 17:26 of the Bible.

kolamu (column) 3

1. ‘O ke po‘oinoa ma ‘ane‘i, mai kekahi ho‘opuka ‘ana

mai ia o ka makahiki 1839 i komo pü ai ka unuhi

‘ölelo Pelekänia o ke Kumukänäwai.

The title presented here is from a separate publication

in 1839 that published the English translation of the

Constitution.

1. THE

HAWAIIAN SPECTATOR.

Conducted by

AN ASSOCIATION OF

GENTLEMEN.

VOLUME II. 1839.

PRINTED FOR THE PROPRIETORS.

HONOLULU, O‘AHU, SANDWICH

ISLANDS.

1839.

<Translation of the

Constitution

of

Our Hawaiian Islands.>1

God hath made of one blood all nations of men,

to dwell on the face of the earth in unity and

blessedness. God has also bestowed certain

rights alike on all men, and all chiefs and all peo-

ple of all lands.

2. These are some of the rights which he has

given alike to every man and every chief, life,

The 1839 Constitution

This section of the journal will reproduce government documents beginning with the constitutions of

Hawai‘i.

The first constitution, granted by King Kamehameha III, proclaimed the rights of the people, ensuring

equal protection for both the people and the chiefs. Written by Kamehameha III and the Chiefs, and

enacted on June 7, 1839; published as He Kumukänäwai a me ke Känäwai Ho‘oponopono Waiwai no ko

Hawai‘i Nei Pae ‘Äina, Honolulu, 1839, and in English in The Hawaiian Spectator, Vol. II, No. 3,

Honolulu, July 1839. Forbes 1147 (II:211–213) and 1099 (II:181–183).

1 HE

KUMUKÄNÄWAI,

A ME

KE KÄNÄWAI

HO‘OPONOPONO WAIWAI,

NO

KO HAWAI‘I NEI PAE ‘ÄINA.

NA

KAMEHAMEHA III

I KAU.

Honolulu:

1839.

KUMUKÄNÄWAI,

NO

KO HAWAI‘I NEI PAE ‘ÄINA.

Ua hana mai ke Akua i nä lähui känaka a pau i ke

koko ho‘okahi, e noho like läkou ma ka honua

nei me ke ku‘ikahi, a me ka pömaika‘i.1 Ua

hä‘awi mai nö ke Akua i kekahi mau waiwai like,

no nä känaka a pau, me nä ali‘i a pau o nä ‘äina a

pau loa.

2. Eia kekahi mau waiwai äna i hä‘awi like mai ai

i këlä kanaka këia kanaka, i këlä ali‘i këia ali‘i. ‘O

1. HE

KUMU KANAWAI,

A ME

KE KANAWAI

HOOPONOPONO WAIWAI,

NO

KO HAWAII NEI PAE AINA.

NA

KAMEHAMEHA III

I KAU.

Honolulu:

1839.

KUMU KANAWAI,

NO

KO HAWAII NEI PAE AINA.

Ua hana mai ke Akua i na lahuikanaka a pau i ke

koko hookahi, e noho like lakou ma ka honua nei

me ke kuikahi, a me ka pomaikai. Ua haawi mai

no ke Akua i kekahi mau waiwai like, no na

kanaka a pau, me na’lii a pau o na aina a pau loa.

2. Eia kekahi mau waiwai ana i haawi like mai ai

i kela kanaka keia kanaka, i kela alii keia alii; o ke

Ke Kumukänäwai o ka Makahiki 1839

E ho‘opuka hou ‘ia ana ma këia mähele o ka puke pai nä palapala aupuni e ho‘omaka ana me nä

kumukänäwai o Hawai‘i.

‘O ke kumukänäwai mua a Kamehameha III a me nä ali‘i ka mea e ho‘äkäka ana i nä pono o nä känaka a

pau a e ho‘opa‘a ana i ka ho‘omalu like ‘ia o nä känaka a me nä ali‘i. Ua kau ‘ia ma ka lä 7 o Iune, 1839.

Ho‘opuka ‘ia: He Kumukänäwai a me ke Känäwai Ho‘oponopono Waiwai no ko Hawai‘i Nei Pae ‘Äina,

Honolulu, 1839; a ma ka ‘ölelo Pelekänia: The Hawaiian Spectator, Puke II, Helu 3, Honolulu, Iulai 1839.

Forbes 1147 (II:211–213) a me 1099 (II:181–183).

30 31

nä kumukänäwai o ka makahiki 1839 a me ka 1840 3 33 2 ka ho‘oilina: journal of hawaiian language sources ● march 2002

kolamu (column) 3

2. Ua ho‘ololi ‘ia ‘o “some” ‘o ia ‘o “same.”

“Some” was changed to “same.”

limb, liberty, the labor of his hands and produc-

tions of his mind.

3. God has also established governments and

rule for the purposes of peace, but in making

laws for a nation it is by no means proper to

enact laws for the protection of rulers only, with-

out also providing protection for their subjects;

neither is it proper to enact laws to enrich the

chiefs only, without regard to the enriching of

their subjects also; and hereafter, there shall by

no means be any law enacted which is inconsis-

tent with what is above expressed, neither shall

any tax be assessed, nor any service or labor

required of any man in a manner at variance

with the above sentiments.

4. These sentiments are hereby proclaimed for

the purpose of protecting alike, both the people

and the chiefs of all these islands, that no chief

may be able to oppress any subject, but that

chiefs and people may enjoy the same2 protec-

tion under one and the same law.

5. Protection is hereby secured to the persons of

all the people, together with their lands, their

building lots and all their property and nothing

whatever shall be taken from any individual,

except by express provision of the laws.

Whatever chief shall perseveringly act in viola-

tion of this Constitution, shall no longer remain a

chief of the Sandwich Islands, and the same shall

be true of the governors, officers and all land

agents.

ke ola, ‘o nä lälä o ke kino, ‘o ka noho ho‘opa‘a

‘ole ‘ia, a me ke ke‘ake‘a ‘ole ‘ia, ‘o nä mea a kona

lima i hana ai, a me nä mea a kona mana‘o i

ho‘oponopono ai.

3. Na ke Akua mai nö ho‘i ka ‘oihana ali‘i, a me

ka noho ali‘i ‘ana i mea e malu ai; akä, i ka hana

‘ana i nä känäwai o ka ‘äina, ‘a‘ole pono e hana

‘ia kekahi känäwai ho‘omalu ali‘i wale nö, a

ho‘omalu ‘ole i nä maka‘äinana. ‘A‘ole ho‘i pono

ke kau i ke känäwai ho‘owaiwai i nä ali‘i wale nö,

a waiwai ‘ole nä maka‘äinana; a ma hope aku nei,

‘a‘ole loa e kau ‘ia kekahi känäwai kü‘ë i këia

mau ‘ölelo i ‘ölelo ‘ia ma luna, ‘a‘ole ho‘i e ‘auhau

wale ‘ia, ‘a‘ole e ho‘okauä ‘ia, ‘a‘ole e ho‘ohana

wale ‘ia kekahi kanaka ma ke ‘ano kü‘ë i ua mau

‘ölelo lä.

4. No laila e ho‘olaha ‘ia aku ai këia ‘ölelo, i mea

ho‘omalu like i nä känaka a pau a me nä ali‘i a

pau o këia pae ‘äina; i ke‘ake‘a ‘ole ai kekahi ali‘i i

kekahi o nä maka‘äinana, i like ho‘i ka malu o nä

ali‘i, a me nä känaka ma lalo o ke känäwai

ho‘okahi.

5. Ua ho‘omalu ‘ia ke kino o nä känaka a pau, a

me ko läkou ‘äina, a me ko läkou mau pä hale, a

me ko läkou waiwai a pau; ‘a‘ole ho‘i e lawe ‘ia

kekahi mea, ke ‘ölelo ‘ole ‘ia këlä mea ma ke

känäwai. ‘O ke ali‘i e hana i kekahi mea kü‘ë i

këia Kumukänäwai, e pau kona noho ali‘i ‘ana

ma këia pae ‘äina ‘o Hawai‘i nei, ke ho‘omau ‘ia

ma laila, pëlä nä kia‘äina, a me nä luna a me nä

konohiki a pau.

ola, o na lala o ke kino; o ka noho hoopaa ole ia, a

me ke keakea ole ia, o na mea a kona lima i hana’i,

a me na mea a kona manao i hooponopono ai.

3. Na ke Akua mai no hoi ka oihana alii, a me

ka noho alii ana i mea e malu ai; aka, i ka hana

ana i na kanawai o ka aina, aole pono e hanaia

kekahi kanawai hoomalu alii wale no, a hoomalu

ole i na makaainana. Aole hoi e pono ke kau i

ke kanawai hoowaiwai i na’lii wale no, a waiwai

ole na makaainana; a mahope aku nei, aole loa

e kauia kekahi kanawai ku e i keia mau olelo i

oleloia maluna, aole hoi e auhau wale ia, aole e

hookauwaia, aole e hoohana wale ia kekahi

kanaka ma ke ano ku e i ua mau olelo la.

4. Nolaila, e hoolahaia aku ai keia olelo, i mea

hoomalu like i na kanaka a pau a me na’lii a pau

o keia pae aina; i keakea ole ai kekahi alii i kekahi

o na makaainana, i like hoi ka malu o na’lii, a me

na kanaka malalo o ke kanawai hookahi.

5. Ua hoomaluia ke kino o na kanaka a pau, a me

ko lakou aina, a me ko lakou mau pahale, a me

ko lakou waiwai a pau; aole hoi e laweia kekahi

mea, ke olelo ole ia kela mea ma ke kanawai. O

ke alii e hana i kekahi mea ku e i keia Kumu

kanawai, e pau kona noho alii ana ma keia pae

aina o Hawaii nei, ke hoomau ia malaila, pela na

kiaaina, a me na luna a me na konohiki a pau.

The 1840 Constitution

The 1840 Constitution was Hawai‘i’s first detailed constitution. It organized the parts and the functions

of government at that time. One important aspect of this constitution was the establishment of the

House of Representatives as part of the legislative body, allowing the people a voice in government.

Written by Kamehameha III and Kekäuluohi (the Premier), enacted October 8, 1840; published as Ke

Kumukänäwai a me nä Känäwai o ko Hawai‘i Pae ‘Äina, Honolulu, 1841, and Translation of the

Constitution and Laws of the Hawaiian Islands, Established in the Reign of Kamehameha III, Lahaina

Luna, 1842. Forbes 1269 (II:280–282) and 1337 (II:318–320).

1. TRANSLATION

OF THE

CONSTITUTION AND LAWS

OF THE

HAWAIIAN ISLANDS,

ESTABLISHED IN THE REIGN

OF

KAMEHAMEHA III.

LAHAINA LUNA.

1842.1

CONSTITUTION, LAWS &c.

DECLARATION OF RIGHTS, BOTH

OF THE PEOPLE AND CHIEFS.

“God hath made of one blood all nations of men

to dwell on the earth,” in unity and blessedness.

God has also bestowed certain rights alike on all

men and all chiefs, and all people of all lands.

2. These are some of the rights which He has

given alike to every man and every chief of cor-

rect deportment; life, limb, liberty, freedom from

oppression; the earnings of his hands and the

productions of his mind, not however to those

who act in violation of the laws.

kolamu (column) 2

1. ‘Oihana 17:26 o ka Paipala.

Acts 17:26 of the Bible.

kolamu (column) 3

1 . ‘O këia unuhi ‘ölelo Pelekänia, mai ka ho‘opuka kühelu

mai nö ia na ke aupuni o Hawai‘i o ka makahiki 1842,

a, ma kauwahi, ‘a‘ole he unuhi häiki.

This English translation is from the 1842 official pub-

lication of the government of Hawai‘i and, in parts, is

not a literal translation.

Ke Kumukänäwai o ka Makahiki 1840

‘O ke Kumukänäwai o ka makahiki 1840 ko Hawai‘i nei kumukänäwai piha pono mua e ho‘onohonoho

ana i nä mähele o ke aupuni o ia manawa a me ko läkou mau kuleana päkahi. ‘O kekahi mea nui o ia

kumukänäwai ka ho‘okumu ‘ana i ka ‘Aha‘ölelo, i lohe ‘ia ka leo maka‘äinana ma ka hana aupuni. Na

Kamehameha III läua ‘o Kekäuluohi (ke Kuhina Nui) i ho‘oholo, a ua kau ‘ia ma ka lä 8 o ‘Okakopa,

1840. Ho‘opuka ‘ia: Ke Kumukänäwai a me nä Känäwai o ko Hawai‘i Pae ‘Äina, Honolulu, 1841; a ma

ka ‘ölelo Pelekänia: Translation of the Constitution and Laws of the Hawaiian Islands, Established in the

Reign of Kamehameha III, Lahaina Luna, 1842. Forbes 1269 (II:280–282) a me 1337 (II:318–320).

1. KE KUMU KANAWAI,

A ME

NA KANAWAI

O KO

HAWAII PAE AINA.

Ua kauia i ke kau ia KAMEHAMEHA III.

HONOLULU, OAHU.

1841.

HE OLELO HOAKAKA

i ka pono o na kanaka a me na’lii.

Ua hana mai ke Akua i na lahuikanaka a pau i ke

koko hookahi, e noho like lakou ma ka honua nei

me ke kuikahi, a me ka pomaikai. Ua haawi mai

no hoi ke Akua i kekahi mau waiwai like, no na

kanaka a pau, me na’lii a pau o na aina a pau loa.

2. Eia kekahi mau waiwai ana i haawi mai ai i

kela kanaka keia kanaka, i kela alii keia alii i

noho pono; o ke ola, o na lala o ke kino; o ka

noho hoopaa ole ia, a me ke keakea ole ia, o na

mea a kona lima i hana pono ai, a me na mea a

kona manao i hooponopono ai. Aole nae na mea

i papaia e na kanawai a pau.

1. KE KUMUKÄNÄWAI,

A ME

NÄ KÄNÄWAI

O KO

HAWAI‘I PAE ‘ÄINA.

Ua kau ‘ia i ke kau iä KAMEHAMEHA III.

HONOLULU, O‘AHU.

1841.

HE ‘ÖLELO HO‘ÄKÄKA

i ka pono o nä känaka a me nä ali‘i.

Ua hana mai ke Akua i nä lähui känaka a pau i ke

koko ho‘okahi, e noho like läkou ma ka honua

nei me ke ku‘ikahi, a me ka pömaika‘i.1 Ua

hä‘awi mai nö ho‘i ke Akua i kekahi mau waiwai

like, no nä känaka a pau, me nä ali‘i a pau o nä

‘äina a pau loa.

2. Eia kekahi mau waiwai äna i hä‘awi mai ai i

këlä kanaka këia kanaka, i këlä ali‘i këia ali‘i i

noho pono: ‘o ke ola, ‘o nä lälä o ke kino, ‘o ka

noho ho‘opa‘a ‘ole ‘ia, a me ke ke‘ake‘a ‘ole ‘ia,

‘o nä mea a kona lima i hana pono ai, a me nä

mea a kona mana‘o i ho‘oponopono ai. ‘A‘ole

na‘e nä mea i päpä ‘ia e nä känäwai a pau.

34 35

nä kumukänäwai o ka makahiki 1839 a me ka 1840 3 73 6 ka ho‘oilina: journal of hawaiian language sources ● march 2002

3. God has also established government, and

rule, for the purpose of peace; but in making

laws for the nation it is by no means proper to

enact laws for the protection of the rulers only,

without also providing protection for their sub-

jects; neither is it proper to enact laws to enrich

the chiefs only, without regard to enriching their

subjects also, and hereafter there shall by no

means be any laws enacted which are at variance

with what is above expressed, neither shall any

tax be assessed, nor any service or labor required

of any man, in a manner which is at variance

with the above sentiments.

4. PROTECTION FOR THE PEOPLE DECLARED.

The above sentiments are hereby published for

the purpose of protecting alike, both the people

and the chiefs of all these islands, while they

maintain a correct deportment; that no chief may

be able to oppress any subject, but that chiefs

and people may enjoy the same protection,

under one and the same law.

5. Protection is hereby secured to the persons of

all the people, together with their lands, their

building lots and all their property, while they

conform to the laws of the kingdom, and nothing

whatever shall be taken from any individual

except by express provision of the laws.

Whatever chief shall act perseveringly in viola-

tion of this Constitution, shall no longer remain a

chief of the Hawaiian Islands, and the same shall

be true of the governors, officers and all land

agents.

6. But if any one who is deposed should change

his course, and regulate his conduct by law, it

shall then be in the power of the chiefs to rein-

state him in the place he occupied previous to his

being deposed.

3. Na ke Akua mai nö ho‘i ka ‘oihana ali‘i, a me

ka noho ali‘i ‘ana i mea e malu ai; akä, i ka hana

‘ana i nä känäwai o ka ‘äina, ‘a‘ole pono e hana

‘ia kekahi känäwai ho‘omalu ali‘i wale nö, a

ho‘omalu ‘ole i nä maka‘äinana. ‘A‘ole ho‘i e

pono ke kau i ke känäwai ho‘owaiwai i nä ali‘i

wale nö, a waiwai ‘ole nä maka‘äinana; a ma

hope aku nei, ‘a‘ole loa e kau ‘ia kekahi känäwai

kü‘ë i këia mau ‘ölelo i ‘ölelo ‘ia ma luna, ‘a‘ole

ho‘i e ‘auhau wale ‘ia, ‘a‘ole e ho‘okauä ‘ia, ‘a‘ole

e ho‘ohana wale ‘ia kekahi kanaka ma ke ‘ano

kü‘ë i ua mau ‘ölelo lä.

4. Ho‘omalu na Känaka a pau.

No laila e ho‘olaha ‘ia aku ai këia ‘ölelo, i mea

ho‘omalu like i nä känaka a pau, a me nä ali‘i a

pau o këia pae ‘äina, i ko läkou noho pono ‘ana,

i ke‘ake‘a ‘ole ai kekahi ali‘i i kekahi o nä

maka‘äinana, i like ho‘i ka malu o nä ali‘i, a

me nä känaka ma lalo o ke känäwai ho‘okahi.

5. Ua ho‘omalu ‘ia ke kino o nä känaka a pau, a

me ko läkou ‘äina, a me ko läkou mau pä hale, a

me ko läkou waiwai a pau; ke mälama läkou i nä

känäwai o ke aupuni, ‘a‘ole ho‘i e lawe ‘ia kekahi

mea, ke ‘ölelo ‘ole ‘ia këlä mea ma ke känäwai.

‘O ke ali‘i e hana i kekahi mea kü‘ë i këia

Kumukänäwai, e pau kona noho ali‘i ‘ana ma

këia pae ‘äina ‘o Hawai‘i nei, ke ho‘omau ‘ia ma

laila, pëlä nä kia‘äina, a me nä luna a me nä

konohiki a pau.

6. Akä, inä huli hou ka mea i hewa, a

ho‘oponopono e like me nä känäwai, a laila, hiki

nö i nä ali‘i ke ho‘okü hou iä ia i kona wahi i kü

ai ma mua aku o käna hana hewa ‘ana.

3. Na ke Akua mai no hoi ka oihana alii, a me ka

noho alii ana i mea e malu ai; aka, i ka hana ana i

na kanawai o ka aina, aole pono e hanaia kekahi

kanawai hoomalu alii wale no, a hoomalu ole i na

makaainana. Aole hoi e pono ke kau i ke kanawai

hoowaiwai i na’lii wale no, a waiwai ole na

makaainana; a mahope aku nei, aole loa e kauia

kekahi kanawai ku e i keia mau olelo i oleloia

maluna, aole hoi e auhau wale ia, aole e

hookauwaia, aole e hoohana wale ia kekahi

kanaka ma ke ano ku e i ua mau olelo la.

4. Hoomalu na Kanaka a pau.

Nolaila, e hoolaha’i aku ai keia olelo, i mea

hoomalu like i na kanaka a pau, a me na’lii

a pau o keia pae aina, i ko lakou noho pono

ana, i keakea ole ai kekahi alii i kekahi o na

makaainana, i like hoi ka malu o na’lii, a me

na kanaka malalo o ke kanawai hookahi.

5. Ua hoomaluia ke kino o na kanaka a pau, a

me ko lakou aina, a me ko lakou mau pahale, a

me ko lakou waiwai a pau; ke malama lakou i na

kanawai o ke aupuni, aole hoi e laweia kekahi

mea, ke olelo ole ia kela mea ma ke kanawai.

O ke alii e hana i kekahi mea ku e i keia Kumu

kanawai, e pau kona noho alii ana ma keia pae

aina o Hawaii nei, ke hoomau ia malaila, pela na

kiaaina, a me na luna a me na konohiki a pau.

6. Aka, ina huli hou ka mea i hewa, a

hooponopono e like me na kanawai, alaila, hiki

no i na’lii ke hooku hou ia ia i kona wahi ku ai

mamua aku o kana hana hewa ana.

nä kumukänäwai o ka makahiki 1839 a me ka 1840 3 93 8 ka ho‘oilina: journal of hawaiian language sources ● march 2002

kolamu (column) 3

2. ‘O nä hopuna ‘ölelo hope ‘elua o këia paukü ‘ölelo

Pelekänia, ‘o ia ka unuhi o ka ‘ölelo Hawai‘i ma ka

paukü 8.

The last two sentences of this paragraph in English is

a translation of paragraph 8 in the Hawaiian.

3. Ua ho‘ololi ‘ia ‘o “bring” ‘o ia ‘o “brings.”

“Bring” was changed to “brings.”

7. CONSTITUTION.

It is our design to regulate our kingdom accord-

ing to the above principles and thus seek the

greatest prosperity both of all the chiefs and all of

the people of these Hawaiian Islands. But we are

aware that we cannot ourselves alone accomplish

such an object – God must be our aid, for it is

His province alone to give perfect protection and

prosperity. Wherefore we first present our sup-

plication to HIM, that he will guide us to right

measures and sustain us in our work.2

9. It is therefore our fixed decree,

I. That no law shall be enacted which is at vari-

ance with the word of the Lord Jehovah, or at

variance with the general spirit of His word. All

laws of the Islands shall be in consistency with

the general spirit of God’s law.

10. II. All men of every religion shall be protect-

ed in worshipping Jehovah, and serving Him,

according to their own understanding, but no

man shall ever be punished for neglect of God

unless he injures his neighbor, or brings3 evil on

the kingdom.

11. III. The law shall give redress to every man

who is injured by another without a fault of his

own, and shall protect all men while they con-

duct <themselves> properly, and shall punish all

men who commit crime against the kingdom or

against individuals, and no unequal law shall be

passed for the benefit of one to the injury of

another.

12. IV. No man shall be punished unless his

crime be first made manifest, neither shall he be

punished unless he be first brought to trial in the

presence of his accusers, and they have met face

7. Kumukänäwai.

Ma muli o ia pono i ‘ölelo ‘ia ma luna, ke mana‘o

nei mäkou e ho‘oponopono i këia aupuni, e ‘imi

ho‘i i ka maika‘i no nä ali‘i a pau, a me nä

maka‘äinana a pau o këia pae ‘äina ‘o Hawai‘i nei.

8. Ua maopopo iä mäkou, ‘a‘ole loa mäkou e hiki,

‘o mäkou wale; ‘o ke Akua ka mea e hiki ai, no ka

mea, ‘o ia ke ali‘i ma luna o nä aupuni a pau, a ‘o

ia wale nö ka mea e malu ai, a e pömaika‘i ai; no

laila ke nonoi mua aku nei mäkou iä ia, e

kuhikuhi mai iä mäkou i mea e pono ai, a e kökua

ho‘i ma muli o kä mäkou hana ‘ana.

9. No laila, ua pa‘a ko mäkou mana‘o:

I. ‘A‘ole loa e hana ‘ia kekahi känäwai kü‘ë i ka

‘ölelo a ka Haku, a Iehova, ‘a‘ole ho‘i i kü‘ë i ke

‘ano nui o ia ‘ölelo. E kü like nö nä känäwai a pau

o këia pae ‘äina me ke ‘ano nui o ko ke Akua

känäwai.

10. II. E ho‘omalu ‘ia nö nä känaka a pau o këlä

pule o këia pule, i ko läkou ho‘omana ‘ana iä

Iehova, a me ko läkou mälama ‘ana iä ia, e like

me ko läkou mana‘o, ‘a‘ole na‘e e ho‘opa‘i ‘ia ke

kanaka no kona mälama ‘ole ‘ana i ke Akua, ke

hana ‘ino ‘ole ‘o ia i kekahi kanaka, a ho‘opö‘ino

i ke aupuni paha.

11. III. E kökua nö ke känäwai i këlä kanaka i

këia kanaka i ho‘opö‘ino ‘ia e kekahi, me kona

hewa ‘ole, a e ho‘omalu ‘ia nä känaka a pau ma

nä hana pono a pau; a e ho‘opa‘i ‘ia nä känaka a

pau i ho‘opö‘ino i ke aupuni, a i kekahi kanaka

paha. ‘A‘ole ho‘i e kau ‘ia kekahi känäwai

pä‘ewa‘ewa e ho‘opömaika‘i ai i kekahi ma ka

pö‘ino o kekahi.

12. IV. ‘A‘ole e ho‘opa‘i ‘ia kekahi kanaka ke

ho‘äkäka ‘ole ‘ia kona hewa ma mua, ‘a‘ole ho‘i e

ho‘opa‘i ‘ia ke ho‘okolokolo ‘ole ‘ia i mua o ke alo

o ka mea näna i ho‘opi‘i, a häläwai läua, he maka

7. Kumu Kanawai.

Mamuli o ia pono i oleloia maluna, ke manao nei

makou e hooponopono i keia aupuni, e imi hoi i

ka maikai no na’lii a pau, a me na makaainana a

pau o keia pae aina o Hawaii nei.

8. Ua maopopo ia makou, aole loa makou e hiki,

o makou wale; o ke Akua ka mea e hiki ai, no ka

mea, oia ke alii maluna o na aupuni a pau, a oia

wale no ka mea e malu ai, a e pomaikai ai: nolaila

ke nonoi mua aku nei makou ia ia, e kuhikuhi

mai ia makou i mea e pono ai, a e kokua hoi

mamuli o ka makou hana ana.

9. Nolaila, ua paa ko makou manao:

I. Aole loa e hanaia kekahi kanawai ku e i ka

olelo a ka Haku, a Iehova, aole hoi i ku e i ke ano

nui o ia olelo. E ku like no na kanawai a pau o

keia pae aina me ke ano nui o ko ke Akua

kanawai.

10. II. E hoomaluia no na kanaka a pau o kela

pule o keia pule, i ko lakou hoomana ana ia

Iehova, a me ko lakou malama ana ia ia, e like

me ko lakou manao, aole nae e hoopaiia ke

kanaka no kona malama ole ana i ke Akua, ke

hana ino ole oia i kekahi kanaka, a hoopoino i ke

aupuni paha.

11. III. E kokua no ke kanawai i kela kanaka i

keia kanaka i hoopoinoia e kekahi, me kona

hewa ole, a e hoomaluia na kanaka a pau ma na

hana pono a pau; a e hoopaiia na kanaka a pau i

hoopoino i ke aupuni, a i kekahi kanaka paha.

Aole hoi e kauia kekahi kanawai paewaewa e

hoopomaikai ai i kekahi ma ka poino o kekahi.

12. IV. Aole e hoopaiia kekahi kanaka ke

hoakaka ole ia kona hewa mamua, aole hoi e

hoopaiia ke hookolokolo ole ia imua o ke alo o

ka mea nana i hoopii, a halawai laua, he maka

nä kumukänäwai o ka makahiki 1839 a me ka 1840 4 14 0 ka ho‘oilina: journal of hawaiian language sources ● march 2002

kolamu (column) 2

2. Ua ho‘ololi ‘ia ‘o “o” ‘o ia ‘o “no.”

“O” was changed to “no.”

to face, and the trial having been conducted

according to law, and the crime made manifest

in their presence, then punishment may be

inflicted.

13. V. No man or chief shall be permitted to sit

as judge or act on a jury to try his particular

friend (or enemy), or one who is especially con-

nected with him. Wherefore if any man be con-

demned or acquitted, and it shall afterwards be

made to appear, that some one who tried him

acted with partiality for the purpose of favoring

his friend (or injuring his enemy,) or for the pur-

pose of enriching himself, then there shall be a

new trial allowed before those who are impartial.

14. EXPOSITION OF THE PRINCIPLES ON

WHICH THE PRESENT DYNASTY IS FOUNDED.

The origin of the present government, and sys-

tem of polity, is as follows. KAMEHAMEHA I, was

the founder of the kingdom, and to him belonged

all the land from one end of the Islands to the

other, though it was not his own private property.

It belonged to the chiefs and people in common,

of whom Kamehameha I was the head, and had

the management of the landed property.

Wherefore, there was not formerly, and is not

now any person who could or can convey away

the smallest portion of land without the consent

of the one who had, or has the direction of the

kingdom.

15. These are the persons who have had the

direction of it from that time down,

Kamehameha II, Kaahumanu I, and at the pre-

sent time Kamehameha III. These persons have

had the direction of the kingdom down to the

present time, and all documents written by them,

and no others are the documents of the kingdom.

16. The kingdom is permanently confirmed to

Kamehameha III, and his heirs, and his heir shall

nö, he maka, a ho‘okolokolo ‘ia e like me ke

känäwai, a kü ka hewa i mua o läua, a laila

ho‘opa‘i.

13. V. ‘A‘ole pono i kekahi kanaka, ‘a‘ole ho‘i i

kekahi ali‘i ke noho luna känäwai, a i kiule ho‘i e

ho‘okolokolo i kona makamaka pono‘ï, a me ka

mea i pili pono iä ia. No laila, inä ho‘ähewa ‘ia

kekahi kanaka, a ho‘opono ‘ia paha, a ma hope

iho, ‘ike ‘ia, ua hana pä‘ewa‘ewa kekahi o ka po‘e

ho‘okolokolo, i mea e kökua wale i kona mea

aloha, a i mea e waiwai ai paha, a laila,

ho‘okolokolo hou i mua o ka po‘e pä‘ewa‘ewa

‘ole.

14. Ka ho‘äkäka ‘ana i ke ‘Ano

o ka Noho o nä Ali‘i.

Eia ke ‘ano o ka noho ‘ana o nä ali‘i a me ka

ho‘oponopono ‘ana i ka ‘äina. ‘O Kamehameha I,

‘o ia ke po‘o o këia aupuni, a nona nö nä ‘äina a

pau mai Hawai‘i a Ni‘ihau, ‘a‘ole na‘e nona

pono‘ï, no nä känaka nö, a me nä ali‘i, a ‘o

Kamehameha nö ko läkou po‘o näna e ‘ölelo i ka

‘äina. No laila, ‘a‘ohe mea pono ma mua, ‘a‘ohe

ho‘i mea pono i këia manawa ke ho‘olilo aku i

kekahi lihi iki o këia mau ‘äina me ka ‘ae ‘ole o

ka mea iä ia ka ‘ölelo o ke aupuni.

15. Eia ka po‘e näna ka ‘ölelo mai ia manawa

mai, ‘O Kamehameha II, ‘o Ka‘ahumanu I, a i

këia wä ho‘i, ‘o Kamehameha III. Na këia po‘e

wale nö e ‘ölelo no2 ke aupuni, a hiki i këia wä, a

‘o nä palapala a pau a läkou i käkau ai, ‘o ia wale

nö nä palapala o ke aupuni.

16. E mau loa aku ho‘i ke aupuni iä

Kamehameha III, a me kona ho‘oilina aku. Eia

no, he maka, a hookolokoloia e like me ke

kanawai, a ku ka hewa imua o laua, alaila hoopai.

13. V. Aole pono i kekahi kanaka, aole hoi i

kekahi alii ke noho lunakanawai, a i juri hoi e

hookolokolo i kona makamaka ponoi, a me ka

mea i pili pono ia ia. Nolaila, ina hoahewaia

kekahi kanaka, a hooponoia paha, a mahope iho,

ikeia, ua hana paewaewa kekahi o ka poe

hookolokolo, i mea e kokua wale i kona mea

aloha, a i mea e waiwai ai paha, alaila,

hookolokolo hou imua o ka poe paewaewa ole.

14. Ka hoakaka ana i ke Ano

o ka Noho o na’lii.

Eia ke ano o ka noho ana o na’lii a me ka

hooponopono ana i ka aina. O Kamehameha I,

oia ke poo o keia aupuni, a nona no na aina a pau

mai Hawaii a Niihau, aole nae nona ponoi, no na

kanaka no, a me na’lii, a o Kamehameha no ko

lakou poo nana e olelo i ka aina. Nolaila, aohe

mea pono mamua, aohe hoi mea pono i keia

manawa ke hoolilo aku i kekahi lihi iki o keia

mau aina me ka ae ole o ka mea ia ia ka olelo o

ke aupuni.

15. Eia ka poe nana ka olelo mai ia manawa mai,

O Kamehameha II, o Kaahumanu I, a i keia wa

hoi, o Kamehameha III. Na keia poe wale no e

olelo o ke aupuni, a hiki i keia wa, a o na palapala

a pau a lakou i kakau ai, oia wale no na palapala

o ke aupuni.

16. E mau loa aku hoi ke aupuni ia

Kamehameha III, a me kona hooilina aku. Eia

nä kumukänäwai o ka makahiki 1839 a me ka 1840 4 34 2 ka ho‘oilina: journal of hawaiian language sources ● march 2002

kolamu (column) 3

4. Ua ho‘ololi ‘ia ‘o “life time” ‘o ia ‘o “lifetime.”

“Life time” was changed to “lifetime.”

be the person whom he and the chiefs shall

appoint, during his lifetime,4 but should there be

no appointment, then the decision shall rest with

the chiefs and House of Representatives.

17. PREROGATIVES OF THE KING.

The prerogatives of the King are as follows: He is

the sovereign of all the people and all the chiefs.

The kingdom is his. He shall have the direction

of the army and all the implements of war of the

kingdom. He also shall have the direction of the

government property – the poll tax – the land tax

– the three days monthly labor, though in con-

formity to the laws. He also shall retain his own

private lands, and lands forfeited for the nonpay-

ment of taxes shall revert to him.

18. He shall be the chief judge of the Supreme

Court, and it shall be his duty to execute the laws

of the land, also all decrees and treaties with

other countries, all however in accordance with

the laws.

19. It shall also be his prerogative to form

treaties with the rulers of all other kingdoms,

also to receive ministers sent by other countries,

and he shall have power to confirm agreements

with them.

20. He shall also have power to make war in time

of emergency, when the chiefs cannot be assem-

bled, and he shall be the commander in chief. He

shall also have power to transact all important

business of the kingdom which is not by law

assigned to others.

21. RESPECTING THE PREMIER

OF THE KINGDOM.

It shall be the duty of the King to appoint some

chief of rank and ability, to be his particular min-

ister, whose title shall be Premier of the Kingdom.

ho‘i kona ho‘oilina, ‘o ka mea äna e ‘ölelo pü ai

me nä ali‘i i kona wä e ola ana, a i ‘ole ia e ‘ölelo,

a laila lilo ka ‘ölelo i nä ali‘i wale nö, a me ka Po‘e

i Koho ‘ia nö ho‘i.

17. Nä Pono o ke Ali‘i Nui.

Eia ho‘i ko ke Ali‘i Nui wahi. ‘O ia ka mea ma

luna o nä känaka a pau, a me nä ali‘i a pau. Nona

nö ke aupuni. Iä ia nä koa, a me nä mea kaua o

ke aupuni, nä pü, nä pä kaua, a me nä mea kaua

a pau. Iä ia ka waiwai o ke aupuni, ke kälä o ke

kino, ka ‘auhau o ka ‘äina, a me nä lä hana ‘ekolu

o ka malama, e like na‘e me ka ‘ölelo o ke

känäwai. Nona nö kona mau ‘äina pono‘ï, a me

nä ‘äina hemo i ka makahiki.

18. ‘O ia ka mea nui o nä Luna Känäwai Ki‘eki‘e,

a iä ia nö ka ho‘okö i nä känäwai o ka ‘äina, a me

nä ‘ölelo küpa‘a, a me nä ku‘ikahi o ko nä ‘äina

‘ë, e like ho‘i me ka ‘ölelo o ko ‘one‘i känäwai.

19. Näna nö e hana i nä ku‘ikahi me nä ali‘i o nä

aupuni ‘ë a pau, a ‘o ia ka mea ‘ölelo pü me nä

luna ki‘eki‘e i ho‘ouna ‘ia mai, mai nä ‘äina ‘ë

mai, a näna nö e ho‘oholo i ka ‘ölelo.

20. Näna nö ka ‘ölelo o ke kaua, ke hiki i ka

manawa pilikia, a pono ‘ole i nä ali‘i a pau ke

‘äkoakoa mai, a ‘o ia ho‘i ka ‘alihikaua. Näna nö

ho‘i nä ‘ölelo nui a pau o ke aupuni, ke hä‘awi

‘ole ‘ia këlä ‘ölelo iä ha‘i ma ke känäwai.

21. No ke Kuhina Nui o ke Aupuni.

He mea pono i ke Ali‘i Nui ke koho i kekahi ali‘i

akamai, i ali‘i nui ho‘i, a e lilo ‘o ia i kanaka

pono‘ï nona, a e kapa ‘ia ‘o ia ke Kuhina Nui o ke

Aupuni. A e like nö kona noho ‘ana a me käna

hoi kona hooilina, o ka mea ana e olelo pu ai me

na’lii i kona wa e ola ana, a i ole ia e olelo, alaila

lilo ka olelo i na’lii wale no, a me ka poe i kohoia

no hoi.

17. Na Pono o ke Alii nui.

Eia hoi ko ke alii nui wahi. Oia ka mea maluna o

na kanaka a pau, a me na’lii a pau. Nona no ke

aupuni. Ia ia na koa, a me na mea kaua o ke

aupuni, na pu, na pa kaua, a me na mea kaua a

pau. Ia ia ka waiwai o ke aupuni, ke kala o ke

kino, ka auhau o ka aina, a me na la hana ekolu o

ka malama, e like nae me ka olelo o ke kanawai.

Nona no kona mau aina ponoi, a me na aina

hemo i ka makahiki.

18. Oia ka mea nui o na lunakanawai kiekie, a ia

ia no ka hooko i na kanawai o ka aina, a me na

olelo kupaa, a me na kuikahi o ko na aina e, e

like hoi me ka olelo o koonei kanawai.

19. Nana no e hana i na kuikahi me na’lii o na

aupuni e a pau, a oia ka mea olelo pu me na

lunakiekie i hoounaia mai, mai na aina e mai,

a nana no e hooholo i ka olelo.

20. Nana no ka olelo o ke kaua, ke hiki i ka

manawa pilikia, a pono ole i na’lii a pau ke

akoakoa mai, a oia hoi ka alihikaua. Nana no hoi

na olelo nui a pau o ke aupuni, ke haawi ole ia

kela olelo ia hai ma ke kanawai.

21. No ke Kuhina nui o ke Aupuni.

He mea pono i ke alii nui ke koho i kekahi alii

akamai, i alii nui hoi, a e lilo oia i kanaka ponoi

nona, a e kapaia oia ke kuhina nui o ke aupuni.

A e like no kona noho ana a me kana hana me ka

nä kumukänäwai o ka makahiki 1839 a me ka 1840 4 54 4 ka ho‘oilina: journal of hawaiian language sources ● march 2002

kolamu (column) 2

3. Ua ho‘ololi ‘ia ‘o “kanaka” ‘o ia ‘o “kuhina.”

“Kanaka” was changed to “kuhina.”

kolamu (column) 3

5. Aia këia mau paukü ‘ekolu ma ka ‘ölelo Pelekänia i

loko o ka paukü 22 ma ka ‘ölelo Hawai‘i.

These three paragraphs in English are included within

the single paragraph 22 in the Hawaiian.

His office and business shall be the same as that

of Ka‘ahumanu I and Ka‘ahumanu II. For even in

the time of Kamehameha I, life and death, con-

demnation and acquittal were in the hands of

Ka‘ahumanu. When Kamehameha I died his will

was, “The kingdom is Liholiho’s, and Ka‘ahu-

manu is his minister.” That important feature of

the government, originated by Kamehameha I,

shall be perpetuated in these Hawaiian Islands,

but shall always be in subserviency to the law.

22. The following are the duties of the Premier.

All business connected with the special interests

of the kingdom, which the King wishes to trans-

act, shall be done by the Premier under the

authority of the King. All documents and busi-

ness of the kingdom executed by the Premier,

shall be considered as executed by the King’s

authority. All government property shall be

reported to him (or her) and he (or she) shall

make it over to the King.

22a. The Premier shall be the King’s special

counsellor in the great business of the kingdom.

22b. The King shall not act without the knowl-

edge of the Premier, nor shall the Premier act

without the knowledge of the King, and the veto

of the King on the acts of the Premier shall arrest

the business. All important business of the king-

dom which the King chooses to transact in per-

son, he may do it but not without the approba-

tion of the Premier.5

23. GOVERNORS.

There shall be four governors over these

Hawaiian Islands – one for Hawai‘i – one for

Maui and the Islands adjacent – one for O‘ahu,

and one for Kaua‘i and the adjacent Islands. All

the governors, from Hawai‘i to Kaua‘i shall be

subject to the King.

hana me kä Ka‘ahumanu I, a me kä Ka‘ahumanu

II. No ka mea i ka wä e ola ana ‘o Kamehameha I,

iä Ka‘ahumanu nö ke ola a me ka make, ka hewa,

a me ka pono. A i kona wä i make ai, kauoha mai

‘o ia, “No Liholiho ke aupuni, a ‘o Ka‘ahumanu

ke kuhina.”3 A ‘o këlä pono a Kamehameha I, i

‘imi ai i kuhina, e ho‘omau ‘ia këlä pono ma

Hawai‘i nei, e like na‘e me ka ‘ölelo o ke känäwai.

22. Eia ka hana a ke Kuhina Nui. ‘O nä mea i pili

i ke aupuni a ke ali‘i e mana‘o ai e hana, na ke

Kuhina nö e hana ma ka inoa o ke Ali‘i; a ‘o nä

‘ölelo, a me nä hana o ke aupuni a ke Kuhina e

hana ai, na ke Ali‘i ia ‘ölelo a me ia hana. E ‘ike

nö ho‘i ‘o ia i ka waiwai a pau o ke aupuni, a

näna nö e hä‘awi i ke Ali‘i Nui. ‘O ke Kuhina Nui

ka mea ‘ölelo pü me ke Ali‘i ma nä mea nui o ke

aupuni. ‘A‘ole ho‘i e hana wale ke Ali‘i me ka

lohe ‘ole o ke Kuhina, ‘a‘ole hana wale ke Kuhina

me ka lohe ‘ole o ke Ali‘i; a inä hö‘ole ke Ali‘i i

käna, ‘o ka ‘ole nö ia. A ‘o nä hana nui a pau a ke

Ali‘i e mana‘o ai näna pono‘ï e hana, e hana nö ‘o

ia, me ka lohe na‘e o ke Kuhina.

23. Nä Kia‘äina.

‘Ehä nö kia‘äina ma Hawai‘i nei. No Hawai‘i

kekahi. No Maui a me nä moku e pili ana kekahi,

no O‘ahu kekahi, a no Kaua‘i a me nä moku e pili

ana kekahi. Ma lalo o ke Ali‘i Nui ka noho ‘ana o

nä Kia‘äina a pau mai Hawai‘i a Kaua‘i. Eia ho‘i

ke ‘ano o ko ke kia‘äina noho ‘ana, a me käna

hana ho‘i.

Kaahumanu I, a me ka Kaahumanu II. No ka

mea i ka wa e ola ana o Kamehameha I, ia

Kaahumanu no ke ola a me ka make, ka hewa, a

me ka pono. A i kona wa i make ai, kauoha mai

oia “No Liholiho ke aupuni, a o Kaahumanu ke

kanaka.” A o kela pono a Kamehameha I, i imi ai

i kuhina, e hoomauia kela pono ma Hawaii nei, e

like nae me ka olelo o ke kanawai.

22. Eia ka hana a ke Kuhina nui. O na mea i pili i

ke aupuni a ke alii e manao ai e hana, na ke

Kuhina no e hana ma ka inoa o ke alii; a o na

olelo, a me na hana o ke aupuni a ke Kuhina e

hana’i, na ke alii ia olelo a me ia hana. E ike no

hoi oia i ka waiwai a pau o ke aupuni, a nana no

e haawi i ke alii nui. O ke Kuhina nui ka mea

olelo pu me ke alii ma na mea nui o ke aupuni.

Aole hoi e hana wale ke alii me ka lohe ole o ke

Kuhina, aole hana wale ke Kuhina me ka lohe ole

o ke alii; a ina hoole ke alii i kana, o ka ole no ia.

A o na hana nui a pau a ke alii e manao ai nana

ponoi e hana, e hana no oia, me ka lohe nae o ke

Kuhina.

23. Na Kiaaina.

Eha no Kiaaina ma Hawaii nei. No Hawaii

kekahi. No Maui a me na moku e pili ana kekahi,

no Oahu kekahi, a no Kauai a me na moku e pili

ana kekahi. Malalo o ke alii nui ka noho ana o na

Kiaaina a pau mai Hawaii a Kauai. Eia hoi ke ano

o ko ke Kiaaina noho ana, a me kana hana hoi.

nä kumukänäwai o ka makahiki 1839 a me ka 1840 4 74 6 ka ho‘oilina: journal of hawaiian language sources ● march 2002

kolamu (column) 3

6. Aia këia mau paukü ‘elua ma ka ‘ölelo Pelekänia

i loko o ka paukü 25 ma ka ‘ölelo Hawai‘i. ‘O ka

hopuna ‘ölelo o ka paukü 25 ma ka ‘ölelo Pelekänia,

‘o ia ka hopuna ‘ölelo ‘ekolu ma ka ‘ölelo Hawai‘i.

These two paragraphs in English are included within

the single paragraph 25 in the Hawaiian. And, the

sentence making up paragraph 25 in the English is

not the first sentence, but rather the third sentence,

in the Hawaiian.

24. The prerogatives of the governors and their

duties, shall be as follows: Each governor shall

have the general direction of the several tax gath-

erers of his island, and shall support them in the

execution of all their orders which he considers

to have been properly given, but shall pursue a

course according to law, and not according to his

own private views. He also shall preside over all

the judges of his island, and shall see their sen-

tences executed as above. He shall also appoint

the judges and give them their certificates of

office.

25. All the governors, from Hawai‘i to Kaua‘i

shall be subject not only to the King, but also to

the Premier.

25a. The governor shall be the superior over his

particular island or islands. He shall have charge

of the munitions of war, under the direction of

the King, however, and the Premier. He shall

have charge of the forts, the soldiery, the arms

and all the implements of war. He shall receive

the government dues and shall deliver over the

same to the Premier. All important decisions rest

with him in times of emergency, unless the King

or Premier be present. He shall have charge of all

the King’s business on the island, the taxation,

new improvements to be extended, and plans for

the increase of wealth, and all officers shall be

subject to him. He shall also have power to

decide all questions, and transact all island busi-

ness which is not by law assigned to others.6

26. When either of the governors shall decease,

then all the chiefs shall assemble at such place as

the King shall appoint, and shall nominate a suc-

cessor of the deceased governor, and whosoever

they shall nominate and be approved by the

King, he shall be the new governor.

24. E noho luna nö ‘o ia ma luna o nä luna

‘auhau a pau o kona moku, a näna nö e ho‘okö

i kä läkou ‘ölelo a pau, ke ‘ike ‘o ia he pono, e

ho‘okö na‘e e like me ka ‘ölelo o ke känäwai,

‘a‘ole ma kona mana‘o wale. ‘O ia ho‘i ka luna

ma luna o nä luna känäwai a pau o kona moku,

a näna nö e ho‘okö i kä läkou ‘ölelo, e like me

ka ‘ölelo ma luna. Näna nö e koho i nä luna

känäwai, a hä‘awi iä läkou i ka palapala ho‘olilo.

25. ‘O ke kia‘äina, ‘o ia ke Ali‘i Nui o kona moku,

a ‘o kona mau moku paha. Iä ia ho‘i nä mea kaua

o ka moku. Iä ia nä pä kaua, a me nä koa, a me

nä pü, a me nä mea kaua a pau. Ma lalo o ke Ali‘i

Nui läua ‘o ke Kuhina Nui ka noho ‘ana o nä

kia‘äina a pau, mai Hawai‘i a Kaua‘i. Iä ia ka

waiwai ‘auhau o ka moku, a näna nö e hä‘awi i ke

Kuhina Nui. Iä ia nö ho‘i ka ‘ölelo i ka manawa

pilikia, ke ‘ole ke Ali‘i Nui, a ‘o ke Kuhina Nui

paha. Iä ia nö ho‘i kä ke Ali‘i hana a pau o ka

moku, ka ‘auhau, a me nä hana hou, a me nä

mea e waiwai ai, a e noho nö nä luna a pau ma

lalo ona. Iä ia ho‘i nä ‘ölelo, a me nä hana a pau

o ka moku i hä‘awi ‘ole ‘ia iä ha‘i ma ke känäwai.

26. I ka manawa e make ai ke kia‘äina, a laila,

e ‘äkoakoa nä ali‘i a pau, i kahi a ke Ali‘i Nui e

‘ölelo ai, a e ‘imi pü läkou i hope no ke kia‘äina i

make, a ‘o ka mea a läkou e koho like ai, a ‘ae ke

Ali‘i Nui ma ka palapala, ‘o ia ke kia‘äina hou.

24. E noho luna no oia maluna o na luna auhau a

pau o kona moku, a nana no e hooko i ka lakou

olelo a pau, ke ike oia he pono, e hooko nae e like

me ka olelo o ke kanawai, aole ma kona manao

wale. Oia hoi ka luna maluna o na lunakanawai a

pau o kona moku, a nana no e hooko i ka lakou

olelo, e like me ka olelo maluna. Nana no e koho

i na Lunakanawai, a haawi ia lakou i ka palapala

hoolilo.

25. O ke Kiaaina, oia ke alii nui o kona moku, a o

kona mau moku paha. Ia ia hoi na mea kaua o ka

moku. Ia ia na pakaua, a me na koa, a me na pu,

a me na mea kaua a pau. Malalo o ke alii nui laua

o ke Kuhina nui ka noho ana o na kiaaina a pau,

mai Hawaii a Kauai. Ia ia ka waiwai auhau o ka

moku, a nana no e haawi i ke Kuhina nui. Ia ia

no hoi ka olelo i ka manawa pilikia, ke ole ke alii

nui, a o ke Kuhina nui paha. Ia ia no hoi ka ke

alii hana a pau o ka moku, ka auhau, a me na

hana hou, a me na mea e waiwai ai, a e noho no

na luna a pau malalo ona. Ia ia hoi na olelo, a me

na hana a pau o ka moku i haawi ole ia ia hai ma

ke kanawai.

26. I ka manawa e make ai ke Kiaaina, alaila, e

akoakoa na’lii a pau, i kahi a ke alii nui e olelo ai,

a e imi pu lakou i hope no ke Kiaaina i make, a o

ka mea a lakou e koho like ai, a ae ke alii nui ma

ka palapala, oia ke Kiaaina hou.

nä kumukänäwai o ka makahiki 1839 a me ka 1840 4 94 8 ka ho‘oilina: journal of hawaiian language sources ● march 2002

kolamu (column) 3

7. ‘O nä hopuna ‘ölelo hope ‘elua o këia paukü ‘ölelo

Pelekänia, ‘o ia ka unuhi o ka ‘ölelo Hawai‘i ma ka

paukü 28.

The last two sentences in this paragraph in English

are a translation of paragraph 28 in the Hawaiian.

27. HOUSE OF NOBLES.

At the present period, these are the persons who

shall sit in the government councils,

Kamehameha III, Kekäuluohi, Hoapiliwahine,

Kuakini, Kekau‘önohi, Kahekili, Päkï, Konia,

Keohokälole, Leleiohoku, Keküanäo‘a,

Keali‘iahonui, Kana‘ina, Keoni Ï‘ï, Keoni Ana and

Ha‘alilio. Should any other person be received

into the council, it shall be made known by law.

These persons shall have part in the councils of

the kingdom. No law of the nation shall be

passed without their assent. They shall act in the

following manner: They shall assemble annually,

for the purpose of seeking the welfare of the

nation, and establishing laws for the kingdom.

Their meetings shall commence in April, at such

day and place as the King shall appoint.7

29. It shall also be proper for the King to consult

with the above persons respecting all the great

concerns of the kingdom, in order to promote

unanimity and secure the greatest good. They

shall moreover transact such other business as

the King shall commit to them.

30. They shall still retain their own appropriate

lands, whether districts or plantations, or what-

ever divisions they may be, and they may con-

duct the business on said lands at their discre-

tion, but not at variance with the laws of the

kingdom.

31. RESPECTING

THE REPRESENTATIVE BODY.

There shall be annually chosen certain persons to

sit in council with the nobles and establish laws

for the nation. They shall be chosen by the peo-

ple, according to their wish, from Hawai‘i, Maui,

O‘ahu and Kaua‘i. The law shall decide the form

27. No nä Ali‘i ma lalo o ke Ali‘i Nui.

I ka ‘aha ‘ölelo ‘ana a nä ali‘i, eia ka po‘e ‘ölelo i

këia manawa, ‘o Kamehameha III, ‘o Kekäuluohi,

‘o Hoapiliwahine, ‘o Kuakini, ‘o Kekau‘önohi, ‘o

Kahekili, ‘o Päkï, ‘o Konia, ‘o Keohokälole, ‘o

Leleiohoku, ‘o Keküanäo‘a, ‘o Keali‘iahonui, ‘o

Kana‘ina, ‘o ‘Ï‘ï, ‘o Keoniana, a me Ha‘alilio, a inä

komo ka mea hou, na ke känäwai e ho‘äkäka ‘ia.

Na läkou nei kekahi ‘ölelo o ke aupuni. Akä, inä

mana‘o läkou e komo wale mai kekahi mea ‘ë a‘e

e ‘ölelo pü, pono nö. ‘O këia po‘e na‘e ka po‘e

ho‘oholo i ka ‘ölelo. ‘A‘ole e hana ‘ia kekahi

känäwai no ka ‘äina me ko läkou lohe ‘ole.

28. Penei ho‘i kä läkou hana ‘ana. E ‘äkoakoa

läkou i këlä makahiki i këia makahiki, e ‘imi i nä

mea e pono ai ka ‘äina, i känäwai ho‘i no ke

aupuni. I ka malama ‘o ‘Apelila e ‘äkoakoa ai, i

ka lä, a i kahi a ke Ali‘i Nui e ‘ölelo ai.

29. He mea pono nö ho‘i i ke Ali‘i Nui ke ‘ölelo

pü me läkou nei ma nä mea nui a pau o ke

aupuni, i mea e ku‘ikahi ai, a i mea ho‘i e pono

ai. A e hana nö ho‘i läkou i nä hana a pau a ke

Ali‘i Nui e hä‘awi ai iä läkou.

30. No läkou ho‘i ko läkou mau ‘äina pono‘ï, inä

he moku, ‘o ia, inä he kalana, ‘o ia nö, a inä he

mea ‘ë, ‘o ia nö ho‘i; a e hana nö läkou ma ko

läkou ‘äina e like me ko läkou mana‘o, ‘a‘ole na‘e

e kü‘ë i ke känäwai o ke aupuni.

31. No ka Po‘e i Koho ‘ia.

I këlä makahiki i këia makahiki e koho ‘ia kekahi

mau känaka e ‘aha ‘ölelo pü me nä ali‘i, a e ‘imi

pü i känäwai no ka ‘äina. No Hawai‘i kekahi, a no

Maui kekahi, a no O‘ahu kekahi, a no Kaua‘i

kekahi. Na nä maka‘äinana e koho, e like me ko

läkou makemake. E ho‘äkäka nö ke känäwai i ke

27. No na’lii malalo o ke Alii nui.

I ka ahaolelo ana a na’lii, eia ka poe olelo i keia

manawa, o Kamehameha III, o Kekauluohi, o

Hoapili wahine, o Kuakini, o Kekauonohi, o

Kahekili, o Paki, o Konia, o Keohokalole, o

Leleiohoku, o Kekuanaoa, o Kealiiahonui, o

Kanaina, o Ii, o Keoniana, a me Haalilio, a ina

komo ka mea hou na ke kanawai e hoakaka ia.

Na lakou nei kekahi olelo o ke aupuni. Aka, ina

manao lakou e komo wale mai kekahi mea e ae e

olelo pu, pono no. O keia poe nae ka poe hooholo

i ka olelo. Aole e hana ia kekahi kanawai no ka

aina me ko lakou lohe ole.

28. Penei hoi ka lakou hana ana. E akoakoa

lakou i kela makahiki i keia makahiki, e imi i na

mea e pono ai ka aina, i kanawai hoi no ke

aupuni. I ka malama o Aperila e akoakoa’i, i ka

la, a i kahi a ke alii nui e olelo ai.

29. He mea pono no hoi i ke alii nui ke olelo pu

me lakou nei ma na mea nui a pau o ke aupuni, i

mea e kuikahi ai, a i mea hoi e pono ai. A e hana

no hoi lakou i na hana a pau a ke alii nui e haawi

ai ia lakou.

30. No lakou hoi ko lakou mau aina ponoi, ina

he moku, oia, ina he kalana, oia no, a ina he mea

e, oia no hoi; a e hana no lakou ma ko lakou aina

e like me ko lakou manao, aole nae e ku e i ke

kanawai o ke aupuni.

31. No ka Poe i Kohoia.

I kela makahiki i keia makahiki e kohoia kekahi

mau kanaka e ahaolelo pu me na’lii, a e imi pu

i kanawai no ka aina. No Hawaii kekahi, a no

Maui kekahi, a no Oahu kekahi, a no Kauai

kekahi. Na na makaainana e koho, e like me ko

lakou makemake. E hoakaka no ke kanawai i ke

nä kumukänäwai o ka makahiki 1839 a me ka 1840 5 15 0 ka ho‘oilina: journal of hawaiian language sources ● march 2002

kolamu (column) 3

8. Aia këia mau paukü ‘elua ma ka ‘ölelo Pelekänia i

loko o ka paukü 34 ma ka ‘ölelo Hawai‘i.

These two paragraphs in English are included within

the single paragraph 34 in the Hawaiian.

of choosing them, and also the number to be

chosen. This representative body shall have a

voice in the business of the kingdom. No law

shall be passed without the approbation of a

majority of them.

32. RESPECTING THE MEETINGS

OF THE LEGISLATIVE BODY.

There shall be an annual meeting as stated

above; but if the rulers think it desirable to meet

again they may do it at their discretion.

33. When they assemble, the nobles shall meet

by themselves and the representative body by

themselves, though at such times as they shall

think it necessary to consult together, they may

unite at their discretion.

34. The form of doing business shall be as fol-

lows: The nobles shall appoint a secretary for

themselves who at the meetings shall record all

decisions made by them, and that book of

records shall be preserved in order that no

decrees affecting the interests of the kingdom

may be lost.

34a. The same shall be done by the representa-

tive body. They too shall choose a secretary for

themselves, and when they meet for the purpose

of seeking the interests of the kingdom, and shall

come to a decision on any point, then that deci-

sion shall be recorded in a book, and the book

shall be preserved, in order that nothing valu-

able, affecting the interests of the kingdom

should be lost; and there shall no new law be

made, without the approbation of a majority of

the nobles and also a majority of the representa-

tive body.8

35. When any act shall have been agreed upon

by them, it shall then be presented to the King,

and if he approve and sign his name, and also the

‘ano o ke koho ‘ana a me ka nui o ka po‘e e koho

‘ia ai. Na këia po‘e i koho ‘ia kekahi ‘ölelo o ke

aupuni. ‘A‘ole känäwai e kau ‘ia ke ‘ae ‘ole ka nui

o läkou.

32. No ka Häläwai ‘ana

o ka Po‘e Hana Känäwai.

Ho‘okahi nö häläwai ‘ana o ka makahiki, e like

me ka ‘ölelo ma luna. Akä, inä e mana‘o nä ali‘i

e häläwai ‘ë i kekahi manawa, e häläwai nö, e like

me ko läkou mana‘o.

33. I ka ‘äkoakoa ‘ana, pono e ka‘awale nä ali‘i

maoli, a me ka po‘e i koho ‘ia. Akä, inä mana‘o

läkou e ‘ölelo pü i kekahi manawa, aia nö e like

me ko läkou mana‘o.

34. Penei ho‘i läkou e hana ai: E koho nä ali‘i

maoli i käkau ‘ölelo na läkou, a i ka lä e ‘äkoakoa

ai, näna nö e käkau i kä läkou ‘ölelo a pau, ‘o nä

‘ölelo ho‘i i ho‘oholo ‘ia, a e mälama mau loa ‘ia

këlä puke i ‘ole ai e nalowale nä ‘ölelo a läkou e

‘imi ai no ke aupuni. Pëlä nö ho‘i ka po‘e i koho

‘ia: E koho nö läkou i käkau ‘ölelo na läkou, a i

ko läkou lä e ‘äkoakoa ai e ‘imi i ka pono no ke

aupuni, a holo kekahi ‘ölelo iä läkou, a laila e

käkau ‘ia këlä ‘ölelo i loko o kekahi puke, a e

mälama loa i ia puke i mea e nalowale ‘ole ai nä

pono i ‘imi ‘ia no ke aupuni. ‘A‘ole ho‘i e kau ‘ia

kekahi känäwai hou ke ‘ae ‘ole ka nui o nä ali‘i

maoli, a me ka po‘e i koho ‘ia.

35. A inä holo kekahi ‘ölelo iä läkou, a laila e

lawe ‘ia këlä ‘ölelo ma ka pepa, a i ke Ali‘i Nui, a

inä i pono i kona mana‘o, a käkau ‘ia kona inoa

ano o ke koho ana a me ka nui o ka poe e kohoia’i.

Na keia poe i kohoia kekahi olelo o ke aupuni.

Aole kanawai e kauia ke ae ole ka nui o lakou.

32. No ka Halawai ana

o ka Poe Hana Kanawai.

Hookahi no halawai ana o ka makahiki, e like

me ka olelo maluna. Aka, ina e manao na’lii e

halawai e i kekahi manawa, e halawai no, e like

me ko lakou manao.

33. I ka akoakoa ana, pono e kaawale na’lii

maoli, a me ka poe i kohoia. Aka, ina manao

lakou e olelo pu i kekahi manawa, aia no e like

me ko lakou manao.

34. Penei hoi lakou e hana’i: E koho na’lii maoli

i kakauolelo na lakou, a i ka la e akoakoa’i, nana

no e kakau i ka lakou olelo a pau, o na olelo hoi i

hooholoia, a e malama mau loa ia kela buke i ole

ai e nalowale na olelo a lakou e imi ai no ke

aupuni. Pela no hoi ka poe i kohoia: E koho no

lakou i kakauolelo na lakou, a i ko lakou la e

akoakoa’i e imi ka pono no ke aupuni, a holo

kekahi olelo ia lakou, alaila e kakauia kela olelo

iloko o kekahi buke, a e malama loa ia buke i

mea e nalowale ole ai na pono i imiia no ke

aupuni. Aole hoi e kauia kekahi kanawai hou ke

ae ole ka nui o na’lii maoli, a me ka poe i kohoia.

35. A ina holo kekahi olelo ia lakou, alaila e

laweia kela olelo ma ka pepa, a i ke alii nui, a

ina i pono i kona manao, a kakauia kona inoa

nä kumukänäwai o ka makahiki 1839 a me ka 1840 5 35 2 ka ho‘oilina: journal of hawaiian language sources ● march 2002

kolamu (column) 3

9. Aia këia mau paukü ‘elua ma ka ‘ölelo Pelekänia i

loko o ka paukü 38 ma ka ‘ölelo Hawai‘i.

These two paragraphs in English are included within

the single paragraph 38 in the Hawaiian.

Premier, then it shall become a law of the king-

dom, and that law shall not be repealed until it is

done by the voice of those who established it.

36. RESPECTING THE TAX OFFICERS.

The King and Premier shall appoint tax officers,

and give them their certificates of office. There

shall be distinct tax officers for each of the

islands, at the discretion of the King and

Premier.

37. When a tax officer has received his certificate

of appointment, he shall not be dismissed from

office without first having a formal trial, and hav-

ing been convicted of fault, at which time he shall

be dismissed. Though if the law should prescribe

a given number of years as the term of office, it

may be done.

38. The following are the established duties of the

tax officers. They shall assess the taxes and give

notice of the amount to all the people, that they

may understand in suitable time. The tax officers

shall make the assessment in subserviency to the

orders of the governors, and in accordance with

the requirements of the law. And when the taxes

are to be gathered, they shall gather them and

deliver the property to the governor, and the gov-

ernor shall pay it over to the Premier, and the

Premier shall deliver it to the King.

38a. The tax officers shall also have charge of the

public labor done for the King, though if they see

proper to commit it to the land agents it is well,

but the tax officers being above the land agents

shall be accountable for the work. They shall also

have charge of all new business which the King

shall wish to extend through the kingdom. In all

business however they shall be subject to the

governor.9

ma lalo, a me ko ke Kuhina Nui, a laila lilo ia i

känäwai no ke aupuni. ‘A‘ole ho‘i e noa ia

känäwai, a na ka po‘e näna i kau e ho‘onoa.

36. No nä Luna ‘Auhau.

Na ke Ali‘i läua ‘o kona Kuhina Nui e koho i

mau luna ‘auhau, a e hä‘awi iä läkou i palapala

ho‘olilo. ‘Oko‘a nä luna ‘auhau o kekahi moku,

‘oko‘a nä luna ‘auhau o kekahi moku. Inä ‘ekolu

luna o ka moku ho‘okahi, ‘o ia nö. Inä i ‘oi aku a

emi mai paha, aia nö i ka mana‘o o ke Ali‘i, läua

‘o ke Kuhina Nui.

37. A loa‘a i kekahi luna ka palapala ho‘olilo, a

laila, ‘a‘ole ia e hemo me ka ho‘okolokolo ‘ole ‘ia

ma mua; a maopopo kona hewa, a laila, hemo.

Akä, inä i ha‘i mua ‘ia ma ke känäwai nä

makahiki o ko läkou noho luna ‘ana, pono nö ia.

38. Eia ka hana maopopo a nä luna ‘auhau. Na

läkou e hö‘ike aku i nä känaka a pau i ka nui o

ka ho‘okupu, i lohe mua ‘ia i ka manawa pono.

E hö‘ike aku nä luna e like me ka ‘ölelo a nä ali‘i

kia‘äina, e like ho‘i me ka ‘ölelo o ke känäwai. A

hiki i ka manawa e ho‘okupu ai, na läkou nö e

hö‘ili‘ili i ka waiwai, a hä‘awi i ke kia‘äina, a na

ke kia‘äina e hä‘awi aku i ke Kuhina Nui, a na ke

Kuhina Nui aku, a i ke Ali‘i Nui. E mälama nö

ho‘i nä luna ‘auhau i ka pa‘ahao o ke Ali‘i, a inä

mana‘o läkou e hä‘awi i nä konohiki e hana,

pono loa ia, e noho na‘e nä luna ma luna o nä

konohiki ma ia hana. E mälama nö ho‘i nä luna

‘auhau i nä hana hou a ke Ali‘i e mana‘o ai e

ho‘olaha a‘e ma luna o ke aupuni. E hana na‘e

läkou ma lalo o nä kia‘äina.

malalo, a me ko ke Kuhina nui, alaila lilo ia i

kanawai no ke aupuni. Aole hoi e noa ia kanawai,

a na ka poe nana i kau e hoonoa.

36. No na Lunaauhau.

Na ke alii laua o kona Kuhina nui e koho i mau

luna auhau, a e haawi ia lakou i palapala hoolilo.

Okoa na lunaauhau o kekahi moku, okoa na

lunaauhau o kekahi moku. Ina ekolu luna o ka

moku hookahi, oia no. Ina i oi aku a emi mai

paha, aia no i ka manao o ke alii, laua o ke

Kuhina nui.

37. A loaa i kekahi luna ka palapala hoolilo,

alaila, aole ia e hemo me ka hookolokolo ole ia

mamua; a maopopo kona hewa, alaila, hemo.

Aka, ina i hai mua ia ma ke kanawai na makahiki

o ko lakou noho luna ana, pono no ia.

38. Eia ka hana maopopo a na lunaauhau. Na

lakou e hoike aku i na kanaka a pau i ka nui o

ka hookupu, i lohe mua ia i ka manawa pono.

E hoike aku na luna e like me ka olelo a na’lii

kiaaina, e like hoi me ka olelo o ke kanawai. A

hiki i ka manawa e hookupu ai, na lakou no e

hoiliili i ka waiwai, a haawi i ke kiaaina, a na ke

kiaaina e haawi aku i ke Kuhina nui, a na ke

Kuhina nui aku, a i ke alii nui. E malama no hoi

na lunaauhau i ka paahao o ke alii, a ina manao

lakou e haawi i na konohiki e hana, pono loa ia,

e noho nae na luna maluna o na konohiki ma ia

hana. E malama no hoi na lunaauhau i na hana

hou a ke alii e manao ai e hoolaha ae maluna o

ke aupuni. E hana nae lakou malalo o na kiaaina.

nä kumukänäwai o ka makahiki 1839 a me ka 1840 5 55 4 ka ho‘oilina: journal of hawaiian language sources ● march 2002

39. The tax officers shall be the judges in all

cases arising under the tax law. In all cases where

land agents or landlords are charged with

oppressing the lower classes, and also in all cases

of difficulty between land agents and tenants, the

tax officers shall be the judges, and also all cases

arising under the tax law enacted on the 7th of

June, <in the year of our Lord> 1839.

40. They shall moreover perform their duties in

the following manner: Each tax officer shall be

confined in his authority to his own appropriate

district. If a difficulty arises between a land agent

and his tenant, the tax officer shall try the case

and if the tenant be found guilty, then the tax

officer, in connection with the land agent shall

execute the law upon him. But if the tax officer

judge the land agent to be in fault, then he shall

notify all the tax officers of his particular island,

and if they are agreed, they shall pass sentence

on him and the governor shall execute it. But in

all trials, if any individual take exception to the

decision of the tax officer, he may appeal to the

governor who shall have power to try the case

again, and if exceptions are taken to the decision

of the governor, on information given to the

Supreme Judges, there shall be a new and final

trial before them.

41. OF THE JUDGES.

Each of the governors shall at his discretion,

appoint judges for his particular island, two or

more as he shall think expedient, and shall give

them certificates of office. After having received

their certificates, they shall not be turned out,

except by impeachment, though it shall be prop-

er at any time for the law to limit the term of

office.

42. They shall act in the following manner: They

shall give notice before hand of the days on

which courts are to be held. When the time spec-

ified arrives, they shall then enter on the trials

39. Aia nö i nä luna ‘auhau ka ‘ölelo no ke

känäwai ‘auhau. Iä läkou nä ‘ölelo a pau no ka

ho‘okaumaha ‘ana o nä konohiki a me nä haku

‘äina, i nä maka‘äinana, a me nä hihia a pau i

waena o nä konohiki, a me nä hoa‘äina, a me nä

mea a pau i ‘ölelo ‘ia i loko o ke känäwai ‘auhau

i kau ‘ia i ka malama ‘o Iune, i ka lä ‘ehiku i ka

makahiki o ka Haku, 1839.

40. Penei ho‘i kä läkou hana ‘ana: E hana nö këlä

luna ‘auhau këia luna ‘auhau ma kona wahi iho.

Inä kü ka hihia ma waena o nä konohiki a me nä

hoa‘äina, na ka luna ‘auhau e ho‘okolokolo, a i

hewa ka hoa‘äina na ka luna a me ke konohiki e

ho‘okö i ke känäwai ma luna ona. Akä, inä i hewa

ke konohiki i ko ka luna mana‘o, a laila e ki‘i aku

ka luna i nä luna ‘auhau a pau o ia moku, a inä i

like ko läkou mana‘o a pau, a laila, ua hewa ke

konohiki, a na ke kia‘äina e ho‘okö i ke känäwai

ma luna ona. Akä i nä ho‘okolokolo ‘ana a pau,

inä mana‘o kekahi ua hewa kä nä luna hana ‘ana,

pono e hö‘ike aku i ke kia‘äina, a näna e

ho‘okolokolo hou. A inä e mana‘o ‘ia ua hewa kä

ke kia‘äina hana ‘ana, e hö‘ike ‘ia aku ia i nä

Luna Känäwai Ki‘eki‘e, a na läkou e ho‘okolokolo

hou.

41. No nä Luna Känäwai.

E koho nö këlä kia‘äina këia kia‘äina i mau luna

känäwai no ka moku, e like me kona mana‘o, inä

‘elua ‘o ia, a inä i nui aku, ‘o ia nö, e like ho‘i me

kona mana‘o, a e hä‘awi nö ho‘i ‘o ia iä läkou i

palapala ho‘olilo. A loa‘a iä läkou ia, ‘a‘ole läkou

e hemo me ka ho‘okolokolo ‘ole, akä inä

ho‘äkäka ke känäwai i nä makahiki o ko läkou

noho luna känäwai ‘ana, ua pono ia.

42. Penei ho‘i läkou e hana ai: E ha‘i mua ‘ia nä

lä ho‘okolokolo. A hiki i ka lä i ‘ölelo ‘ia, a laila,

e ho‘okolokolo läkou e like me ka ‘ölelo o ke

känäwai. Eia nä känäwai i hä‘awi ‘ia iä läkou,

39. Aia no i na lunaauhau ka olelo no ke kanawai

auhau. Ia lakou na olelo a pau no ka hookaumaha

ana o na konohiki a me na hakuaina, i na

makaainana, a me na hihia a pau iwaena o na

konohiki, a me na hoaaina, a me na mea a pau

i oleloia iloko o ke kanawai auhau i kauia i ka

malama o Iune, i ka la ehiku i ka makahiki o ka

Haku, 1839.

40. Penei hoi ka lakou hana ana: E hana no kela

lunaauhau keia lunaauhau ma kona wahi iho. Ina

ku ka hihia mawaena o na konohiki a me na

hoaaina, na ka lunaauhau e hookolokolo, a i

hewa ka hoaaina na ka luna a me ke konohiki e

hooko i ke kanawai maluna ona. Aka, ina i hewa

ke konohiki i ko ka luna manao, alaila e kii aku

ka luna i na lunaauhau a pau o ia moku, a ina i

like ko lakou manao a pau, alaila, ua hewa ke

konohiki, a na ke kiaaina e hooko i ke kanawai

maluna ona. Aka i na hookolokolo ana a pau, ina

manao kekahi ua hewa ka na luna hana ana,

pono e hoike aku i ke Kiaaina, a nana e

hookolokolo hou. A ina e manaoia ua hewa ka ke

Kiaaina hana ana, e hoikeia’ku ia i na

lunakanawai kiekie, a na lakou e hookolokolo

hou.

41. No na Lunakanawai.

E koho no kela Kiaaina keia Kiaaina i mau

Lunakanawai no ka moku, e like me kona

manao, ina elua oia, a ina i nui aku, oia no, e

like hoi me kona manao, a e haawi no hoi oia ia

lakou i palapala hoolilo. A loaa ia lakou ia, aole

lakou e hemo me ka hookolokolo ole, aka ina

hoakaka ke kanawai i na makahiki o ko lakou

noho lunakanawai ana, ua pono ia.

42. Penei hoi lakou e hana’i: E hai mua ia na

la hookolokolo. A hiki i ka la i oleloia, alaila,

e hookolokolo lakou e like me ka olelo o ke

kanawai. Eia na kanawai i haawiia ia lakou,

nä kumukänäwai o ka makahiki 1839 a me ka 1840 5 75 6 ka ho‘oilina: journal of hawaiian language sources ● march 2002

according as the law shall direct. They shall be

the judges in cases arising under all the laws

excepting those which regard taxation, or diffi-

culties between land agents, or landlords and

their tenants. They shall be sustained by the gov-

ernor, whose duty it shall be to execute the law

according to their decisions. But if exceptions are

taken to their judgment, whosoever takes them

may appeal to the Supreme Judges.

43. OF THE SUPREME JUDGES.

The representative body shall appoint four per-

sons whose duty it shall be to aid the King and

Premier, and these six persons shall constitute

the Supreme Court of the kingdom.

44. Their business shall be to settle all cases of

difficulty which are left unsettled by the tax offi-

cers and common judges. They shall give a new

trial according to the conditions of the law. They

shall give previous notice of the time for holding

courts, in order that those who are in difficulty

may appeal. The decision of these shall be final.

There shall be no further trial after theirs. Life,

death, confinement, fine and freedom, from it,

are all in their hands, and their decisions are

final.

45. OF CHANGES IN THIS CONSTITUTION.

This Constitution shall not be considered as

finally established, until the people have general-

ly heard it and have appointed persons according

to the provisions herein made, and they have

given their assent, then this Constitution shall be

considered as permanently established.

46. But hereafter, if it should be thought desirable

to change it, notice shall be previously given, that

all the people may understand the nature of the

proposed change, and the succeeding year, at the

meeting of the nobles and the representative body,

if they shall agree as to the addition proposed or

as to the alteration, then they may make it.

‘o nä känäwai a pau loa i pili ‘ole i ka ‘auhau, a

me nä hihia i waena o nä konohiki a me nä haku

‘äina a me nä hoa‘äina. ‘O ke kia‘äina ho‘i ko

läkou kökua näna e ho‘okö i kä läkou ‘ölelo. Akä,

inä i mana‘o ‘ia ua hewa kä läkou hana ‘ana, ‘o

ka mea mana‘o pëlä, pono nö iä ia e ho‘opi‘i i nä

Luna Känäwai Ki‘eki‘e.

43. No nä Luna Känäwai Ki‘eki‘e.

‘O ka po‘e i koho ‘ia, e koho läkou i mau luna

‘ehä, e kökua i ke Ali‘i Nui, läua ‘o kona Kuhina

Nui. A ‘o këia po‘e ‘eono, ‘o lakou nä Luna

Känäwai Ki‘eki‘e no ke aupuni.

44. Eia kä läkou hana, ‘o nä hihia pono ‘ole i

nä luna ‘auhau a me nä luna känäwai, na läkou

e ho‘okolokolo hou e like me ka ‘ölelo o ke

känäwai. E ha‘i mua ‘ia nö ho‘i nä lä ho‘okolokolo

i mea e hiki ai i ka po‘e pilikia ke ho‘opi‘i. A ‘o ka

‘ölelo a këia po‘e, ua kö. ‘A‘ohe ‘ölelo i koe ma

hope o kä läkou. ‘O ke ola, a me ka make, ‘o ka

ho‘opa‘a, a me ka wehe, ‘o ka uku a me ka uku

‘ole, aia nö iä läkou ia, a iä läkou ua pau ka ‘ölelo

‘ a n a .

45. No ka Ho‘ololi hou ‘ana i këia Kumukänäwai.

‘A‘ole e mana‘o ‘ia ua pa‘a loa këia ‘ölelo, a lohe

nä känaka a pau mai ‘ö a ‘ö, a koho ‘ia kekahi

mau mea e like me ka ‘ölelo ma loko, a ‘ae läkou

a laila, ua pa‘a loa këia Kumukänäwai.

46. A ma hope aku, inä e mana‘o ‘ia e ho‘ololi

hou, e ha‘i mua ‘ia a lohe nä känaka a pau i ke

‘ano o këlä ‘ölelo hou i mana‘o ‘ia e ho‘okomo,

a i ia makahiki iho i ka häläwai ‘ana o nä ali‘i, a

me ka po‘e i koho ‘ia, inä i mana‘o like läkou e

ho‘okomo hou i kekahi ‘ölelo, a e hö‘ole i kekahi

‘ölelo paha, pono nö ia hana ‘ana.

o na kanawai a pau loa i pili ole i ka auhau, a me

na hihia iwaena o na konohiki a me na hakuaina

a me na hoaaina. O ke Kiaaina hoi ko lakou

kokua nana e hooko i ka lakou olelo. Aka, ina

i manaoia ua hewa ka lakou hana ana, o ka mea

manao pela, pono no ia ia e hoopii i na

Lunakanawai Kiekie.

43. No na Lunakanawai Kiekie.

O ka poe i kohoia, e koho lakou i mau luna eha,

e kokua i ke alii nui, laua o kona Kuhina nui. A o

keia poe eono, o lakou na lunakanawai kiekie no

ke aupuni.

44. Eia ka lakou hana, o na hihia pono ole i na

lunaauhau a me na lunakanawai, na lakou e

hookolokolo hou e like me ka olelo o ke kanawai.

E hai mua ia no hoi na la hookolokolo i mea e

hiki ai ka poe pilikia ke hoopii. A o ka olelo a keia

poe, ua ko. Aohe olelo i koe mahope o ka lakou.

O ke ola, a me ka make, o ka hoopaa, a me ka

wehe, o ka uku a me ka uku ole, aia no ia lakou

ia, a ia lakou ua pau ka olelo ana.

45. No ka Hoololi hou ana i keia Kumu Kanawai.

Aole e manaoia ua paa loa keia olelo, a lohe na

kanaka a pau mai o a o, a kohoia kekahi mau

mea e like me ka olelo maloko, a ae lakou alaila,

ua paa loa keia Kumu Kanawai.

46. A mahope aku, ina e manaoia e hoololi hou,

E hai muaia a lohe na kanaka a pau i ke ano o

kela olelo hou i manaoia e hookomo, a ia

makahiki iho i ka halawai ana o na’lii, a me ka

poe i kohoia, ina i manao like lakou e hookomo

hou i kekahi olelo, a e hoole i kekahi olelo paha,

pono no ia hana ana.

nä kumukänäwai o ka makahiki 1839 a me ka 1840 5 95 8 ka ho‘oilina: journal of hawaiian language sources ● march 2002

kolamu (column) 3

10. Ma kona ‘ao‘ao Kuhina Nui, ua kau pü ‘o Kekäuluohi

i käna pülima me kä ke Ali‘i Nui e kühelu ai këia

palapala. E nänä i ka paukü 22.

Kekäuluohi, as Kuhina Nui (Premier), co-signed

with the King to make the document official. See

paragraph 22.

47. The above constitution has been agreed to by

the nobles, and we have hereunto subscribed our

names, this eighth day of October, in the year of

our Lord 1840, at Honolulu, O‘ahu.

(Signed) KAMEHAMEHA III.

KEKÄULUOHI.10

47. ‘O këia ‘ölelo i ‘ölelo ‘ia ma luna, ua ho‘oholo

‘ia i nä ali‘i, a ua kau ‘ia ko mäua inoa, i këia lä 8

o ‘Okakopa, i ka makahiki o ka Haku, 1840, ma

Honolulu, O‘ahu.

KAMEHAMEHA III.

KEKÄULUOHI.

47. O keia olelo i oleloia maluna, ua hooholoia

i na’lii, a ua kauia ko maua inoa, i keia la 8 o

Okatoba, i ka makahiki o ka Haku, 1840, ma

Honolulu, Oahu.

KAMEHAMEHA III.

KEKAULUOHI.

1. KA

LAMA HAWAI‘I.

A MEANS TO SPREAD KNOWLEDGE

AND TO BENEFIT THE COLLEGE.

For the spirit to be ignorant is not good.

BY SOLOMON.

Year 1. LAHAINA LUNA, MAUI

FEBRUARY 14, 1834. Number 1.

KA LAMA HAWAI‘I.

In enlightened lands, it is believed that the

spreading of knowledge is a good thing. When

wise people ponder and come upon good new

thoughts not known before, and it is seen to be

a good thought, they then desire to disseminate

it abroad, and not hide it, so that all men may

know. Paper with the printed word is the main

form of dissemination.

2. There are many types of paper with the print-

ed word. Some are in large books, some are in

little books, and some are just papers sewn

together. Some are papers printed periodically.

The 1834 Newspapers, Part 1

This section of the journal will ultimately reproduce all Hawaiian newspapers in chronological order.

We begin with the first edition of the first title, namely the February 14, 1834, four-page issue of Ka

Lama Hawai‘i (The Hawaiian Luminary). It was published at Lahaina Luna, Maui, for students at the

College of Hawai‘i there and at other schools run by the Protestant missionaries. The authors of articles

are not identified, although the names of two missionaries appear in the article “No ke Kulanui”

(“About the College”). Lorrin Andrews was editor. Besides Andrews, writers included instructors and

students at the College of Hawai‘i. Alonzo Chapin and his wife, Mary Ann Tenney Chapin, produced the

illustrations. Two articles appear on page 1; the next two articles on page 2; the illustration on page 3;

and three articles on the last page. Forbes 901 (II:75–77); Mo‘okini 24; Chapin 63.

“Ka Lama Hawai‘i” is the introduction to Ka Lama Hawai‘i and the first article of this newspaper.

1. KA

LAMA HAWAI‘I.

HE MEA IA E HO‘OLAHA ‘IKE, A HE

MEA HO‘I E PONO AI KE KULANUI.

I na‘aupö ka ‘uhane, ‘a‘ole ia he maika‘i.

NA SOLOMONA.

Makahiki 1. LAHAINA LUNA, MAUI

PEPELUALI 14, 1834. Helu 1.

‘O KA LAMA HAWAI‘I.

Ma nä ‘äina na‘auao, ua mana‘o ‘ia he mea

maika‘i ka ho‘olaha ‘ike. I ka no‘ono‘o ‘ana o

ka po‘e no‘iau, a loa‘a iä läkou kekahi mana‘o

maika‘i hou, ‘a‘ole i ‘ike ‘ia ma mua, a maopopo

nö he mana‘o maika‘i, a laila ake nö e ho‘olaha,

‘a‘ole hünä, i ‘ike nä känaka a pau loa. ‘O ka pepa

i pa‘i ‘ia i ka ‘ölelo ka mea e ho‘olaha nui ai.

2. Nui wale ke ‘ano o nä pepa i pa‘i ‘ia i ka ‘ölelo.

Ma nä puke nui kekahi; ma nä puke ‘u‘uku iho

kekahi a ma nä pepa i humuhumu pü wale ‘ia

kekahi. Nui ho‘i ke ‘ano o ia pa‘i ‘ana ma ka wä.

1. KA

LAMA HAWAII.

HE MEA IA E HOOLAHA IKE, A HE

MEA HOI E PONO AI KE KULANUI.

I naaupo ka uhane, aole ia he maikai.

NA SOLOMONA.

MAKAHIKI 1. LAHAINALUNA MAUI

FEBERUARI, 14. 1834. Helu 1.

O KA LAMA HAWAII.

Ma na aina naauao, ua manao ia he mea maikai

ka hoolaha ike. I ka noonoo ana o ka poe noiau,

a loaa ia lakou kekahi manao maikai hou, aole

i ikeia mamua, a maopopo no he manao maikai,

alaila ake no e hoolaha, aole huna, i ike na

kanaka a pau loa. O ka pepa i paiia i ka olelo

ka mea e hoolaha nui ai.

2. Nui wale ke ano o na pepa i paiia i ka olelo.

Ma na buke nui kekahi; ma na buke uuku iho

kekahi a ma na pepa i humuhumu pu wale ia

kekahi; a ma na pepa mahuahua i paiia i ka wa

Nä Nüpepa o ka Makahiki 1834, Mähele 1

E ho‘opuka li‘ili‘i hou ‘ia ana ma këia mähele o ka puke pai nä nüpepa Hawai‘i a pau ma ke ka‘ina i pa‘i

mua ‘ia ai. E ho‘omaka ana me ka pukana mua o ka nüpepa mua loa, ‘o Ka Lama Hawai‘i, o ka lä 14 o

Pepeluali, 1834, i pa‘i ‘ia ma Lahaina Luna, Maui na nä haumäna o Ke Kulanui o Hawai‘i ma Lahaina

Luna a me nä kula ‘ë a‘e a nä Mikionali Kalawina. ‘O Lorrin Andrews ka Luna Ho‘oponopono. Na nä

kumu a me nä haumäna o ke Kulanui o Hawai‘i ma Lahaina Luna i käkau; ‘a‘ole na‘e i palapala ‘ia ko

läkou inoa päkahi. Hö‘ike ‘ia nä inoa o ‘elua mikionali ma loko o ka ‘atikala ‘o “No ke Kulanui.” Na

Alonzo Chapin a me käna wahine, ‘o Mary Ann Tenney Chapin, i kaha i nä ki‘i. Aia ‘elua ‘atikala ma ka

‘ao‘ao ‘ekahi; ke ki‘i ma ka ‘ao‘ao ‘elua; ‘elua ‘atikala ma ka ‘ao‘ao ‘ekolu; a me ‘ekolu ‘atikala ma ka

‘ao‘ao hope. Forbes 901 (II:75–77); Mo‘okini 24; Chapin 63.

‘O “Ka Lama Hawai‘i” ka ho‘olauna o ka nüpepa ‘o Ka Lama Hawai‘i a me ka ‘atikala mua o ia nüpepa.

60 61

nä nüpepa o ka makahiki 1834, mähele 1 6 36 2 ka ho‘oilina: journal of hawaiian language sources ● march 2002

kolamu (column) 3

1. Unuhi häiki ‘ia i ka ‘ölelo Pelekänia, “Hawaiian

Torch.”

Literally in English, “Hawaiian Torch.”

There are many types of periodicals: monthly,

weekly and daily. Some papers are folded.

However, weekly papers, those that are most

substantial, are most suitable, like the foreign

papers that have recently arrived.

3. There are many types of subjects published in

these papers. Some are instruction manuals for

workers, and some for merchants, some for the

scholarly, some for the religious and some for

children. The importance of the words in these

papers is that they benefit the work of those who

read them.

4. It was thought that it might be good to start a

similar paper here at the College of Hawai‘i, from

which the students of the School will benefit, as

well as other people as they see fit.

5. The name written above, Lama Hawai‘i,1 was

given to this paper because knowledge is similar

to light. Since this paper spreads knowledge, this

name is probably appropriate.

6. Presently we do not know the exact form this

paper will take in the future. There are things,

however, that we do know. It will be a means to

broaden knowledge on all subjects to benefit the

students of the College. It will also be a means to

teach the value of enlightenment over ignorance,

of the good attributes of people in enlightened

countries, of the righteousness of God’s word,

that this island chain be peaceful, and this king-

dom be blessed. Such are the wishes of the edi-

tor, that God will give him the strength of body

and wisdom to be successful.

7. It would be erroneous to think that the words

of this paper are like those of God, because the

word of God is different from the word of man.

Ma ka malama kekahi, ma ka hebedoma kekahi,

a ma ka lä kekahi; he pepa ‘opi‘opi ‘ia kekahi. A

‘o nä pepa i pa‘i ‘ia ma ka hebedoma, ‘o nä pepa

mähuahua a‘e, ka pono, e like me nä pepa i hiki

mai nei me ka ‘ölelo haole.

3. Nui ho‘i ke ‘ano o nä ‘ölelo i ho‘olaha ‘ia ma

këia mau pepa. He mea a‘o aku kekahi i ka po‘e

pa‘ahana, a na ka po‘e kälepa kekahi, na ka po‘e

‘imi na‘auao kekahi, na ka po‘e haipule kekahi,

na ka po‘e kamali‘i kekahi. ‘O ke ‘ano nui o ka

‘ölelo ma ia po‘e pepa, he mea ia e pono ai ka

hana ‘ana o ka po‘e näna e heluhelu.

4. Ua mana‘o ‘ia, he maika‘i paha ke ho‘omaka i

kekahi pepa like ma ke Kulanui o Hawai‘i nei i

mea e pono ai a e na‘auao ai nä haumäna o ua

Kula nei a me känaka ‘ë a‘e paha, aia i ka mana‘o

o ha‘i.

5. Ua ho‘opili ‘ia ka inoa i käkau ‘ia ma luna, ‘o

LAMA HAWAI‘I, no ka mea ‘o ka ‘ike, ua like ia

me ka mälamalama. A he mea ho‘olaha ‘ike këia

pepa, no laila, ua pili paha këia inoa.

6. I këia manawa, ‘a‘ole maopopo loa ke ‘ano

o ia pepa ma këia hope aku. Ua maopopo nö

kekahi mau mea. He mea ia e ho‘olaha i ka ‘ike

i këlä mea këia mea e pono ai nä haumäna o ke

Kulanui, he mea ho‘i ia e a‘o aku i ka maika‘i o

ka na‘auao ma mua o ka na‘aupö, a me ka ‘ao‘ao

maika‘i o känaka ma nä ‘äina na‘auao, a he mea

ia e hö‘ike i ka pono o kä ke Akua ‘ölelo, i

maluhia këia pae ‘äina, a i pömaika‘i ho‘i këia

aupuni. ‘O ia ka mana‘o o ka mea näna e

ho‘oponopono, aia i ke Akua ke ho‘oikaika i kona

kino, a e hä‘awi mai nö ho‘i i akamai a i na‘auao

ho‘i e pono ai.

7. ‘A‘ole pono ke mana‘o a‘e, ua like ka ‘ölelo

ma këia pepa me kä ke Akua ‘ölelo. No ka mea,

‘oko‘a kä ke Akua ‘ölelo, ‘oko‘a kä ke kanaka. He

kekahi. Nui hoi ke ano o ia pai ana ma ka wa.

Ma ka malama kekahi, ma ka hebedoma kekahi,

a ma ka la kekahi. He pepa opiopiia kekahi; a

o na pepa i paiia ma ka hebedoma, o na pepa

mahuahua ae ka pono e like me na pepa i hiki

mai nei me ka olelo haole.

3. Nui hoi ke ano o na olelo i hoolahaia ma

keia mau pepa. He mea ao aku kekahi i ka poe

paahana, a na ka poe kalepa kekahi, na ka poe

imi naauao kekahi, na ka poe haipule kekahi, a

na ka poe kamalii kekahi. O ke ano nui o ka olelo

ma ia poe pepa, he mea ia e pono ai ka hana ana

o ka poe nana e heluhelu.

4. Ua manaoia, he maikai paha ke hoomaka i

kekahi pepa like, ma ke Kulanui o Hawaii nei,

i mea e pono ai a e naauao ai na haumana o ua

Kula nei a me kanaka e ae paha, aia i ka manao

o hai.

5. Ua hoopiliia ka inoa i kakau ia maluna o

LAMA HAWAII, no ka mea o ka ike, ua like ia

me ka malamalama. A he mea hoolaha ike keia

pepa, nolaila, ua pili paha keia inoa.

6. I keia manawa, aole maopopo loa ke ano oia

pepa ma keia hope aku. Ua maopopo no kekahi

mau mea. He mea ia e hoolaha i ka ike i kela mea

keia mea e pono ai na haumana o ke Kulanui,

he mea hoi ia e ao [a]ku i ka maikai o ka naauao

mamua o ka naaupo, a me ka aoao maikai o

kanaka ma na aina naauao, a he mea ia e hoike

i ka pono o ka ke Akua olelo, i maluhia keia pae

aina, a i pomaikai hoi keia aupuni. Oia ka manao

o ka mea nana e hooponopono, aia i ke Akua

ke hoikaika i kona kino, a e haawi mai no hoi

i akamai a i naauao hoi e pono ai.

7. Aole pono ke manao ae, ua like ka olelo ma

keia pepa me ka ke Akua olelo. No ka mea, okoa

ka ke Akua olelo, okoa ka ke kanaka. He oiaio

nä nüpepa o ka makahiki 1834, mähele 1 6 56 4 ka ho‘oilina: journal of hawaiian language sources ● march 2002

God’s word is pure truth and must be pondered.

The following however is in accordance with what

man has learned: “Up in the heavens is the sun

which illuminates the entire world.” So it is with

God’s word; it is light that will illuminate all the

world. Ka Lama Hawai‘i directs us toward that

light so that man will see the correct path, that he

may be truly blessed in this world and the next.

‘oia‘i‘o wale kä ke Akua, a pono e mana‘o nui

‘ia mai. He ‘oia‘i‘o nö na‘e këia e like me kä ke

kanaka a‘o ‘ana aku. Ma ka lani ka lä, ka mea i

ho‘omälamalama nui mai i ke ao nei a pau. Pëlä

nö kä ke Akua ‘ölelo; he mälamalama nui nö ia e

ho‘omälamalama ana i ko ke ao nei a pau loa. ‘O

ka LAMA HAWAI‘I ka mea e kuhikuhi wale aku i

ua mälamalama lä i ‘ike nä känaka i ke ala pololei,

i pömaika‘i ‘i‘o i këia ao a i ia ao aku nö ho‘i.

wale ka ke Akua, a pono e manao nui ia mai.

He oiaio no nae keia e like me ka ke kanaka ao

ana’ku. Ma ka lani ka la, ka mea i hoomalamalama

nui mai i ke ao nei a pau. Pela no ka ke Akua

olelo; he malamalama nui no ia e hoomalamalama

ana i ko ke ao nei a pau loa. O ka LAMA HAWAII

ka mea e kuhikuhi wale aku i ua malamalama la i

ike na kanaka i ke ala pololei, i pomaikai io i keia

ao a ia ao aku no hoi.

1. THE REASON FOR IGNORANCE.

Sin is the reason for ignorance.

2. At the time that man was first created here on

Earth, he possessed knowledge and was not igno-

rant at all.

3. His thoughts were correct and he was quick to

know all. Then sin entered his heart and the abil-

ity to see truth was darkened. Sin is like a barrier

that covers the eyes, and should the heart be

darkened by sin, man becomes ignorant.

4. This is the true nature of all mankind. But,

because of the strength of some in their seeking

knowledge, knowledge is attained.

5. Some people know what is needed to live in

this world, and that which the body needs.

6. However, that which the spirit needs is lack-

ing. As spoken by one of the prophets, “My peo-

ple are foolish, they do not know me, they do not

think, they are versed in sin; yet, of good deeds,

they know nothing.” (Jeremiah 4:22.) Jehovah

regrets man’s turning to sin and seeks what is

needed to make things right. His word is the

essential factor that enlightens man in matters of

the spirit. There is nothing else like it. And those

who always seek it with a humble heart find it.

Those people who only strengthen their knowl-

The Reason for Ignorance

This article is a typical example of American missionaries’ persistent Christian teachings to the

Hawaiian people, the intent of which was to “educate” Hawaiians so that they would be like the peoples

of other “progressive” nations of the world.

1. KE KUMU O KA NA‘AUPÖ.

‘O ka hewa ke kumu o ka na‘aupö.

2. I ka wä i hana mua ‘ia ai ke kanaka ma ka

honua nei, he ‘ike kona, ‘a‘ole na‘aupö iki.

3. Pololei ka mana‘o, hikiwawe ka ‘ike i këlä mea

këia mea. A komo ka hewa i loko o ka na‘au,

pöwehiwehi ihola ka ‘ike aku i ka ‘oia‘i‘o. Ua like

nö ka hewa me ka pale e uhi ana i ka maka; a

pouli ihola ka na‘au i ka hewa, lilo ihola känaka i

po‘e na‘aupö.

4. ‘O ia ke ‘ano maoli o nä känaka a pau loa.

Akä, no ka ikaika o kekahi po‘e ma ka ‘imi

na‘auao, ua loa‘a nö.

5. ‘Ike a‘ela kahi po‘e i këlä mea këia mea e pono

ai ka noho ‘ana ma këia ao, a me ka mea e pono

ai ke kino.

6. Akä, ‘o nä mea e pono ai ka ‘uhane, ‘a‘ole i

loa‘a. Like me ka ‘ölelo a kekahi käula. “Ua

lapuwale ko‘u po‘e känaka, ‘a‘ole läkou i ‘ike

mai ia‘u, ‘a‘ole o läkou no‘ono‘o, ua akamai

läkou i ka hana hewa; akä, i ka hana pono, ‘a‘ole

o läkou ‘ike iki.” (Ieremia 4:22.) Minamina ihola

‘o Iehova i ka lilo ‘ana o nä känaka i ka hewa, a

‘imi ihola ‘o ia i nä mea e pono ai. ‘O käna ‘ölelo,

he mea nui ia e ho‘ona‘auao ai känaka ma nä

mea o ka ‘uhane, ‘a‘ole ho‘i mea ‘ë a‘e e like me

ia; a ‘o ka po‘e e huli mau ma laila me ka na‘au

1. KE KUMU O KA NAAUPO.

O ka hewa ke kumu o ka naaupo.

2. I ka wa i hana mua ia’i ke kanaka ma ka

honua nei, he ike kona, aole naaupo iki.

3. Pololei ka manao, hikiwawe ka ike i kela mea

keia mea. A komo ka hewa iloko o ka naau,

powehiwehi iho la ka ike aku i ka oiaio. Ua like

no ka hewa me ka pale e uhi ana i ka maka: a

pouli iho la ka naau i ka hewa, lilo iho la kanaka

i poe naaupo.

4. Oia ke ano maoli o na kanaka a pau loa. Aka,

no ka ikaika o kekahi poe ma ka imi naauao, ua

loaa no.

5. Ike ae la kahi poe i kela mea keia mea e pono

ai ka noho ana ma keia ao, a me ka mea e pono ai

ke kino.

6. Aka, o na mea e pono ai ka uhane, aole i loaa.

Like me ka olelo a kekahi kaula. “Ua lapuwale

ko’u poe kanaka, aole lakou i ike mai ia’u, aole o

lakou noonoo, ua akamai lakou i ka hana hewa;

aka, i ka hana pono, aole o lakou ike iki.” (Ier.

4-22.) Minamina iho la o Iehova i ka lilo ana o

na kanaka i ka hewa, a imi iho la oia i na mea e

pono ai. O kana olelo, he mea nui ia e hoonaauao

ai kanaka ma na mea o ka uhane, aole hoi mea e

ae e like me ia: a o ka poe e huli mau malaila me

ka naau akahai, ua loaa no. A o ka poe hooikaika

Ke Kumu o ka Na‘aupö

He la‘ana këia ‘atikala o ke a‘o Kalikiano ‘ana o ka po‘e mikionali ‘Amelika i ka po‘e Hawai‘i e nokenoke

ana i ka “ho‘ona‘auao” ‘ana i ko Hawai‘i nei i like me ko nä ‘äina holomua ‘ë a‘e o ka honua.

66 67

nä nüpepa o ka makahiki 1834, mähele 1 6 96 8 ka ho‘oilina: journal of hawaiian language sources ● march 2002

edge of earthly things leaving the word of God

behind will find that knowledge. But in matters

of the spirit, they will always dwell in ignorance

and stupidity, without knowing what man needs

in this world and the next. Thus, returning to

God with a new heart is what is needed. Then

one will be able to attain the knowledge of things

in this world as well as those pertaining to the

spirit.

akahai, ua loa‘a nö. A ‘o ka po‘e ho‘oikaika ma ka

‘ike i nä mea o këia ao wale nö, a ha‘alele i ka huli

i kä ke Akua ‘ölelo, e loa‘a nö auane‘i. Akä, ma nä

mea o ka ‘uhane, e noho mau nö ma ka na‘aupö,

ma ka lapuwale, ma ka ‘ike ‘ole ho‘i i nä mea e

pono nui ai känaka i këia ao a i këlä ao aku nö

ho‘i. No laila, ‘o ka ho‘i hou aku me ke Akua, ‘o

ka na‘au hou, ‘o ia ka mea e pono ai. A laila, e

hiki nö ke loa‘a ka ‘ike i nä mea o këia ao a me

nä mea e pili ana i ka ‘uhane.

ma ka ike i na mea o keia ao wale no, a haalele i

ka huli i ka ke Akua olelo, e loaa no auanei. Aka,

ma na mea o ka uhane, e noho mau no ma ka

naaupo, ma ka lapuwale, ma ka ike ole hoi i na

mea e pono nui ai kanaka i keia ao a i kela ao aku

no hoi. Nolaila o ka hoi hou aku me ke Akua, o

ka naau hou, oia ka mea e pono ai. Alaila, e hiki

no ke loaa ka ike i na mea o keia ao a me na mea

e pili ana i ka uhane.

1. ABOUT THE ELEPHANT.

The Elephant is the largest of all four-legged ani-

mals. If a man should stand upon the head of

another, then their height would be that of the

Elephant’s. Some are eight feet high and some

are fifteen feet.

2. The Elephant is unlike any other four-legged

animal. His back is high and humped, not, how-

ever, like that of the Camel. His body is large; his

neck is short and thick. His ears, which are flat,

do not stand up but are close to his head; his

eyes are small, perhaps like those of the goat. His

About the Elephant

Geographically isolated in the middle of the Pacific Ocean, the people of Hawai‘i had a limited knowl-

edge of the animals of the world. This is the first in a series of articles introducing Hawaiians to the vast

animal kingdom.

‘ELEPANI (ELEPHANT)

1. NO KA ‘ELEPANI.

‘O ka ‘Elepani ka mea nui o nä mea wäwae ‘ehä a

pau. Inä e kü kekahi kanaka ma luna o ke po‘o o

kekahi, a laila, like ko läua ki‘eki‘e me ko ka

‘Elepani. ‘Ewalu kapua‘i ke ki‘eki‘e o kekahi, a he

‘umikumamälima ko kekahi.

2. ‘A‘ole i like ke ‘ano o ka ‘Elepani me ko kekahi

‘ïlio ‘ë. Ua ki‘eki‘e kona kua, a ua kuapu‘u; ‘a‘ole

ho‘i i like me ke Kämelo. Ua nui loa kona kino; ua

pökole kona ‘ä‘ï, a ua nui ho‘i; ua pälahalaha kona

mau pepeiao ‘a‘ole na‘e i kü i luna, ua pili nö i ke

po‘o; ua ‘u‘uku loa kona mau maka, e like paha

1. NO KA ELEPANI.

O ka Elepani ka mea nui o na mea wawae eha a

pau. Ina e ku kekahi kanaka maluna o ke poo o

kekahi, alaila, like ko laua kiekie me ko ka

Elepani. Ewalu kapuai ke kiekie o kekahi, a he

umikumamalima ko kekahi.

2. Aole i like ke ano o ka Elepani me ko kekahi

ilio e. Ua kiekie kona kua, a ua kuapuu; aole hoi i

like me ke Kamelo. Ua nui loa kona kino; ua

pokole kona ai, a ua nui hoi; ua palahalaha kona

mau pepeiao aole nae i ku iluna, ua pili no i ke

poo; ua uuku loa kona mau maka, e like paha me

No ka ‘Elepani

‘Oiai ua noho ka‘awale loa ka po‘e o Hawai‘i nei i waenakonu o ka Moana Päkïpika, ‘a‘ole i nui ka ‘ike o

ko ‘one‘i i nä holoholona o nä ‘äina ‘ë. ‘O “No Ka ‘Elepani” ka mua loa o ka püka‘ina ‘atikala no ka po‘e

Hawai‘i i pili i nä holoholona ‘ë.

70 71

nä nüpepa o ka makahiki 1834, mähele 1 7 37 2 ka ho‘oilina: journal of hawaiian language sources ● march 2002

legs are huge, long and toed, having five toes

which, however, are short. His nose is quite

peculiar, being as long as a tree branch, and

reaches down to the ground; and on either side

of his nose is a large tooth which are referred to

as elephant tusks.

3. Some Elephants are very white; however, they

are not plentiful and most Elephants are gray.

His skin is thick and rough, and his hair is

sparse.

4. It is in the jungles of India that they roam,

and also in Africa.

5. Leaves and branches, as well as roots, are his

main diet. He also eats grasses, rice, wheat and

other fruits and grains.

6. Elephants may be domesticated quite easily.

Were we to domesticate other animals, we would

need to do so while they were very young; the

Elephant, however, is able to be tamed at any

time, whether he is very young, has matured, or

reached old age; he is also able to learn very

quickly and is obedient to his master’s voice.

7. Elephants do not care for solitude but prefer

the company of others with which to live and

travel. Therefore, should an Elephant be seen in

the forest, a hunter will know that others are

nearby because Elephants always travel together,

sometimes numbering a hundred in a single

place.

8. The lifespan of an Elephant is long while that

of a man is short. It is said that the lifespan of

some reach a hundred and fifty years. While

those living that long are quite rare, many have

lived up to a hundred and twenty years.

9. An elephant performs a lot with his nose,

whereas what we do with our hands is very little.

me ko ke kao; ua nui loa kona mau wäwae, a ua

lö‘ihi, a ua manamana ho‘i, ‘elima nö mana, ua

pökole na‘e. He ‘ano ‘ë wale nö kona ihu, ua lö‘ihi

loa me he lä‘au lä, a hiki loa ka nuku i lalo i ka

lepo; a ma këlä ‘ao‘ao, këia ‘ao‘ao o ka ihu, he niho

nui loa, ‘o ia ka mea i ‘ölelo ‘ia he niho ‘elepani.

3. Ua ke‘oke‘o loa kekahi ‘Elepani ‘a‘ole na‘e i

nui nä ‘Elepani ke‘oke‘o, he ‘ähinahina wale nö

ka nui. Ua mänoanoa kona ‘ili, a ua pu‘upu‘u, a

ua huluhulu iki.

4. Aia ma nä ulu lä‘au o ‘Ïnia kahi e holoholo ai,

a ma ‘Aferika nö ho‘i kekahi.

5. ‘O nä lau lä‘au a me nä lälä lä‘au, a me nä a‘a

käna mea ‘ai nui. E ‘ai nö ho‘i ia i ka mau‘u a me

ka laiki, a me ka huapalaoa, i ia hua aku, i ia hua

aku.

6. E hikiwawe loa ke ho‘olaka i ka ‘Elepani. Inä

e mana‘o käkou e ho‘olaka i nä holoholona ‘ë, a

laka loa, e pono nö ke hana i ka wä ‘u‘uku; akä,

e hiki nö ke ho‘olaka i ka ‘Elepani i nä manawa

a pau: i ka wä ‘u‘uku, a i ka wä nui, a i ka wä

‘elemakule nö; a e hiki nö ke a‘o koke aku iä ia,

a ho‘olohe mai nö ia i ka leo o ke kahu.

7. ‘A‘ole makemake ka ‘Elepani i ka mehameha.

Inä i nui läkou, ka po‘e i noho pü, a hele pü, ‘o

ko läkou mea ‘olu‘olu ia. No laila, inä i ‘ike ‘ia

kekahi ‘Elepani ma ka ulu lä‘au, ua maopopo i ka

po‘e ‘imi, ua nui nö nä ‘Elepani kokoke mai, no

ka mea, e hele pü wale nö läkou, i kekahi manawa

he haneli nö läkou ma kahi ho‘okahi.

8. He lö‘ihi ke ola ‘ana o ka ‘Elepani, he pökole

ko ke kanaka. Ua ‘ölelo ‘ia, he haneli makahiki a

me kanalima ke ola ‘ana o kekahi. He käka‘ikahi

paha nä mea i ola lö‘ihi pëlä; ua nui nä mea i hiki

i ka haneli a me ka iwakälua o ka makahiki.

9. Ua nui kä ka ‘Elepani lawelawe ‘ana me kona

ihu, ua ‘u‘uku kä käkou lawelawe ‘ana me nä

ko ke kao: ua nui loa kona mau wawae, a ua

loihi, a ua manamana hoi, elima no mana, ua

pokole nae. He ano e wale no kona ihu, ua loihi

loa me he laau la, a hiki loa ka nuku ilalo i ka

lepo; a ma kela aoao, keia aoao o ka ihu, he niho

nui loa, oia ka mea i oleloia he niho elepani.

3. Ua keokeo loa kekahi Elepani aole nae i nui na

Elepani keokeo he ahinahina wale no ka nui. Ua

manoanoa kona ili, a ua puupuu, a ua huluhulu

iki.

4. Aia ma na ululaau o Inia kahi e holoholo ai, a

ma Aferika no hoi kekahi.

5. O na lau laau a me na lala laau, a me na aa

kana mea ai nui. E ai no hoi ia i ka mauu a me ka

raiki, a me ka huapalaoa ia hua aku ia hua aku.

6. E hiki wawe loa ke hoolaka i ka Elepani. Ina e

manao kakou e hoolaka i na holoholona e, a laka

loa, e pono no ke hana i ka wa uuku: aka, e hiki

no ke hoolaka i ka Elepani i na manawa a pau i

ka wa uuku, a i ka wa nui, a i ka wa elemakule

no: a e hiki no ke ao koke aku ia ia, a hoolohe

mai no ia i ka leo o ke kahu.

7. Aole makemake ka Elepani i ka mehameha.

Ina i nui lakou, ka poe i noho pu, a hele pu, o ko

lakou mea oluolu ia. Nolaila, ina i ikeia kekahi

Elepani ma ka ululaau, ua maopopo i ka poe imi,

ua nui no na Elepani kokoke mai, no ka mea, e

helepu wale no lakou, i kekahi manawa he haneri

no lakou ma kahi hookahi.

8. He loihi ke ola ana o ka Elepani, he pokole ko

ke kanaka. Ua oleloia, he haneri makahiki a me

kanalima ke ola ana o kekahi. He kakaikahi paha

na mea i ola loihi pela; ua nui na mea i hiki i ka

haneri a me ka iwakalua o ka makahiki.

9. Ua nui ka ka Elepani lawelawe ana, me kona

ihu, ua uuku ka kakou lawelawe ana me na lima.

nä nüpepa o ka makahiki 1834, mähele 1 7 57 4 ka ho‘oilina: journal of hawaiian language sources ● march 2002

With his nose he will gather his food and feed

himself; and when full, his nose is the water

gourd that quenches his thirst. 1 It is also a sword

that is able to deliver terrific blows. And through

it he will breathe and smell.

10. An Elephant knows quickly the difference

between a sweet smell and a stink, and he is very

adept at grasping objects. If twenty men were

gathered together, and one had an apple in his

pocket, he would smell it out immediately and,

feeling around, would find it without fail.

Because of his dexterity, he can pick up a pin, a

sewing needle, even a dime.

11. Were he to do battle with other animals, they

would all be killed by his great tusks.

12. With them he is able to throw into the air

and tear to shreds a cow, a Lion, or a Tiger.

Nothing will survive once pierced by his tusks.

13. If a man treats an elephant well, he will be

remarkably tame and gentle. Plants are his only

food, so he will never kill another animal for

food. He has great affection for those who are

dear to him and will care for them if wounded or

dying.

14. But he will also bear a grudge, and will never

fail to punish a wrong: he will never forget but

will always remember.

15. In India and Africa, the Elephant is consid-

ered to be of great value. He can do anything

once properly trained. It is he who drags the tim-

ber for ships or houses; and he is able to carry

great weights and carry them long distances; he

will also demolish old houses if commanded; he

will help men unload cargo from a ship, and will

drag a newly made boat to shore. He will perform

any task once trained well.

kolamu (column) 2

1. Ua ho‘ololi ‘ia ‘o “laau” ‘o ia ‘o “lälau.”

“Laau” was changed to “lälau.”

2. Ua ho‘ololi ‘ia ‘o “p ne” ‘o ia ‘o “pine.”

“P ne” was changed to “pine.”

3. Ua ho‘ololi ‘ia ‘o “ma” ‘o ia ‘o “me.”

“Ma” was changed to “me.”

kolamu (column) 3

1. ‘O ia ho‘i, he kohu hue wai ka ihu o ka ‘elepani.

That is to say, the elephant’s trunk can be used to

carry water.

lima. Me ia nö ia i hö‘ili‘ili ai i käna ‘ai, a

ho‘okomo nö i loko o ka waha; a ‘o ia ho‘i kona

hue wai a piha, ninini ihola nö i loko o kona

pu‘u. ‘O ia ho‘i kona pahi kaua, a hiki iä ia ke

hahau ikaika loa. Ma laila nö kona hanu ‘ana, a

me kona honi ‘ana.

10. E hikiwawe loa kä ka ‘Elepani honi ‘ana i ke

‘ala a me ka pilau, a ua akamai loa i ka hähä. Inä

paha he iwakälua kanaka, a he ‘öhi‘a ko kekahi

ma loko o kona ‘eke, honi koke nö ia, a ki‘i aku e

hähä, a loa‘a nö, ‘a‘ole nalo. No kona akamai i ka

hähä ‘ana, hiki nö iä ia ke lälau1 i ka pine2 a me

ke kui kele a me ka hapa‘umi, a lawelawe nö.

11. Inä hakakä ‘o ia me kekahi holoholona, e

make nö nä holoholona a pau i kona mau niho

nui ke kü.

12. Me ia nö, e hiki iä ia ke ho‘olei i luna, a welu

li‘ili‘i ka pipi a me 3 ka Liona a me ka Tika. ‘A‘ole

mea ola iä ia, ke kü ‘ia i kona mau niho.

13. Inä hana maika‘i ke kanaka i ka ‘Elepani, he

mea ‘ë kona laka, a me kona lokomaika‘i. ‘O nä

mea ulu wale nö käna mea ‘ai, no laila, ‘a‘ole loa ia

i luku aku i nä holoholona i mea ‘ai näna. Ua nui

loa kona aloha i kona po‘e makamaka, a e mälama

nö ia iä läkou ma loko o ka ‘eha a me ka make.

14. A e ho‘omauhala nö kekahi, ‘a‘ole loa e ‘ole

kona ho‘opa‘i ‘ana i ka hewa; ‘a‘ole e poina, e

mana‘o mau nö.

15. Ma ‘Ïnia, a ma ‘Aferika, he waiwai maika‘i

loa ka ‘Elepani. E hiki nö iä ia nä hana a pau ke

a‘o pono ‘ia. Näna nö i kauö ka lä‘au no nä

moku, a no nä hale; e hiki iä ia ke amo i nä mea

kaumaha loa a lawe i kahi lö‘ihi; e wäwahi nö ia i

ka hale kahiko, ke kauoha ‘ia; e kökua nö ho‘i ma

muli o ke kanaka i ka hemo ‘ana o ka ukana o nä

moku, a e kauö i ka moku hou i kai, a hana nö i

ia mea aku, i ia mea aku, ke a‘o pono ‘ia.

Me ia no ia i hoiliili ai i kana ai, a hookomo no

iloko o ka waha; a oia hoi kona huewai a piha,

ninini iho la no iloko o kona puu. Oia hoi kona

pahikaua, a hiki ia ia ke hahau ikaika loa. Malaila

no kona hanu ana, a me kona honi ana.

10. E hiki wawe loa ka ka Elepani honi ana i ke

ala a me ka pilau, a ua akamai loa i ka haha. Ina

paha he iwakalua kanaka, a he ohia ko ke kahi

maloko o kona eke, honi koke no ia, a kii aku e

haha, a loaa no, aole nalo. No kona akamai i ka

haha ana, hiki no ia ia ke laau i ka p ne, a me ke

kuikele a me ka hapaumi, a lawelawe no.

11. Ina hakaka oia me kekahi holoholona, e

make no na holoholona a pau i kona mau niho

nui ke ku.

12. Me ia no e hiki ia ia ke hoolei iluna, a welu

liilii ka bipi a ma ka Liona a me ka Tiga. Aole

mea ola ia ia, ke kuia i kona mau niho.

13. Ina hana maikai ke kanaka i ka Elepani, he

mea e kona laka, a me kona lokomaikai. O na

mea ulu wale no kana mea ai, nolaila, aole loa ia

i luku aku i na holoholona i mea ai nana. Ua nui

loa kona aloha i kona poe makamaka, a e malama

no ia ia lakou maloko o ka eha a me ka make.

14. A e hoomauhala no kekahi, aole loa e ole

kona hoopai ana i ka hewa: aole e poina e manao

mau no.

15. Ma Inia, a me Aferika, he waiwai maikai loa

ka Elepani. E hiki no ia ia na hana a pau ke ao

pono ia. Nana no i kauo ka laau no na moku, a

no na hale; e hiki ia ia ke amo i na mea kaumaha

loa a lawe i kahi loihi; e wawahi no ia i ka hale

kahiko, ke kauohaia; e kokua no hoi mamuli o ke

kanaka i ka hemo ana o ka ukana o na moku, a e

kauo i ka moku hou i kai, a hana no ia mea aku,

ia mea aku ke ao pono ia.

kolamu (column) 2

1. Ua ho‘ololi ‘ia ‘o “ka” ‘o ia ‘o “ke.”

“Ka” was changed to “ke.”

1. Lahaina Luna February 15, 1834.

ABOUT THE COLLEGE.

Presently there are 76 students. They are separat-

ed into six classes. For Land Surveying and

Arithmetic there is one class; for Zoology and

Arithmetic there is another; there are three class-

es just for Arithmetic, and there is one class for

Maps that has just split into two smaller classes.

2. These days, some people are strong in their

own endeavors, such as house building. Some

build traditional houses and others use brick so

that their houses are better. The strength of oth-

ers may lie in education; yet others aren’t sure if

they enjoy learning, which may be because they

are lazy and do not know what takes place at

school every day.

3. Waimea, Kaua‘i, January 20, 1834. Mr.

Whitney has written to us: “Our previous schools

were not as good as those we have now. During

these past four months 396 students have

learned to read. And some of them are research-

ing matters of the spirit.”

4. Take heed, teachers here on Maui. How are

our schools? Let us look at this and follow their

example.

About the College

This is a brief progress report on the College at Lahaina Luna, its students and classes. In its status as

leader in the field of education, this article also shows the College’s relations with the other schools of

the island chain. This article actually combines three short pieces under the one title.

1. Lahaina Luna, Pepeluali 15, 1834.

NO KE KULANUI.

I këia manawa he 76 haumäna. Ua ka‘awale läkou

i ‘eono mau papa. Ma ke1 Ana ‘Äina a me ka

Helu, ho‘okahi papa; ma ka Palapala holoholona a

me ka Helu, ho‘okahi papa; ma ka Helu wale nö,

‘ekolu papa; a ma ka Palapala honua, ho‘okahi,

a ua mähele iho nei ia i ‘elua papa li‘ili‘i iho.

2. I këia mau lä, ua ikaika kekahi po‘e ma kä

läkou hana iho, ma ke kükulu hale, he hale maoli

kä kahi a he hale pöhaku lepo kahi, a i mea ho‘i e

maika‘i ai ka hale; ua ikaika ho‘i kekahi po‘e ma

ke a‘o; ‘a‘ole maopopo ka makemake o kekahi

po‘e i ke a‘o, no ka palaualelo a me ka ‘ike ‘ole i

nä mea o ke kula i këlä lä i këia lä.

3. Waimea, Kaua‘i. Ianuali 20, 1834. Palapala

mai ‘o Mr. Wine, penei: “‘A‘ole maika‘i ko

mäkou po‘e kula ma mua e like me këia manawa.

I këia mau malama ‘ehä i hala aku nei, ua a‘o ‘ia

a i 396 haumäna i ka heluhelu. A ke ‘imi nei nö

kekahi po‘e i ka pono nui no ka ‘uhane.”

4. ‘Auhea ‘oukou e nä kumu o Maui nei; Pehea

ko käkou po‘e kula? E nänä mai i këia, a e

ho‘omähu‘i käkou.

1. Lahainaluna Feb. 15. 1834.

NO KE KULANUI.

I keia manawa he 76 haumana. Ua kaawale lakou

i eono mau papa. Ma ka Anaaina a me ka Helu,

hookahi papa; ma ka Palapala holoholona a me

ka Helu, hookahi papa; ma ka Helu wale no ekolu

papa; a ma ka Palapala honua hookahi, a ua

mahele iho nei ia i elua papa liilii iho.

2. I keia mau la, ua ikaika kekahi poe ma ka

lakou hana iho, ma ke kukulu hale, he hale maoli

ka kahi a he hale pohaku lepo kahi, a i mea hoi e

maikai ai ka hale; ua ikaika hoi kekahi poe ma ke

ao; aole maopopo ka makemake o kekahi poe i

ke ao, no ka palaualelo a me ka ike ole i na mea o

ke kula i kela la i keia la.

3. Waimea, Kauai. Ian 20, 1834. Palapala mai

o Mr. Wine penei: “Aole maikai ko makou poe

kula mamua e like me keia manawa. I keia mau

malama eha i hala aku nei, ua aoia a i 396

haumana i ka heluhelu. A ke imi nei no kekahi

poe i ka pono nui no ka uhane.”

4. Auhea oukou e na kumu o Maui nei; Pehea ko

kakou poe kula? E nana mai i keia, a e hoomahui

kakou.

No ke Kulanui

He hö‘ike pökole këia no ka holomua o ke Kulanui ma Lahaina Luna, no kona mau haumäna a me nä

papa, a no kona pili ho‘i i nä kula ‘ë a‘e o ka pae ‘äina, ‘oiai he alaka‘i ke Kulanui i ka ho‘ona‘auao. He

huina këia o ‘ekolu palapala pökole.

76 77

nä nüpepa o ka makahiki 1834, mähele 11 7 97 8 ka ho‘oilina: journal of hawaiian language sources ● march 2002

5. O‘ahu, Honolulu, February 6, 1834. Mr. Clarke

writes, “I do not feel right, because you have not

shared your opinions with the schools. We are

moving backwards here on this island. What we

need is a new way of doing things.”

5. O‘ahu, Honolulu Pepeluali 6, 1834. Penei ka

palapala ‘ana a Mr. Kalaka. “Pono ‘ole ko‘u

na‘au, no ka mea, ‘a‘ole ‘oe i ho‘äkäka mai i kou

mana‘o i nä kula. Ke ho‘i hope nei mäkou ma

këia mokupuni. ‘O kekahi ‘ano hou ma ka hana,

ka pono.”

5. Oahu, Honolulu Feb. 6, 1834. Penei ka

palapala ana a Mr. Kalaka. “Pono ole ko’u naau,

no ka mea, aole oe i hoakaka mai i kou manao i

na kula. Ke hoi hope nei makou ma keia moku

puni. O kekahi ano hou ma ka hana, ka pono.”

1. A portion of the Song for the death

of Ke‘eaumoku, the Ali‘i of

Maui.

Cry, cry, my Ali‘i has died,

My lord and my companion has died,

My companion in time of famine,

My companion through whom the land was secure,

My companion in my poverty,

My companion in the rain and wind,

My companion in the heat of the sun,

My companion in the cold of the mountains,

My companion in the storm,

My companion in the calm,

My companion of the eight seas,

Cry, cry, my companion has passed,

Never to return.

A Portion of the Song for the Death of Ke‘eaumoku,

the Ruler of Maui

Poems of lamentation were of great importance from ancient times to the arrival of the printing press,

up until the present. They became a usual feature in the various newspapers. This song of lamentation

in honor of the ruler Ke‘eaumoku is the very first circulated throughout the islands by newsprint.

1. He hapa o ke Mele no ka make

‘ana o Ke‘eaumoku, o ke Ali‘i o

Maui.

Uë, uë, ua make ku‘u Ali‘i,

Ua make ku‘u haku a ku‘u hoa,

Ku‘u hoa i ka wä o ka wï,

Ku‘u hoa i pa‘a ka ‘äina,

Ku‘u hoa i ku‘u ‘ilihune,

Ku‘u hoa i ka ua a ka makani,

Ku‘u hoa i ka wela o ka lä,

Ku‘u hoa i ke anu o ka mauna,

Ku‘u hoa i ka ‘ino,

Ku‘u hoa i ka mälie,

Ku‘u hoa i nä kai ‘ewalu,

Uë, uë, ua hala ku‘u hoa,

‘A‘ole e ho‘i hou mai.

1. He hapa o ke Mele no ka make

ana o Keeaumoku o ke Alii o

Maui.

Ue, ue, ua make kuu Alii,

Ua make kuu haku a kuu hoa,

Kuu hoa i ka wa o ka wi,

Kuu hoa i paa ka aina,

Kuu hoa i kuu ilihune,

Kuu hoa i ka ua a ka makani,

Kuu hoa i ka wela o ka la,

Kuu hoa i ke anu o ka mauna,

Kuu hoa i ka ino,

Kuu hoa i ka malie,

Kuu hoa i na kai ewalu,

Ue, ue, ua hala kuu hoa,

Aole e hoi hou mai.

He Hapa o ke Mele no ka Make ‘Ana o Ke‘eaumoku,

o ke Ali‘i o Maui

He mea nui ke mele kanikau mai ka wä kala kahiko a hiki loa mai i ka wä i puka mai ai ka nüpepa, a hiki

ho‘i i këia wä nei. Ua lilo ia he mea i ‘ike nui ‘ia ma nä nüpepa like ‘ole. ‘O këia mele kanikau no

Ke‘eaumoku, ‘o ia ka mua loa i ho‘olaha ‘ia ma ka nüpepa.

80 81

kolamu (column) 2

1. Ua ho‘ololi ‘ia ‘o “ma” ‘o ia ‘o “me.”

“Ma” was changed to “me.”

2. Ua ho‘ololi ‘ia ‘o “holohona” ‘o ia ‘o “holoholona.”

“Holohona” was changed to “holoholona.”

kolamu (column) 3

1. ‘O këia kekahi unuhi ‘ana, “wolves being among

these.”

An alternative translation is, “wolves being among

these.”

1. ON THE BENEFITS OF GEOGRAPHY

These are its benefits. It has shown the nature of

the earth,of its being round, of its size and con-

tinuous turning, and of the things upon it.

2. In its teachings, it speaks of the two large land

areas, the Continent to the east, and the

Continent to the west, and their being situated

on different sides of the globe, of their locations

and proximities to the north pole. Thus, there is

a lot of ice and it is best not to sail, nor even

walk, there.

3. It speaks of their natures, of their size and

length, of their areas wide and narrow, of the

isthmus and of the strait, of the bays and capes

of their lands, of their rivers and lakes, length

and width. It has told me that this ocean from

Hawai‘i to Kaua‘i is but small and that there are

lakes that are larger. It has also told of the moun-

tains, of where they are and how they lay, of their

length, height and names.

4. It tells us of the animals suited to live in the

arctic zone; their bodies are small; the animals of

the northern temperate zone have larger bodies,

while some are small, and some are fierce.1

5. However, in the tropical zones, the bodies of

the animals are very large, and they are truly

ferocious. There are many crawling things whose

poisonous bites kill man quickly. The bites of

On the Benefits of Geography

Geography was nearly as fascinating an area of study to Hawaiian students as the study of Christianity.

Their ancient love of land grew immensely with their new understanding of the physical world beyond

the horizons.

1. NO KA PONO O KA HÖ‘IKEHONUA

Eia kona pono. Ua hö‘ike maila ia i ke ‘ano o ka

honua, ‘o kona poepoe ‘ana, a me kona nui a me

kona ka‘a mau ‘ana, a me nä mea ma luna iho.

2. Ma ka ‘ölelo honua, ua ha‘i maila ia i nä ‘äina

nui ‘elua, ‘o ka ‘Äina puni ‘ole hikina a me1 ka

‘Äina puni ‘ole komohana, a me kä läua kau ‘ana

ma ka ‘ao‘ao o ka poepoe honua, i ko läua wahi a

me ka pili ‘ana aku i ka wëlau ‘äkau. No laila, ua

nui loa ka hau, ‘a‘ole pono ke holo, ‘a‘ole ho‘i ke

hele aku.

3. Ua ha‘i maila ia i ko läua ‘ano, i ka nui a me

ka loa, i ka laulä a me kahi häiki i ko läua pü‘ali,

a me nä köä, i nä kaikü‘ono a me nä lae i ko

läkou wahi, i nä muliwai a me nä moana wai, i

ko läkou loa a me ko läkou nui. Ha‘i maila ia he

‘u‘uku këia moana mai Hawai‘i a Kaua‘i, ua nui

aku ua moana wai lä. Ha‘i maila nö ho‘i ia i nä

kuahiwi, i ko läkou wahi a me ko läkou moe ‘ana,

i ka loa a me ko läkou ki‘eki‘e a me ko läkou mau

inoa.

4. Ha‘i maila ia i nä holoholona pono ke noho

ma ke kä‘ei anu ‘äkau; ua li‘ili‘i nä kino; i ka po‘e

holoholona2 i ke kä‘ei ‘olu‘olu ‘äkau, ua nui nä

kino, ua li‘ili‘i nö ho‘i kekahi, he ‘ïlio hae kekahi.

5. Akä, ma ke kä‘ei wela ua nui loa nä kino o nä

holoholona, ua hae loa. He nui nä mea kolo e

make ai ke kanaka ke pä mai ko läkou mau niho

me ka ‘awahia nui a make koke. ‘O nä mea li‘ili‘i

1. NO KA PONO O KA HOIKEHONUA

Eia kona pono. Ua hoike mai la ia i ke ano o ka

honua, o kona poepoe ana, a me kona nui a me

kona kaa mau ana, a me na mea maluna iho.

2. Ma ka olelo honua, ua hai mai la ia i na aina

nui elua, o ka Aina puniole hikina a ma ka Aina

puniole komohana, a me ka laua kau ana ma ka

aoao o ka poepoe honua, i ko laua wahi a me ka

pili ana aku i ka welau akau. Nolaila, ua nui loa

ka hau, aole pono ke holo, aole hoi ke hele aku.

3. Ua hai mai la ia i ko laua ano, i ka nui a me ka

loa, i ka laula a me kahi haiki i ko laua puali, a

me na kowa, i na kaikuono a me na lae i ko lakou

wahi, i na muliwai a me na moanawai, i ko lakou

loa a me ko lakou nui. Hai mai la ia he uuku keia

moana mai Hawaii a Kauai, ua nui aku ua

moanawai la. Hai mai no hoi ia i na kuahiwi, i ko

lakou wahi a me ko lakou moe ana, i ka loa a me

ko lakou kiekie a me ko lakou mau inoa.

4. Hai mai la ia i na holoholona pono ke noho

ma ke kaei anu akau; ua liilii na kino; i ka poe

holohona i ke kaei oluolu akau, ua nui na kino,

ua liilii no hoi kekahi, he iliohae kekahi.

5. Aka, ma ke kaei wela ua nui loa na kino o na

holoholona, ua hae loa. He nui na mea kolo e

make ai ke kanaka ke pa mai ko lakou niho me

ka awahia nui a make koke. O na mea liilii e hele

No ka Pono o ka Hö‘ikehonua

I ka wä ma mua, ua ‘ane like ko ka haumäna Hawai‘i hoihoi i ka hö‘ikehonua me kona hoihoi ‘euanelio

Kalikiano. Ua mähuahua a‘ela ke aloha ‘äina ma muli o ka ‘ike ‘ana i nä mea hou ma ‘ö aku o nä

Kükuluokahiki.

82 83

nä nüpepa o ka makahiki 1834, mähele 1 8 58 4 ka ho‘oilina: journal of hawaiian language sources ● march 2002

kolamu (column) 2

3. Ua ho‘ololi ‘ia ‘o “m u” ‘o ia ‘o “mau.”

“M u” was changed to “mau.”

4. Ua ho‘ololi ‘ia ‘o “me” ‘o ia ‘o “mea.”

“Me” was changed to “mea.”

these little creatures that go about the tropical

zone cause terrible pain. It is only in this zone that

they live, since colder climates would cause them

death. These are the valuable things it tells me.

6. In the study of maps, I am told of all the coun-

tries of the world, their sizes, length and width,

how small they might be and where they are

found, their names and their qualities, areas both

inhabited and uninhabited, their cities and

economies, of their enlightenment and of their

ignorance, their education and their lack thereof,

their competence and incompetence, their

strengths and weaknesses, their virtues and their

vices, their types of food and lifestyles, whether

they are clothed or not, or if their clothes are

coarse or tattered, of how mankind is divided,

some being black, some red and some white.

7. Some people are wild like beasts and live high

in the mountains. It tells me of the society of

men, of what they do and also how they think. In

the temperate zones they are white, and intelli-

gent, they know how to work, are literate, wise

and have everything the body needs.

8. In the study of maps, I am told of the people

of the tropical zones, they are black, and yet

some of them are not too dark. The people are

ignorant because they do not know of God. They

are illiterate. They worship things that they see

with their own eyes. How wrong they are! It tells

of all the foods that they eat, which other people

would find unacceptable to eat, certain people of

the tropical zones, indeed, do eat. How they

think of their bodies is even more peculiar since

they tend to do harm unto themselves. This, too,

is a benefit of Geography.

e hele ana ma ke kä‘ei wela, ua ‘eha loa ko läkou

niho ke nahu mai; ma këia kä‘ei wale nö läkou e

noho ai, ‘a‘ole pono ma kahi anu o make läkou.

‘O ia ka pono äna i ha‘i mai ai.

6. Ma ka palapala honua, ua ha‘i maila ia i nä

aupuni a pau ma ka honua nei, i ko läkou nui a me

ka loa a me ka laulä, i ko läkou li‘ili‘i a me ko läkou

wahi, i ko läkou mau3 inoa a me ko läkou mau

‘ano, i kahi kanaka a me kahi kanaka ‘ole, i ko

läkou külanahale a me ko läkou pono, i ko läkou

na‘auao a me ko läkou na‘aupö, i ko läkou ‘ike a

me ko läkou ‘ike ‘ole, i ko läkou akamai a me ka

häwäwä, i ko läkou ikaika a me ka näwaliwali, i nä

m e a4 maika‘i a me nä mea ‘ino‘ino, i kä läkou mea

‘ai a me ka noho ‘ana, i ko läkou mau kapa a me

ke kapa ‘ole, i ka uaua a me ka nähaehae, i ke ‘ano

o nä känaka i ko läkou ka‘awale ‘ana, ua ‘ele‘ele

kekahi, ua ‘ula‘ula, ua ke‘oke‘o.

7. Ua hihiu loa kekahi po‘e e like me nä

holoholona, ua noho ma uka lilo. Ha‘i maila ia i

ka noho ‘ana o nä känaka, i kä läkou mea e hana

ai a e mana‘o ai ho‘i. Ma ke kä‘ei ‘olu‘olu, ua

ke‘oke‘o, a ua akamai, ua ‘ike i nä hana, ua ‘ike i

ka palapala, ua na‘auao, ua loa‘a iä läkou këlä

mea këia mea e pono ai ke kino.

8. Ma ka palapala honua, ha‘i maila ia i ka po‘e

ma lalo iho o ke kä‘ei wela, ua ‘ele‘ele läkou, he

hapa ka ‘ele‘ele o kekahi. Ua na‘aupö nä känaka

no ka ‘ike ‘ole i ke Akua. ‘A‘ole a läkou palapala.

Ho‘omana läkou i nä mea i ‘ike maka ‘ia. Nui ko

läkou hewa. Ha‘i maila ia i nä mea a pau a läkou

e ‘ai ai, ‘o ka mea hiki ‘ole i kahi po‘e ke ‘ai, ua

pono ia i kekahi po‘e o ua kä‘ei wela lä. Ua ‘oi

aku ho‘i ka ‘äpiki o kä läkou mea i mana‘o nui ai

‘oke kino, ‘o kä läkou ho‘i ia e hana ‘ino ai. ‘O ia

kekahi pono o ka Hö‘ikehonua.

ana ma ke kaei wela, ua eha loa ko lakou niho ke

nahu mai; ma keia kaei wale no lakou e noho ai,

aole pono ma kahi anu o make lakou. Oia ka

pono ana i hai mai ai.

6. Ma ka palapala honua, ua hai mai la ia i na

aupuni a pau ma ka honua nei, i ko lakou nui a

me ka loa a me ka laula, i ko lakou liilii a me ko

lakou wahi, i ko lakou m u inoa a me ko lakou

mau ano, i kahi kanaka a me kahi kanaka ole, i

ko lakou kulanahale a me ko lakou pono, i ko

lakou naauao a me ko lakou naaupo, i ko lakou

ike a me ko lakou ike ole, i ko lakou akamai a me

ka hawawa, i ko lakou ikaika a me ka nawaliwali,

i na me maikai a me na mea inoino, i ka lakou

mea ai a me ka noho ana, i ko lakou mau kapa a

me ke kapa ole, i ka uaua a me ka nahaehae, i ke

ano o na kanaka i ko lakou kaawale ana, ua eleele

kekahi, ua ulaula, ua keokeo.

7. Ua hihiu loa kekahi poe e like me na holo-

holona, ua noho mauka lilo. Hai mai la ia i ka

noho ana o na kanaka, i ka lakou mea e hana’i a

e manao ai hoi. Ma ke kaei oluolu, ua keokeo, a

ua akamai, ua ike i na hana, ua ike i ka palapala,

ua naauao, ua loaa ia lakou kela mea keia mea e

pono ai ke kino.

8. Ma ka palapala honua, hai mai la ia i ka poe

malalo iho o ke kaei wela, ua eleele lakou, he

hapa ka eleele o kekahi. Ua naaupo na kanaka

no ka ike ole i ke Akua. Aole a lakou palapala.

Hoomana lakou i na mea i ike maka ia. Nui ko

lakou he wa. Hai mai la ia i na mea a pau a lakou

e ai ai, o ka mea hiki ole i kahi poe ke ai, ua pono

ia i kekahi poe o ua kaei wela la. Ua oi aku hoi ka

apiki o ka lakou mea i manao nui ai o ke kino, o

ka lakou hoi ia e hana ino ai. Oia kekahi pono o

ka Hoikehonua.

kolamu (column) 2

1. Ua ho‘ololi ‘ia ‘o “ono” ‘o ia ‘o “ona.”

“Ono” was changed to “ona.”

1. Some words of God.

Jehovah is our God, and there is but one Jehovah.

2. Here we are within him, through whom we

live and move.

3. He who has created ears,

would he not listen?

4. He who fashions eyes,

would he not look?

5. O Jehovah, darkness cannot hide you.

6. The night has given forth light as if day,

As if darkness, such is light.

7. God is love, and he who resides in love,

resides within God, and God resides in him.

8. So that you may be perfect, and comfortable,

where your thoughts are one, live in unity: and

God, from whom is love and unity, shall dwell

with you.

9. Fear Jehovah and give him praise.

10. THE WEALTH OF CHRIST. Christ is a great

pearl, and he who finds him shall never be poor;

he who lacks him shall never be wealthy.

Some Words of God

Besides the usual sermons of their teachers, concepts were presented in poetic form so that students

would see the beauty of God. Two short articles are combined into one here.

1. He wahi ‘ölelo a ke Akua.

‘O Iehova ko käkou Akua, ho‘okahi nö Iehova.

2. Eia nö käkou ma loko ona1, ke ola nei käkou a

ke hele ho‘i.

3. ‘O ka mea näna i hana ka pepeiao,

‘a‘ole anei ‘o ia e ho‘olohe mai?

4. ‘O ka mea näna e ho‘oponopono ka maka,

‘a‘ole anei ‘o ia e nänä mai?

5. E Iehova, ‘a‘ole e hiki i ka pouli ke ho‘onalo iä

‘oe.

6. Ua ho‘omälamalama mai ka pö me he ao lä,

Me he pouli lä, pëlä ka mälamalama.

7. He aloha ke Akua, a ‘o ka mea e noho ana i

loko o ke aloha, ke noho nei ‘o ia i loko o ke

Akua, a ‘o ke Akua nö ho‘i i loko ona.

8. I hemolele ‘oukou, i ‘olu‘olu ho‘i, i ho‘okahi

ko ‘oukou mana‘o, e noho ‘oukou me ke ku‘ikahi

a ‘o ke Akua nona ke aloha a me ke ku‘ikahi e

noho pü me ‘oukou.

9. E maka‘u aku iä Iehova a e ho‘onani aku iä ia.

10. KA WAI NA KRISTO. He momi maika‘i ‘o

Kristo, ‘o ka mea loa‘a iä ia, ‘a‘ole loa ‘o ia e

‘ilihune; a ‘o ka mea nele i ia mea, ‘a‘ole loa ‘o ia

1. He wahi olelo a ke Akua.

O Iehova ko kakou Akua, hookahi no Iehova.

2. Eia no kakou maloko ono, ke ola nei kakou a

ke hele hoi.

3. O ka mea nana i hana ka pepeiao,

Aole anei oia e hoolohe mai?

4. O ka mea nana e hooponopono ka maka,

Aole anei oia e nana mai?

5. E Iehova, aole e hiki i ka pouli ke hoonalo ia

oe.

6. Ua hoomalamalama mai ka po me he ao la,

Me he pouli la, pela ka malamalama.

7. He aloha ke Akua, a o ka mea e noho ana iloko

o ke aloha, ke noho nei oia iloko o ke Akua, a o

ke Akua no hoi iloko ona.

8. I hemolele oukou, i oluolu hoi, i hookahi ko

oukou manao, e noho oukou me ke kuikahi: a o

ke Akua nona ke aloha a me ke kuikahi e noho

pu me oukou.

9. E makau aku ia Iehova a e hoonani aku ia ia.

10. KA WAIWAI NA KRISTO. He momi maikai o

Kristo, o ka mea loaa ia ia, aole loa oia e ilihune; a

o ka mea nele ia mea, aole loa oia e waiwai.

He Wahi ‘Ölelo a ke Akua

Ma waho aku o ka ha‘i a‘o ma‘amau a ke kumu, helehelu ‘ia nä mele i ‘ike ho‘i ka haumäna i ka nani o

ke Akua. He huina këia o ‘elua ‘atikala pökole.

86 87

nä nüpepa o ka makahiki 1834, mähele 1 8 98 8 ka ho‘oilina: journal of hawaiian language sources ● march 2002

Numerous, indeed, are the blessings from Jesus

whose number can never be counted: it is good,

beyond compare – it is great, beyond measure.

11. ABOUT ANGER – Anger is a temporary

madness. Love is its cure.

e waiwai. Manomano ka waiwai na Iesü, ‘a‘ole e

pau i ka helu ‘ia; he maika‘i ho‘i, ‘a‘ole mea like;

he nui ho‘i, ‘a‘ole e ana ‘ia mai.

11. NO KA HUHÜ – He hehena pökole ka huhü.

‘O ke aloha ka mea e pau ai.

Manomano ka waiwai na Iesu, aole e pau i ka

helu ia: he maikai hoi, aole mea like: he nui hoi,

aole e ana ia mai.

11. No ka huhu – He hehena pokole ka huhu.

O ke aloha ka mea e pau ai.

kolamu (column) 2

1. Nui nä inoa känaka o këia mo‘olelo. Ua hö‘ano hou ‘ia

e like me ka mana‘o he küpono, ‘a‘ole na‘e i maopopo

loa ka puana o nä inoa a pau.

A great many people’s names appear in this article.

The glottal stop and macron have been added accord-

ing to probable meanings.

1. Ka Leo o ka Lähui

“The Life of the Land is Perpetuated in

Righteousness.”

Volume II. HONOLULU JANUARY 1, 1892.

Number 358

THE HEAD OFFICIALS AND COMMITTEE

MEMBERS OF THE HAWAIIAN NATIONAL

LIBERAL PARTY.

Hon. JOHN E. BUSH President

" J. NÄWAHÏ Vice "

Mr. J. K. PRENDERGAST Secretary

" C. B. MAILE Treasurer.

2. COMMITTEE.

Hon. R. W. WILCOX

Nob. D. W. PUA

Mr. J. K. BIPIKÄNE

" A. SMITH

" GEO. MARKHAM

" D. W. KAHUAKAI

" M. A. PAOA.

The 1892 Newspapers, Part 1

This journal is publishing the Hawaiian newspapers of 1892, due to historical interest. We begin with

page one of Ka Leo o ka Lähui (The Voice of the Nation), published in Honolulu on January 1, 1892. J. E.

Bush was the newspaper’s editor and treasurer. Although the articles’ authors are not identified, it is

possible that J. K. Prendergast, as secretary of the Hui ‘Ao‘ao Lähui Hawai‘i Liberala (Hawaiian National

Liberal Party), may have written the newspaper’s two political articles. As they are incomplete, two other

stories found on page one will be presented in another issue of this journal. Mo‘okini 27; Chapin 53.

The newspaper Ka Leo o ka Lähui (The Voice of the Nation) was closely associated with the Hawaiian

National Liberal Party; both stood out as strong proponents for Hawaiian rights. This list of the Party’s

key leaders, “The Head Officials and Committee Members of the <Hawaiian> National Liberal Party,”

is a roster of leading patriots of the day.

1. Ka Leo o ka Lähui

“‘E Mau ke Ea o ka ‘Äina i ka Pono.”

Puke II. HONOLULU IANUALI1, 1892.

Helu 358

NÄ LUNA NUI A ME NÄ KÖMIKE O

KA HUI ‘AO‘AO LÄHUI <HAWAI‘I>

LIBERALA.

Hon. JNO. E. BUSH Pelekikena

" J. NÄWAHÏ1 Hope "

Mr. J. K. PRENDERGAST Käkau ‘Ölelo

" C. B. MAILE Pu‘ukü.

2. KÖMIKE.

Hon. R. W. WILIKOKI

Nob. D. W. PUA

Mr. J. K. BIPIKÄNE

" A. SMITH

" GEO. MARKHAM

" D. W. KAHUAKAI

" M. A. PAOA.

1. Ka Leo o ka Lahui

“E Mau ke Ea o ka Aina i ka Pono.”

Buke II. HONOLULU IANUARI 1, 1892.

Helu 358

NA LUNA NUI A ME NA KOMITE O

KA HUI AOAO LAHUI LIBERALA.

Hon. JNO. E. BUSH Peresidena

" J. NAWAHI Hope "

Mr. J. K. PRENDERGAST Kakauolelo

" C. B. MAILE Puuku.

2. KOMITE.

Hon. R. W. WILIKOKI

Nob. D. W. PUA

Mr. J. K. BIPIKANE

" A. SMITH

" GEO. MARKHAM

" D. W. KAHUAKAI

" M. A. PAOA.

Nä Nüpepa o ka Makahiki 1892, Mähele 1

E pa‘i ‘ia ana ma ka puke pai nei nä nüpepa Hawai‘i o ka makahiki 1892, ‘oiai he au ko‘iko‘i ia o ka

mö‘aukala o Hawai‘i nei. E ho‘omaka ana me Ka Leo o ka Lähui no Honolulu, ‘ao‘ao mua, ka lä 1 o

Ianuali, 1892. ‘O J. E. Bush ka luna ho‘oponopono a pu‘ukü. ‘A‘ole hö‘ike ‘ia na wai këlä me këia ‘atikala

i käkau. Ua mana‘o ‘ia nö na‘e na J. K. Prendergast, ke käkau ‘ölelo o ka Hui ‘Ao‘ao Lähui Liberala, i

käkau i nä ‘atikala kälai‘äina ‘elua. ‘A‘ole i pa‘i ‘ia ma ‘ane‘i ‘elua mo‘olelo o ka ‘ao‘ao mua o ua nüpepa

nei, ‘oiai ‘a‘ole i pau; e pa‘i ‘ia ana ma kekahi pukana o ka puke pai. Mo‘okini 27; Chapin 53.

Ua pili loa ka nüpepa Ka Leo o ka Lähui me ka Hui ‘Ao‘ao Lähui Hawai‘i Liberala, ‘oiai ua küpa‘a nä

mea ‘elua ma hope o ka pono lähui Hawai‘i. Helu papa ‘ia nä inoa o nä alaka‘i kälai‘äina Hawai‘i o ia au.

90 91

nä nüpepa o ka makahiki 1892, mähele 1 9 39 2 ka ho‘oilina: journal of hawaiian language sources ● march 2002

3. FINANCIAL COMMITTEE.

Mr. J. K. PRENDERGAST

" C. B. MAILE

" J. ALAPA‘I

" J. W. KUALAKU

" SAM. KEKÜKAHIKO.

4. LEGISLATIVE COMMITTEE.

Hon. J. E. BUSH

" J. NÄWAHÏ

" R. W. WILCOX

" W. P. KÄNEALI‘I

Nob. D. W. PUA

Mr. J. ALAPA‘I

" D. M. PÜNINI.

5. REPRESENTATIVE COMMITTEE.

District I.

Hon. J. E. BUSH

Mr. J. W. KAHALEWAI

" D. K. KAMAKAUWILA

6. District II.

Mr. J. W. BIPIKÄNE

" D. K. KAHUAKAI

" J. KAHÄHÄWAI.

7. District III.

Mr. J. K. PRENDERGAST

" SAM. KEKÜKAHIKO

" J. AULD.

8. District IV.

Mr. C. B. MAILE

" G. W. KUALAKU

" R. PALAU

9. District V.

Nob. D. W. PUA

Mr. W. KALAEHAO

" J. B. KANOA.

3. KÖMIKE WAIWAI.

Mr. J. K. PRENDERGAST

" C. B. MAILE

" J. ALAPA‘I

" J. W. KUALAKU

" SAM. KEKÜKAHIKO.

4. KÖMIKE ‘AHA‘ÖLELO.

Hon. J. E. BUSH

" J. NÄWAHÏ

" R. W. WILIKOKI

" W. P. KÄNEALI‘I

Nob. D. W. PUA

Mr. J. ALAPA‘I

" D. M. PÜNINI.

5. KÖMIKE ‘ELELE.

‘Äpana I.

Hon. J. E. BUSH

Mr. J. W. KAHALEWAI

" D. K. KAMAKAUWILA

6. ‘Äpana II.

Mr. J. W. BIPIKÄNE

" D. K. KAHUAKAI

" J. KAHÄHÄWAI.

7. ‘Äpana III.

Mr. J. K. PRENDERGAST

" SAM. KEKÜKAHIKO

" J. AULD.

8. ‘Äpana IV.

Mr. C. B. MAILE

" G. W. KUALAKU

" R. PALAU

9. ‘Äpana V.

Nob. D. W. PUA

Mr. W. KALAEHAO

" J. B. KANOA.

3. KOMITE WAIWAI.

Mr. J. K. PRENDERGAST

" C. B. MAILE

" J. ALAPAI

" J. W. KUALAKU

" SAM. KEKUKAHIKO.

4. KOMITE AHAOLELO.

Hon. J. E. BUSH

" J. NAWAHI

" R. W. WILIKOKI

" W. P. KANEALII

Nob. D. W. PUA

Mr. J. ALAPAI

" D. M. PUNINI.

5. KOMITE ELELE.

Apana I.

Hon. J. E. BUSH

Mr. J. W. KAHALEWAI

" D. K. KAMAKAUWILA

6. Apana II.

Mr. J. W. BIPIKANE

" D. K. KAHUAKAI

" J. KAHAHAWAI.

7. Apana III.

Mr. J. K. PRENDERGAST

" SAM. KEKUKAHIKO

" J. AULD.

8. Apana IV.

Mr. C. B. MAILE

" G. W. KUALAKU

" R. PALAU

9. Apana V.

Nob. D. W. PUA

Mr. W. KALAEHAO

" J. B. KANOA.

1. CONSTITUTION OF THE HAWAIIAN

NATIONAL LIBERAL PARTY.

This Party has been founded to provide a means

by which love of Country and love of Nation may

be fostered. And as a means to retain the inde-

pendence of Hawai‘i. And also to fully establish

governmental reform that treats all people fairly.

2. THE NAME.

Article I – The name of the Organization shall

be Ka ‘Ao‘ao Lähui Hawai‘i Liberala (The

Hawaiian National Liberal Party).

3. THE MEMBERS.

Article II – The Members of this Organization

are all of those who have entered and become

signatories to this Constitution.

4. THE HEAD OFFICERS.

Article III – Following are the Head Officers

of the Organization. A President, Vice President,

Secretary, Treasurer. They will serve in this

capacity for a period of two years from the date

when they were elected; however, if their posi-

tion should become vacant because of death or

leaving office or expulsion for some wrongdoing,

the position shall be filled by someone chosen on

a temporary basis until the full term of two years

has come to an end.

5. THE WORK OF THE HEAD OFFICERS.

Article IV – The President, or his Vice

President perhaps, shall preside over all of the

meetings of the Organization, and he shall also

verify all the decrees that the Organization may

make.

Constitution of the Hawaiian National Liberal Party

The Hawaiian National Liberal Party was the leading political organization for Hawaiian nationalism.

This article lays out its organizational structure.

1. KUMUKÄNÄWAI O KA HUI ‘AO‘AO

LÄHUI HAWAI‘I LIBERALA.

Ua ho‘okumu ‘ia këia Hui i külana no ke kükulu

‘ana i nä mana‘o aloha ‘Äina a aloha Lähui. A i

mea ho‘i e ho‘omau aku ai i ka noho ‘ana

kü‘oko‘a o Hawai‘i nei. A e ho‘opa‘a loa ai ho‘i i

nä ho‘oponopono aupuni kaulike no ka lehulehu.

2. KA INOA.

Paukü I – E kapa ‘ia ka inoa o ka Hui, Ka

‘Ao‘ao Lähui Hawai‘i Liberala.

3. NÄ LÄLÄ.

Paukü II – ‘O nä Lälä o këia Hui, ‘o ia nö ka

po‘e a pau i komo mai a käkau inoa ma lalo o

këia Kumukänäwai.

4. NÄ LUNA NUI.

Paukü III – Eia nä Luna Nui o ka Hui. He

Pelekikena, Hope Pelekikena, Käkau ‘Ölelo,

Pu‘ukü. E noho nö läkou ma ka ‘oihana no ka

manawa ‘elua makahiki mai ko läkou lä i koho ‘ia

ai; eia na‘e, e hakahaka no ka make, a ha‘alele, a

ho‘opau ‘ia paha no kekahi hewa. E pani ‘ia ia

hakahaka e ka mea i koho ‘ia no ka manawa wale

nö i koe e piha ai nä makahiki ‘elua.

5. NÄ HANA A NÄ LUNA NUI.

Paukü IV – Na ka Pelekikena, a i ‘ole ia ‘o kona

hope paha, e noho ho‘omalu i nä häläwai a pau o

ka Hui, a näna nö e hö‘oia i nä kauoha a pau o ka

Hui.

1. KUMUKANAWAI O KA HUI AOAO

LAHUI HAWAII LIBERALA.

Ua hookumuia keia Hui, i kulana no ke kukulu

ana i na manao aloha Aina a aloha Lahui. A i

mea hoi e hoomau aku ai i ka noho ana kuokoa

o Hawaii nei. A e hoopaa loa ai hoi i na

hooponopono aupuni kaulike no ka lehulehu.

2. KA INOA.

Pauku I – E kapaia ka inoa o ka Hui, Ka Aoao

Lahui Hawaii Liberala.

3. NA LALA.

Pauku II – O na Lala o keia Hui, oia no ka poe

a pau i komo mai, a kakau inoa malalo o keia

Kumukanawai.

4. NA LUNA NUI.

Pauku III – Eia na Luna Nui o ka Hui. He

Peresidena, Hope Peresidena, Kakauolelo,

Puuku. E noho no lakou ma ka oihana no ka

manawa, elua makahiki, mai ko lakou la i koho

ia ai; eia nae, e hakahaka no ka make, a haalele,

a hoopau ia paha no kekahi hewa. E paniia ia

hakahaka e ka mea i koho ia no ka manawa wale

no i koe e piha ai na makahiki elua.

5. NA HANA A NA LUNA NUI.

Pauku IV – Na ka Peresidena, a i ole ia o kona

hope paha, e noho hoomalu i na halawai a pau o

ka Hui, a nana no e hooia i na kauoha a pau o ka

Hui.

Kumukänäwai o ka Hui ‘Ao‘ao Lähui Hawai‘i Liberala

‘O ka Hui ‘Ao‘ao Lähui Hawai‘i Liberala ka hui e alaka‘i a paipai nui ana i ke kü‘oko‘a ‘ana o ka lähui

Hawai‘i. He ‘atikala këia e hö‘ike ana i ke kuleana päkahi o ko ka Hui mau kömike.

94 95

nä nüpepa o ka makahiki 1892, mähele 1 9 79 6 ka ho‘oilina: journal of hawaiian language sources ● march 2002

kolamu (column) 2

1. Ua ho‘ololi ‘ia ‘o “ina” ‘o ia ‘o “na.”

“Ina” was changed to “na.”

2. Ua ho‘ololi ‘ia ‘o “Peresipena” ‘o ia ‘o “Pelekikena.”

“Peresipena” was changed to “Pelekikena.”

3. Ua unuhi ‘ia ‘o “or” ‘o “a i ‘ole” ma ke kolamu ‘elua.

“Or” has been translated into Hawaiian for the second

column.

6. The Secretary shall take care of all of the

Books, Papers and minutes of the meetings of the

Organization, and also maintain a balance sheet

of income and expenditures.

7. The Treasurer shall keep track of all of the

monies and assets of the Organization and make

known to the Organization any income and

expenditures, whenever this is called for. He can-

not, however, spend any of the Organization’s

money without the Organization’s agreement

and without approval by the President.

8. EXECUTIVE COMMITTEE BOARD.

Article V – Seven board members will be cho-

sen from the Members of the Organization to be

the Executive Board. And this Board shall seek

out and put before the President any ideas for

the Organization to discuss.

9. STANDING COMMITTEES.

Article VI – From the members of the

Organization there shall be chosen five Members

for the Financial Committee, seven Members for

the Legislative Committee, fifteen Members for

the Representative Committee, twenty-one

Members for the People’s or Intermediary

Committee.

10. A – The Financial Committee shall be

responsible for anything to do with fundraising

and receivables.

11. B – The Legislative Committee shall be

responsible for anything to do with the

Legislature.

12. C – The Representative Committee shall

consider and make known the names of any can-

didates for the National Party for the following

legislative session, subject to confirmation by the

Organization.

6. Na ke Käkau ‘Ölelo e mälama i nä Puke, Pepa

a me nä mo‘olelo o nä häläwai a pau o ka Hui, a

e ho‘opa‘a ho‘i i nä huina kälä i loa‘a mai a i

ho‘olilo ‘ia aku.

7. Na ka Pu‘ukü e mälama i nä kälä a me nä

waiwai a pau o ka Hui a e hö‘ike i nä loa‘a mai a

me nä ho‘olilo ‘ana i mua o ka Hui, i nä manawa

a pau e makemake ‘ia ai. ‘A‘ole na‘e e hiki iä ia ke

ho‘olilo i kekahi kälä o ka Hui me ka ‘ae ‘ole o ka

Hui, a me ka ‘äpono ‘ole ho‘i o ka Pelekikena.

8. PAPA KÖMIKE HO‘OKÖ.

Paukü V – E koho ‘ia ‘ehiku lälä mai loko mai o

nä Hoa o ka Hui i Papa Ho‘okö. A na1 ia Papa e

‘imi a e waiho mai i ka Pelekikena2 i nä

Kumuhana mana‘o ‘ia no ka Hui.

9. KÖMIKE KÜMAU.

Paukü VI – E koho ‘ia mai waena mai o nä lälä

o ka Hui i ‘elima Hoa i Kömike Waiwai, ‘Ehiku

Hoa Kömike ‘Aha‘ölelo, ‘umikumamälima Hoa

Kömike ‘Elele, iwakäluakumamäkahi Hoa

Kömike Lähui a i ‘ole 3 Küwaena.

10. A – Na kekahi Kömike Waiwai e

ho‘oponopono no nä mea pili i ka ‘ohi kälä ‘ana.

11. B – Na ke Kömike ‘Aha‘ölelo e ho‘okö i nä

mea pili i ka ‘Aha‘ölelo.

12. C – Na ke Kömike ‘Elele e no‘ono‘o a hö‘ike

mai i nä inoa o nä po‘e i mana‘o ‘ia i mau moho

päloka no ka ‘Ao‘ao Lähui no ke kau ‘aha‘ölelo e

hiki mai ana, a na ka Hui e ho‘okö loa.

6. Na ke Kakauolelo e malama i na Buke, Pepa a

me na moolelo o na halawai [a] pau o ka Hui, a e

hoopaa hoi i na huina dala i loaa mai a i hoolilo

ia aku.

7. Na ka Puuku e malama i na dala a me na

waiwai a pau o ka Hui a e hoike i na loaa mai a

me na hoolilo ana imua o ka Hui, i na manawa

a pau e makemake ia ai. Aole nae e hiki iaia ke

hoolilo i kekahi dala o ka Hui me ka ae ole o ka

Hui, a me ka apono ole hoi o ka Peresidena.

8. PAPA KOMITE HOOKO.

Pauku V – E koho ia ehiku lala mai loko mai o

na Hoa o ka Hui i Papa Hooko. A ina ia Papa e

imi a e waiho mai i ka Peresipena, i na

Kumuhana manao ia no ka Hui.

9. KOMITE KUMAU.

Pauku VI – E koho ia mai waena mai o na lala

o ka Hui i elima Hoa i Komite Waiwai. Ehiku

Hoa Komite Ahaolelo, umikumamalima Hoa

Komite Elele, iwakalua kumamakahi Hoa Komite

Lahui or Kuwaena.

10. A – Na kekahi Komite Waiwai e

hooponopono no na mea pili i ka ohi dala ana.

11. B – Na ke Komite Ahaolelo e hooko na mea

pili i ka Ahaolelo.

12. C – Na ke Komite Elele, e noonoo a hoike

mai i na inoa o na poe i manao ia i mau moho

balota no ka Aoao Lahui, no ke kau ahaolelo e

hiki mai ana, a na ka Hui e hooko loa.

96 97

nä nüpepa o ka makahiki 1892, mähele 1 9 99 8 ka ho‘oilina: journal of hawaiian language sources ● march 2002

kolamu (column) 2

4. Ua lele ka helu VI ma keia ‘atikala i ka helu VII.

The original article skipped number VII.

5. Ua ho‘ololi ‘ia ‘o “p” ‘o ia ‘o “o.”

“P” was changed to “o.”

13. D – The People’s Committee is also the

Intermediary Committee for all of the Islands.

This Committee shall announce to the general

public the names of all the people who have been

confirmed as candidates for the National Party

within the government. And this Committee

shall inform the Committees from all districts of

the Islands concerning the major events for

which the Organization intends to meet.

14. THE ORGANIZATIONS ON THE ISLANDS.

Article VIII – The current Organizations of

the Hawaiian National Liberal Party, as well as

those that will be formed in Island districts in the

future, which are politically aligned for the bene-

fit of the National Party, these comprise the

Forum Members for this Organization.

15. AMENDMENTS.

Article XI – This Constitution may be amend-

ed, added to, or even struck down entirely, as

decided by the majority of the Members of the

Organization at any meeting that may have been

called to order for that purpose.

13. D – ‘O ke Kömike Lähui, ‘o ia nö ke Kömike

Küwaena i loko o këia Pae ‘Äina holo‘oko‘a. Na ia

Kömike nö e ho‘olaha aku ma ke äkea no nä po‘e

a pau loa i ‘äpono ‘ia no ka holo moho ‘ana i loko

o këia aupuni ma ka ‘Ao‘ao Lähui. A na ia

Kömike nö e polo‘ai aku i nä Kömike o nä ‘äpana

Mokupuni no nä hana ‘ano nui a ka Hui i mana‘o

ai e häläwai.

14. NÄ HUI MA NÄ MOKUPUNI.

Paukü VIII4 – ‘O nä Hui o 5 ka ‘Ao‘ao Lähui

Hawai‘i Liberala e kü nei, a e kükulu ‘ia aku ana

ma këia mua aku ma nä ‘äpana Mokupuni, i kü

like nä mana‘o Kälai‘äina no ka pono o ka ‘Ao‘ao

Lähui, ‘o läkou nö nä ‘Ahahui Lälä no këia Hui.

15. NÄ HO‘OLOLI ‘ANA.

Paukü IX – E hiki nö ke ho‘ololi a päku‘i mai a

ho‘opau loa paha i këia Kumukänäwai ma muli o

ka ho‘oholo ‘ana a ka hapanui o nä Hoa o ka Hui

i hiki mai ma ia häläwai i kähea ‘ia no ia hana.

13. D – O ke Komite Lahui, oia no ke Komite

Kuwaena iloko o keia Pae Aina holookoa. Na ia

Komite no e hoolaha aku ma ke akea, no na poe a

pau loa i apono ia, no ka holo moho ana iloko o

keia aupuni ma ka Aoao Lahui. A na ia Komite

no e poloai aku i na Komite o na apana

Mokupuni no na hana ano nui a ka Hui i manao

ai e halawai.

14. NA HUI MA NA MOKUPUNI.

Pauku VIII – O na Hui p ka Aoao Lahui Hawaii

Liberala e ku nei, a e kukulu ia aku ana ma keia

mua aku ma na apana Mokupuni, i ku like na

manao Kalaiaina no ka pono o ka Aoao Lahui o

lakou no na Aha Hui Lala no keia Hui.

15. NA HOOLOLI ANA.

Pauku IX – E hiki no ke hoololi a pakui mai a

hoopau loa paha i keia Kumukanawai mamuli o

ka hooholo ana a ka hapanui o na Hoa o ka Hui, i

hiki mai ma ia halawai, i kahea ia no ia hana.

kolamu (column) 2

1. Ua komo këia pä‘älua “232 dtl” ma nä hua li‘ili‘i i mea

ho‘omaopopo paha i ke kanaka pa‘i a i kona po‘e

ho‘onohonoho ho‘olaha paha.

This code “232 dtl” appears in small print possibly as

a note of some kind to the printer or the printer’s

advertising staff.

1. Oil for Sale.

2. AVAILABLE AT THE PLACE OF

3. J. F. COLBURN.

4. (KEONI KOLOBANA.)

5. On the corner of Nu‘uanu and King Streets.

6. You’ll get it for the very low price of $2.50 a

box.Come one, come two, come all.

7. Your friend,

8. J. F. COLBURN.

9. Honolulu, July 8, 1891.

10. 232 dtl

Oil for Sale

This is a fairly typical advertisement in the newspaper Ka Leo o ka Lähui (The Voice of the Nation).

1. ‘Aila Kü‘ai.

2. E LOA‘A NÖ MA KAHI O

3. J. F. COLBURN.

4. (KEONI KOLOBANA.)

5. Ma ke Kihi o nä Alanui Nu‘uanu me Mö‘ï.

6. E loa‘a nö no ke kumu kü‘ai ha‘aha‘a loa ‘o

$2.50 o ka pahu. Hele mai ho‘okahi, hele mai

‘elua, hele mai nö a pau.

7. Ko ‘oukou hoa aloha,

8. J. F. COLBURN.

9. Honolulu, Iulai 8, 1891.

10. 232 dtl1

1. Aila Kuai.

2. E LOAA NO MA KAHI O

3. J. F. COLBURN.

4. (KEONI KOLOBANA.)

5. Ma ke Kihi o na Alanui Nuuanu me Moi.

6. E loaa no no ke kumukuai haahaa loa o $2.50

o ka pahu. Hele mai hookahi, hele mai elua, hele

mai no a pau.

7. Ko oukou hoaloha,

8. J. F. COLBURN.

9. Honolulu, Iulai 8, 1891.

10. 232 dtl

‘Aila Kü‘ai

He ho‘olaha kü‘ai ma‘amau këia no ka nüpepa ‘o Ka Leo o ka Lähui mai.

100 101

kolamu (column) 2

1. Ho‘omaka ka mo‘olelo o Kahahana i ka hapalua like o

ka helu 19 o ka mo‘olelo piha o Kamehameha I.

The story of Kahahana begins in the middle of part 19

of the broader story of Kamehameha I.

2. Nui nä inoa känaka o këia mo‘olelo. Ua hö‘ano hou ‘ia

e like me ka mana‘o he küpono, ‘a‘ole na‘e i maopopo

loa ka puana o nä inoa a pau.

A great many people’s names appear in this article.

The glottal stop and macron have been added accord-

ing to probable meanings.

3. ‘O “Kalanikahimäka‘iali‘i” kekahi pela ‘ana.

An alternative spelling could be “Kalanikahimäka‘iali‘i.”

kolamu (column) 3

1. ‘O “Kahahana Loses O‘ahu” ke po‘oinoa ma Ruling

Chiefs, ka puke no laila mai ka nui o këia unuhi.

“Kahahana Loses O‘ahu” is the title in Ruling Chiefs,

the book on which this English translation is based.

1. <THE HISTORY

OF KAMEHAMEHA I.

By S. M. Kamakau.

NUMBER 19.

The History of Kahahana.>1

Kahahana was a tabu chief of O‘ahu.

Ka‘ionuilalahai was his mother, a grand-

daughter of Kalani‘ömaiheuila, daughter of

Kalanikahimaka‘iali‘i and Küalu, older sister of

Ka‘ulahea, Ruling Chief of Maui. ‘Ëlani was his

father, belonging to the family of Küpänihi and

Keöpüolani.

2. He was taken to Maui in his infancy as the

foster son of Kahekili and was brought up with

all the tabus of Maui. He developed into a hand-

some child with good features and lovely curling

The Story of Kahahana, Part 1

This section of the journal presents stories, chants and other literary pieces from the Legacy Materials. It

begins with the story of Kahahana.

“The History of Kahahana” describes the story of Kahahana, one of the last kings of O‘ahu. Much of

the information here appears nowhere else. It was written by the noted Hawaiian historian Samuel M.

Kamakau and presented as part of a series of articles that describe the broader history of Kamehameha

I. The articles appeared in Ka Nüpepa Kü‘oko‘a (The Independent Newspaper); the portion of the story

presented in this issue of the journal originally appeared on the first pages of the March 16 and 23, 1867,

issues of the paper. Mo‘okini 36–37; Chapin 78–80. The text using contemporary orthography in the

second column is based on the work of Puakea Nogelmeier, Ke Kumu Aupuni, Honolulu, 1996, and is

used here with the kind permission of the copyright holder, ‘Ahahui ‘Ölelo Hawai‘i. The English transla-

tion in the third column is derived from the work of Dorothy Barrère, Martha Beckwith, Caroline Curtis,

Mary Kawena Pukui, Emma Taylor, Thomas Thrum, Lahilahi Webb and John Wise, Ruling Chiefs of

Hawai‘i, Revised Edition, Honolulu, 1992, used here with the kind permission of the copyright holder,

the Kamehameha Schools.

1. KA MO‘OLELO

O KAMEHAMEHA I.

Na S. M. Kamakau.

HELU 19.1

Ka Mo‘olelo o Kahahana.

‘O Kahahana, he ali‘i kapu ia no O‘ahu. ‘O

Ka‘ionuilalahai2 ka makuahine, ka mo‘opuna

a Kalani‘ömaiheuila, ke kaikamahine a

Kalanikahimaka‘iali‘i,3 a läua ‘o Küalu ke

kaikuahine, a mua ho‘i o Ka‘ulahea, ka Mö‘ï o

Maui. A ‘o ka makua käne, ‘o ia ho‘i ‘o ‘Ëlani,

no ka ‘ohana a Küpänihi, a ‘o Keöpüolani.

2. I ko Kahahana manawa kamali‘i, ua ki‘i ‘ia

mai e Kahekili e lawe i Maui i keiki näna. Ua

hänai kapu ‘ia ‘o ia i Maui. A i kona lilo ‘ana a‘e i

kanaka makua, ua lilo ‘o ia i kanaka maika‘i, a ua

1. KA MOOLELO

O KAMEHAMEHA I.

Na S. M. Kamakau.

HELU 19.

Ka Mooolelo o Kahahana.

O Kahahana, he alii kapu ia no o Oahu. O

Kaionuilalahai ka makuahine, ka moopuna

a Kalaniomaiheuila, ke kaikamahine a

Kalanikahimakaialii, a laua o Kualu ke

kaikuahine, a mua hoi o Kaulahea ka Moi o

Maui. A o ka makuakane, oia hoi o Elani, no

ka ohana a Kupanihi, a o Keopuolani.

2. I ko Kahahana manawa kamalii, ua kii ia mai

e Kahekili e lawe i Maui i keiki nana. Ua hanai

kapu ia oia i Maui. A i kona lilo ana ae i kanaka

makua, ua lilo oia i kanaka maikai, a ua nani hoi

Ka Mo‘olelo o Kahahana, Mähele 1

E ho‘opuka hou ‘ia ma këia mähele o ka puke pai nä mo‘oka‘ao, nä mele a me nä mo‘olelo like ‘ole o nä

Palapala Ho‘oilina Hawai‘i. E ho‘omaka ana me ka mo‘olelo o Kahahana.

‘O “Ka Mo‘olelo o Kahahana” he mo‘olelo o nä mö‘ï hope o O‘ahu. Ua nui ka ‘ike ma këia mo‘olelo i

loa‘a ‘ole ma kekahi wahi. Na Samuel M. Kamakau, he lae‘ula i nä mo‘olelo Hawai‘i, i käkau a he mähele

ia mo‘olelo o ka püka‘ina mo‘olelo no Kamehameha I ma Ka Nüpepa Kü‘oko‘a. Aia ma këia pukana o ka

puke pai ka mo‘olelo i pa‘i ‘ia ma ka ‘ao‘ao mua o ia nüpepa ma ka lä 16 a 23 o Malaki, 1867. Mo‘okini

36–37; Chapin 78–80. ‘O ka ‘ölelo hö‘ano hou ‘ia o ke kolamu ‘elua, ma muli ia o kä Puakea Nogelmeier

ma ka puke ‘o Ke Kumu Aupuni, Honolulu, 1996, a ho‘ohana ‘ia ma ‘ane‘i me ka ‘ae ‘olu‘olu mai a ka

mea nona ke kuleana kope, ‘o ka ‘Ahahui ‘Ölelo Hawai‘i. Na Dorothy Barrère, Caroline Curtis, Mary

Kawena Pukui, Emma Taylor, Thomas Thrum, Lahilahi Webb, a me John Wise ka unuhi ‘ölelo

Pelekänia ma ke kolamu ‘ekolu, mai loko mai ia o Ruling Chiefs of Hawaii, Revised Edition, Honolulu,

1992, a ho‘ohana ‘ia ho‘i me ka ‘ae ‘olu‘olu mai a ka mea nona ke kuleana kope, ‘o Nä Kula ‘o

Kamehameha.

102 103

ka mo‘olelo o kahahana, mähele 1 1 0 51 0 4 ka ho‘oilina: journal of hawaiian language sources ● march 2002

kolamu (column) 2

4. ‘O “Peleiohölani” kekahi pela ‘ana.

An alternative spelling could be “Peleiohölani.”

5. Ua ho‘ololi ‘ia ‘o “Kaohulupulu” ‘o ia ‘o “Ka‘öpulupulu.”

“Kaohulupulu” was changed to “Ka‘öpulupulu.”

kolamu (column) 3

2. Ua ‘oi aku ke kü o këia unuhi ‘ölelo Pelekänia i ka

Hawai‘i, a he pani ia i ka unuhi mua o Ruling Chiefs:

“Pi‘ipi‘i (curly head).” He inoa kapakapa këia no ko

Kahahana mäkaukau i ka “hahai moa,” ‘o ia ho‘i, no

kona akamai i ka hahai a pepehi a make ka “moa,” ‘o

ia kona mau hoa paio.

The newly added English text, reflecting the

Hawaiian, replaces this from Ruling Chiefs: “Pi‘ipi‘i

(curly head).” This epithet alludes to young

Kahahana’s potential capability to hunt down his

warrior enemies, as the moa (chicken, rooster) is

sometimes used figuratively to refer to a warrior.

hair from which came his nickname <“Pi‘ipi‘i

hahai moa” (curly head who hunts chickens)>.2

3. When he became a man he caused a breach in

the tabu by making love to the lesser chiefesses

and so lost the tabu of Fire, Heat and

Extraordinary Heat which had been his, and he

was called Walia.

4. Kahahana took for himself a wife named

Kekuapo‘i. It is said of this woman that she had

no equal throughout the group; her name was

famous from Hawai‘i to Kaua‘i; she had become

a legend because of the splendid proportions of

her body, without a flaw from head to foot; eyes

lovely as a dove’s; cheeks like a rosebud that

unfolds its petals in the early morn; a face whose

features seemed to change from morning to mid-

day, evening, night; for such a peerless beauty

the tabu was well worth losing. The chiefs,

priests and commoners of O‘ahu were dissatis-

fied with the rule of Kümahana, son of

Peleiöhölani. He slept late, was stingy, penurious,

deaf to the advice of others and used to take him-

self off to the plains to shoot rats; they therefore

plotted to depose Kümahana.

5. And, having succeeded in their plans, the

chiefs and the leading priest, Ka‘öpulupulu,

agreed to bring Kahahana from Maui to rule over

them. For this purpose they sent to him his

mother (mother’s cousin), Kekela, and she land-

ed on Maui, met her son and the Ruling Chief

and other chiefs of Wailuku. <Kahekili asked

Kekela, “What is the reason for this journey that

brings the Chiefess all this way over the ocean?”

Kekela answered, “I have come to summon the

nani ho‘i kona helehelena, a ua pi‘ipi‘i maika‘i

kona lauoho; a ua kapa ‘ia ‘o ia i kekahi wä, he

“pi‘ipi‘i hahai moa.”

3. I kona lilo ‘ana i kanaka makua, ho‘oipoipo

akula ‘o ia me nä wähine kaukauali‘i, no laila, ua

‘ali ‘ia ke kapu, a ua kapa hou ‘ia ka inoa ‘o

Walia, a ua ho‘opau ‘ia ka inoa Ahi, Wela,

Hahana.

4. Lawe a‘ela ‘o Kahahana i wahine näna,‘o

Kekuapo‘i ka inoa. Ua ‘ölelo ‘ia nö ho‘i këlä

wahine, ‘a‘ohe ona lua i loko o ke aupuni Hawai‘i

nei, a ua kaulana kona inoa mai Hawai‘i a Kaua‘i,

a ua lilo ho‘i i k a ‘ a o , a ua ki‘eki‘e hanohano kona

kino; ‘a‘ole nö ho‘i i ‘ike ‘ia kahi kïnä mai luna o

ke po‘o a hiki i nä kapua‘i wäwae; he mau maka

manu nünü kona i like me ko ka mohoea; a ua like

ho‘i nä helehelena o nä hi‘ohi‘ona päpälina me ka

‘öpu‘u loke i möhala maika‘i i ke kakahiaka; a ua

nui nä loli o kona mau hi‘ohi‘ona, i ke kakahiaka,

i ke awakea, ahiahi a me ka pö; ‘o ka pu‘ö

kelakela, ‘oiai ‘o ia i loko o ia manawa, ua

küpono ke ‘ali ‘ana o ke kapu. Ua uluhua nä ali‘i,

nä kähuna a me nä maka‘äinana o ke aupuni o

O‘ahu i ko läkou Mö‘ï, iä Kümahana, i ke keiki a

Peleiöhölani.4 ‘O ke kumu o ka uluhua ‘ana, he

ali‘i hiamoe lö‘ihi ‘o Kümahana, he ali‘i pï, he

‘au‘a, he ho‘okuli, he hele i ke kula i ka pana ‘iole,

no laila, uluhua loa nä ali‘i a me nä känaka, a

wailana läkou e ho‘opau i ka noho mö‘ï ‘ana o

Kümahana, a ua kö ‘i‘o ko läkou mana‘o.

5. I ka ho‘opau ‘ia ‘ana o ka noho Mö‘ï ‘ana o

Kümahana, no laila, koho ihola nä ali‘i a me

Ka‘öpulupulu,5 ke kahuna nui, e ki‘i iä Kahahana

i Mö‘ï no ke aupuni o O‘ahu, no laila, ho‘ouna

ihola läkou iä Kekela, ka makuahine, e ki‘i iä

Kahahana i Maui, ua ho‘oholo ‘ia ia mana‘o ‘ana.

Holo akula ‘o Kekela a me nä hoe wa‘a, a pae i

Maui, a häläwai pü me Kahahana a me Kahekili,

ka Mö‘ï o Maui, a me nä ali‘i a pau ma Wailuku.

Nïnau maila ‘o Kahekili iä Kekela, “He aha ka

kona helehelena, a ua piipii maikai kona lauoho;

a ua kapaia oia i kekahi wa, he “piipii hahai

moa.”

3. I kona lilo ana i kanaka makua, hooipoipo aku

la oia me na wahine kaukaualii, nolaila, ua ali ia

ke kapu, a ua kapa hou ia ka inoa o Walia, a ua

hoopauia ka inoa Ahi, Wela, Hahana.

4. Lawe ae la o Kahahana i wahine nana, o

Kekuapoi ka inoa. Ua olelo ia no hoi kela wahine,

aohe ona lua iloko o ke aupuni Hawaii nei, a ua

kaulana kona inoa mai Hawaii a Kauai, a ua lilo

hoi i kaao, a ua kiekie hanohano kona kino; aole

no hoi i ike ia kahi kina mai luna o ke poo a hiki i

na kapuai wawae; he mau maka manu nunu

kona i like me ko ka mohoea; a ua like hoi na

helehelena o na hiohiona papalina me ka opuu

rose i mohala maikai i ke kakahiaka; a ua nui na

loli o kona mau hiohiona, i ke kakahiaka, i ke

awakea, ahiahi a me ka po; o ka puo kelakela,

oiai oia iloko o ia manawa, ua kupono ke ali ana

o ke kapu. Ua uluhua na’lii, na kahuna a me na

makaainana o ke aupuni o Oahu i ko lakou Moi

ia Kumahana, i ke keiki a Peleioholani. O ke

kumu o ka uluhua ana, he alii hiamoe loihi o

Kumahana, he alii pi, he aua, he hookuli, he hele

i ke kula i ka pana iole, nolaila, uluhua loa na’lii a

me na kanaka, a wailana lakou e hoopau i ka

noho Moi ana o Kumahana, a ua ko io ko lakou

manao.

5. I ka hoopau ia ana o ka noho Moi ana o

Kumahana, nolaila, koho iho la na’lii a me

Kaohulupulu, ke kahuna nui, e kii ia Kahahana i

Moi no ke aupuni o Oahu, nolaila, hoouna iho la

lakou ia Kekela ka makuahine e kii ia Kahahana i

Maui, ua hooholoia ia manao ana. Holo aku la o

Kekela a me na hoe waa, a pae i Maui, a halawai

pu me Kahahana a me Kahekili ka Moi o Maui, a

me na’lii a pau ma Wailuku. Ninau mai la o

Kahekili ia Kekela, “Heaha ka huakai a ke ’Lii o

ka mo‘olelo o kahahana, mähele 1 1 0 71 0 6 ka ho‘oilina: journal of hawaiian language sources ● march 2002

kolamu (column) 2

6. ‘O kekahi pela ‘ana, me ka mana‘o ‘oko‘a, ‘o ia ‘o “au

kaha.”

An alternative spelling here, with a different meaning,

could be two words, “au kaha.”

kolamu (column) 3

3. He pani këia unuhi piha o ka Hawai‘i i këia hö‘ulu‘ulu

mana‘o ma Ruling Chiefs: “And <she> conveyed to

them the will of the chiefs and of the head priest of

O‘ahu that Kahahana should return to O‘ahu.” (Ua

komo nä kuhia kikokikona e like me ka mea ma luna

me ka mahalo na‘e i ka unuhi mua ma Ruling Chiefs.)

This complete translation of the Hawaiian replaces

this summary from Ruling Chiefs: “And <she> con-

veyed to them the will of the chiefs and of the head

priest of O‘ahu that Kahahana should return to

O‘ahu.” (Textual notes like this one are included in

respect for the integrity of the original Ruling Chiefs

translation.)

4. Ua käpae ‘ia ka ‘ölelo “asked Kahekili” mai ka unuhi

ma Ruling Chiefs.

The words “asked Kahekili,” originally in the Ruling

Chiefs translation, were removed.

young man of ours to return to O‘ahu in accor-

dance with the command of the Chiefs and the

priest, Ka‘öpulupulu, that he return to O‘ahu,

because Kümahana has been exiled.” Kahekili

lowered his head in thought because he valued

Kahahana so and then raised it again, and

asked,>3 “To be at the head of the

Government?”4 “I believe this to be their pur-

pose, <and perhaps the (O‘ahu) chiefs believe

that you will hold him back, and so they have

sent me to summon him to return to O‘ahu,>”

answered Kekela. <Kahekili replied,> “Then I

will not hold the boy back since you have come

for him yourself; anyone else I would have

refused; but I will retain his wife as surety for his

treatment on O‘ahu.” <Kekela answered,> “Are

not we, his parents, the persons to carry orders

for our son? This is our younger sister, and since

our son has taken her as his wife it is proper that

she go where he goes.”

6. Kahekili then turned to Kahahana and said, “I

permit you to go. Only do me this favor, that

when you are firmly established on O‘ahu, you let

the land of Kualoa and the ivory that drifts

ashore be mine; let these be my property on the

island.”

7. Then Kahahana and Kekuapo‘i his wife

<left>, accompanied by chiefs and paddlers.

<They> sailed for O‘ahu and landed at Kahaloa

in Waikïkï. And the chiefs, lesser chiefs, priests,

counselors, warriors and commoners gathered

from the mountains of the interior to the sea-

coast at the principal place at Waikïkï to make

Kahahana Chief over O‘ahu.

huaka‘i a ke Ali‘i o ka ‘au ‘ana mai nei i ke kai?”

Pane akula ‘o Kekela, “I ki‘i mai nei au i ke keiki

a käua e ho‘i i O‘ahu, ma muli o ke kauoha a nä

ali‘i a me Ka‘öpulupulu, ke kahuna, e ho‘i ke Ali‘i

i O‘ahu, no ka mea, ua wailana ‘ia ‘o Kümahana.”

Külou ihola ‘o Kahekili i lalo no ka minamina iä

Kahahana, a ea a‘ela ‘o ia i luna a pane maila, “I

ki‘i mai nei ‘oe iä ia nei (Kahahana) i Ali‘i no ke

Aupuni?” Pane aku nö ho‘i ‘o Kekela, “Pëlä paha,

no ka mana‘o paha o nä ali‘i o ‘au‘a ‘oe, no laila,

ho‘ouna mai nei ia‘u e ki‘i mai iä ia nei

(Kahahana) e ho‘i i O‘ahu.” Pane maila ‘o

Kahekili, “‘A‘ole au e ‘au‘a aku i ke keiki, no ka

mea, he nani nö ho‘i ia ua ki‘i pono maila nö i ke

keiki a käua, akä, inä nö na‘e he mea ‘ë ka mea

näna i ki‘i mai nei, ‘a‘ole nö au e ho‘oku‘u aku,

akä, ‘o ka wahine nö na‘e ka‘u e ‘au‘a aku e noho,

o hana ‘ino ‘ia mai auane‘i e ‘oukou e ke O‘ahu.”

Pane akula ‘o Kekela, “‘O wai aku ho‘i auane‘i ka

Ilämuku o kä käua keiki, kainoa nö ho‘i ‘o käua

nö ‘o nä mäkua, a ‘o ko käua pöki‘i kaikaina nö

ho‘i këia, a he nani nö ia na ke keiki nö i lawe

a‘ela i wahine, ua pono ihola nö, a no laila, ‘o ke

käne hele, ‘o ka wahine hele.”

6. Ui a‘ela ‘o Kahekili iä Kahahana, “Ke ho‘oku‘u

nei au iä ‘oe e ho‘i i O‘ahu, a i lilo ‘i‘o ke Aupuni

o O‘ahu iä ‘oe, ke nonoi aku nei au iä ‘oe, a i kü

‘oe i ka moku, ‘o Kualoa ko‘u ‘äina, a ‘o ka palaoa

pae, e lilo nö ia ia‘u, a ‘o ko‘u mau wahi ‘äina

ihola nö ia.”

7. Ho‘i maila ‘o Kahahana i O‘ahu a me

Kekuapo‘i, käna wahine, a me kekahi po‘e ali‘i,

a me nä hoe wa‘a. Holo maila läkou a pae ma

Kahaloa i Waikïkï. I ka lohe ‘ana o nä ali‘i, nä

kaukauali‘i, nä kähuna, nä käkä‘ölelo, nä pü‘ali

o ka ‘äina a me nä maka‘äinana, ua hiki mai ke

Ali‘i ‘o Kahahana mai Maui mai, ua ‘äkoakoa

koke a‘ela läkou, mai nä wai a nä Pali Ko‘olau

a me nä aukaha,6 ma ke külanakauhale Ali‘i ma

Waikïkï, no ka ho‘äli‘i ‘ana iä Kahahana i Mö‘ï no

O‘ahu.

ka au ana mai nei i ke kai?” Pane aku la o Kekela,

“I kii mai nei au i ke keiki a kaua e hoi i Oahu,

mamuli o ke kauoha a na’lii a me Kaopulupulu

ke kahuna, e hoi ke ’Lii i Oahu, no ka mea, ua

wailana ia o Kumahana.” Kulou iho la o Kahekili

ilalo no ka minamina ia Kahahana, a ea ae la oia

iluna a pane mai la, “I kii mai nei oe ia ianei

(Kahahana) i Alii no ke Aupuni?” Pane aku no

hoi o Kekela, “Pela paha, no ka manao paha o

na’lii o aua oe, nolaila, hoouna mai nei ia’u e kii

mai ia ia nei (Kahahana) e hoi i Oahu.” Pane mai

la o Kahekili, “Aole au e aua aku i ke keiki, no ka

mea, he nani no hoi ia ua kii pono mai la no i ke

keiki a kaua, aka, ina no nae he mea e ka mea

nana i kii mai nei, aole no au e hookuu aku, aka,

o ka wahine no nae ka’u e aua aku e noho, o

hanaino ia mai auanei e oukou e ke Oahu.” Pane

aku la o Kekela, “Owai aku hoi auanei ka

Ilamuku o ka kaua keiki, ka i noa no hoi o kaua

no o na makua, a o ko kaua pokii kaikaina no hoi

keia, a he nani no ia na ke keiki no i lawe ae la i

wahine, ua pono iho la no, a nolaila, o ke kane

hele o ka wahine hele.”

6. Ui ae la o Kahekili ia Kahahana, “Ke hookuu

nei au ia oe e hoi i Oahu, a i lilo io ke Aupuni o

Oahu ia oe, ke nonoi aku nei au ia oe, a i ku oe i

ka moku, o Kualoa ko’u aina, a o ka palaoa pae, e

lilo no ia ia’u, a o ko’u mau wahi aina iho la no

ia.”

7. Hoi mai la o Kahahana i Oahu a me Kekuapoi

kana wahine, a me kekahi poe alii, a me na hoe

waa. Holo mai la lakou a pae ma Kahaloa i

Waikiki. I ka lohe ana o na’lii, na kaukaualii, na

kahuna, na kakaolelo, na puali o ka aina a me na

makaainana, ua hiki mai ke ’Lii o Kahahana mai

Maui mai, ua akoakoa koke ae la lakou, mai na

wai a na Pali Koolau a me na aukaha, ma ke

kulanakauhale Alii ma Waikiki, no ka ho’lii ana

ia Kahahana i Moi no Oahu.

ka mo‘olelo o kahahana, mähele 1 1 0 91 0 8 ka ho‘oilina: journal of hawaiian language sources ● march 2002

kolamu (column) 2

7. Ua ho‘ololi ‘ia ‘o “ke” ‘o ia ‘o “ka.”

“Ke” was changed to “ka.”

8. Ua ho‘ololi ‘ia ‘o “Kaopu upulu” ‘o ia ‘o “Ka‘öpulupulu.”

“Kaopu upulu” was changed to “Ka‘öpulupulu.”

kolamu (column) 3

5. He unuhi häiki paha ‘o “the ivory that drifts ashore,”

a he inoa ‘äina paha ‘o “ka palaoa pae” i ho‘oka‘awale

‘ia nä hua.

The phrase translated into English as “the ivory that

drifts ashore” may be literal or may be the name of a

parcel of land.

6. He pani këia unuhi piha o ka Hawai‘i i këia hö‘ulu‘ulu

mana‘o ma Ruling Chiefs: “. . . he informed the chiefs,

governors and counselors of Kahekili’s request for

Kualoa and the ivory that drifted ashore, and asked

their opinion. Some approved, saying, ‘If you desire

to give this to your parent as a reward for rearing you,

it is all one to us.’”

This complete translation of the Hawaiian replaces

this summary from Ruling Chiefs: “. . . he informed

the chiefs, governors and counselors of Kahekili’s

request for Kualoa and the ivory that drifted ashore,

and asked their opinion. Some approved, saying, ‘If

you desire to give this to your parent as a reward for

rearing you, it is all one to us.’”

8. There was no opposition to the appointment

since Ka‘öpulupulu had sanctioned it. Kahahana

was approved by all, for his rule was established

without war or bloodshed.

9. Kahahana’s rule over the land having become

firm, he informed the chiefs, governors and

Counselors, <saying, “Kahekili has made a

request of me.” The chiefs asked, “What has your

father requested of you?” Kahahana replied, “He

has made the following request, ‘You are return-

ing to O‘ahu and if the kingdom there becomes

yours, here is my request of you, that Kualoa and

the ivory that drifts ashore 5 shall be my lands

during your reign.’ That’s it, so what do all of you

think?” Some chiefs said, “This should perhaps

be left up to the chief. If you wish to give them

(the lands of Kualoa) to your father who reared

you, then it is fitting, should that be your inten-

tion, because that will be the reward for their

having raised you.”>6 But the chief

Kükalehua‘aikülani said, “Call Ka‘öpulupulu and

let him decide whether to give it or not.” So

Ka‘öpulupulu was sent for and <found above

Kawänanakoa in Honolulu where he lived. When

Ka‘öpulupulu arrived at Kahaloa in Waikïkï, the

chiefs and King Kahahana again assembled.

Kahahana said to Ka‘öpulupulu, “You have been

sent for because of Kahekili’s request of me, that

you should assess it as fitting or not.”

Ka‘öpulupulu asked, “What is Kahekili’s request

of you?” Kahahana answered, “Kahekili has

requested that, should I actually become ruler of

the kingdom of O‘ahu, that he would have two

lands – Kualoa and the ivory that drifts ashore.”

Ka‘öpulupulu then said, “So that was the request

that Kahekili made of you?” Kahahana confirmed

that it was. “What is your opinion?” Ka‘öpulupulu

8. ‘O ka noho ‘ana o Kahahana ma ka noho ali‘i

o ke aupuni o O‘ahu, ‘a‘ole nö i ke‘ake‘a ‘ia, ‘a‘ole

nö ho‘i he ali‘i, ‘a‘ole kahuna, ‘a‘ole käkä‘ölelo,

no ka mea, ua ‘ae ke kahuna ‘o Ka‘öpulupulu. ‘O

ka ‘ae ‘ana o Kahahana ma ka noho ali‘i a me ka

noho Mö‘ï ‘ana, he mea mahalo ‘ia ia, no ka mea,

‘akahi wale nö Ali‘i i noho ma ka noho ali‘i me ke

kaua ‘ole a me ka ho‘okahe ‘ole ‘ia o ke koko, ma

mua a‘e o kona noho ‘ana ma ka noho ali‘i.

9. A pa‘a ‘o Kahahana ma ka7 noho ali‘i o ke

aupuni o O‘ahu, a laila, ‘ölelo akula ‘o ia i nä ali‘i

a me nä Kuhina, a me ka po‘e käkä‘ölelo, i ka ‘ï

‘ana aku, “He wahi kauoha na Kahekili ia‘u.”

Nïnau maila nä ali‘i, “He aha ke kauoha a kö

makua käne iä ‘oe?” ‘Ölelo akula ‘o Kahahana,

“Penei ke kauoha ‘ana mai ia‘u, ‘Ke ho‘i lä ‘oe i

O‘ahu, a i lilo ke aupuni iä ‘oe, ‘eä, a eia ho‘i ka‘u

noi iä ‘oe, ‘o Kualoa a me ka palaoa pae, ‘o ko‘u

mau ‘äina ia, o kou noho ‘ana aupuni,’ ‘o ia lä a

pehea ho‘i ko ‘oukou mana‘o?” ‘Ölelo maila

kekahi po‘e ali‘i, “Aia wale nö paha ia i ka

mana‘o o ke ali‘i, inä he makemake kou e hä‘awi

i kö makua käne, i kou mea näna i hänai, a laila,

ua pono nö ke mana‘o na‘e ke ali‘i pëlä, no ka

mea, ‘o ia nö ho‘i ka uku o kä läkou hänai ‘ana

iä ‘oe.” ‘Ölelo maila nö ho‘i kekahi ali‘i, ‘o

Kükalehua‘aikülani ka inoa, i ka ‘ï ‘ana aku, “E

kakali ke ali‘i i ka pono o ka hä‘awi ‘ana, e ki‘i iä

Ka‘öpulupulu ke kahuna, a hiki mai ‘o ia, a ‘ae

mai i ka pono o ka hä‘awi a me ka hewa.” Ki‘i

‘ia akula ‘o Ka‘öpulupulu a loa‘a ma uka o

Kawänanakoa, ma Honolulu, kona wahi noho.

A hiki maila ‘o Ka‘öpulupulu ma Kahaloa i

Waikïkï, ‘äkoakoa hou maila nä ali‘i a me

Kahahana, ka Mö‘ï o ke aupuni. Pane maila ‘o

Kahahana iä Ka‘öpulupulu, “I ki‘i ‘ia aku nei ‘oe

no nä ‘ölelo kauoha a Kahekili ia‘u, a e nänä mai

‘oe i ka pono a me ka hewa.” Nïnau mai ‘o

Ka‘öpulupulu,8 “He aha ia mau ‘ölelo kauoha a

Kahekili iä ‘oe?” Pane aku ‘o Kahahana, “Ua

kauoha mai ‘o Kahekili ia‘u, inä kä e lilo ia‘u ke

aupuni o O‘ahu nei, a laila, ‘elua kä ona ‘äina, ‘o

8. O ka noho ana o Kahahana ma ka nohoalii o

ke aupuni o Oahu, aole no i keakea ia, aole no hoi

he alii, aole kahuna, aole kakaolelo, no ka mea,

ua ae ke kahuna o Kaopulupulu. O ka ae ana o

Kahahana ma ka nohoalii a me ka noho Moi ana,

he mea mahaloia ia, no ka mea, akahi wale no

Alii i noho ma ka nohoalii me ke kaua ole a me

ka hookahe ole ia o ke koko, mamua ae o kona

noho ana ma ka nohoalii.

9. A paa o Kahahana ma ke nohoalii o ke aupuni

o Oahu, alaila, olelo aku la oia i na’lii a me na

Kuhina, a me ka poe kakaolelo, i ka i ana aku,

“He wahi kauoha na Kahekili ia’u.” Ninau mai la

na alii, “He aha ke kauoha a ko makuakane ia

oe?” Olelo aku la o Kahahana, Penei ke kauoha

ana mai ia’u, “Ke hoi la oe i Oahu, a i lilo ke

aupuni ia oe ea, a eia hoi ka’u noi ia oe, o Kualoa

a me ka palaoa pae, o ko’u mau aina ia, o kou

noho ana aupuni,” oia la a pehea hoi ko oukou

manao? Olelo mai la kekahi poe alii, “Aia wale no

paha ia i ka manao o ke alii, ina he makemake

kou e haawi i ko makuakane, i kou mea nana i

hanai, alaila, ua pono no, ke manao nae ke alii

pela, no ka mea, oia no hoi ka uku o ka lakou

hanai ana ia oe.” Olelo mai la no hoi kekahi alii,

o Kukalehuaaikulani ka inoa, i ka i ana aku, “E

kakali ke alii i ka pono o ka haawi ana, e kii ia

Kaopulupulu ke kahuna, a hiki mai oia, a ae mai

i ka pono o ka haawi a me ka hewa.” Kii ia aku la

o Kaopulupulu a loaa mauka o Kawananakoa,

ma Honolulu, kona wahi noho. A hiki mai la o

Kaopulupulu ma Kahaloa i Waikiki, akoakoa hou

mai la na’lii a me Kahahana ka Moi o ke aupuni.

Pane mai la o Kahahana ia Kaopulupulu, “I kii ia

aku nei oe no na olelo kauoha a Kahekili ia’u, a e

nana mai oe i ka pono a me ka hewa.” Ninau

mai o Kaopu upulu, “Heaha ia mau olelo kauoha

a Kahekili ia oe?” Pane aku o Kahahana, “Ua

kauoha mai o Kahekili ia’u, ina ka e lilo ia’u ke

aupuni o Oahu nei, alaila, elua ka ona aina, o

Kualoa a me ka palaoa pae.” Pane mai hoi o

Kaopulupulu, “Pela mai o Kahekili i kauoha mai

ka mo‘olelo o kahahana, mähele 1 1 1 11 1 0 ka ho‘oilina: journal of hawaiian language sources ● march 2002

kolamu (column) 2

9. Ua ho‘ololi ‘ia ‘o “aupun” ‘o ia ‘o “aupuni.”

“Aupun” was changed to “aupuni.”

kolamu (column) 3

7. He pani këia unuhi piha o ka Hawai‘i i këia hö‘ulu‘ulu

mana‘o ma Ruling Chiefs: “So Ka‘öpulupulu was sent

for and the question put, and Kahahana told him that

he was willing to grant these things to his parent in

return for his up-bringing.”

This complete translation of the Hawaiian replaces

this summary from Ruling Chiefs: “So Ka‘öpulupulu

was sent for and the question put, and Kahahana told

him that he was willing to grant these things to his

parent in return for his up-bringing.”

8. He känalua ka pololei o ka unuhi ma ‘ane‘i. I la‘ana,

ua unuhi ‘ia ‘o “nä känäwai” ma ka ‘ölelo Pelekänia ‘o

“the water courses.”

Questions exist on this segment of the translation. As

one example, the Hawaiian refers to “nä känäwai”

(literally, “the laws”), but in Ruling Chiefs, it is trans-

lated as “the water courses.”

9. Ua ho‘ololi ‘ia ‘o “congratulated themselves upon

their escape from” ‘o ia ‘o “made a great noise asking

each other for forgiveness for having barely escaped.”

“Congratulated themselves upon their escape from”

was changed to “made a great noise asking each other

for forgiveness for having barely escaped.”

asked. Kahahana replied, “My own opinion is

that these lands should be given to my father as

he has requested, and that they will be the

reward for his having raised me. That is my

opinion.”>7

10. <When Ka‘öpulupulu heard these words of

the King,> the priest bowed his head, then, look-

ing up, said, “O Chief! if you give away these

things your authority will be lost, and you will

cease to be a Ruler. To Kualoa belong the water-

courses of your ancestors, Kalumaluma‘i and

Kekaihehe‘e; the sacred drums of Kapahu‘ulu

and the spring of Ka‘ahu‘ula; the sacred hill of

Kauakahi son of Kaho‘owaha of Kualoa. 8

Without the ivory that drifts ashore you could

not offer to the gods the first victim slain in bat-

tle; it would be for Kahekili to offer it on Maui,

and the rule would become his. You would be no

longer ruler; had the country been yours by con-

quest, it might be proper for you to reward your

uncle. But your authority was given you by the

chiefs because of your uncle Kümahana’s mis-

management. Any other requests of Kahekili you

might have granted, but not this. And be sure not

to conceal from me any further secret message

that Kahekili may send<; if you do so, then you

will immediately lose your kingdom.” This would

be the first time the kingdom would be lost.>

11. Having heard these words of the priest,

Kahahana and the chiefs and Counselors <made

a great noise asking each other for forgiveness

for having barely escaped>9 losing the dominion

to Kahekili.

Kualoa a me ka palaoa pae.” Pane mai ho‘i ‘o

Ka‘öpulupulu, “Pëlä mai ‘o Kahekili i kauoha mai

ai iä ‘oe?” ‘Ae akula nö ho‘i ‘o Kahahana. “Pehea

kou mana‘o?” wahi a Ka‘öpulupulu. Pane mai ‘o

Kahahana, “‘O ko‘u mana‘o nö, ‘o ka hä‘awi i

këlä mau ‘äina no ku‘u makua käne, e like me

käna noi ‘ana mai ia‘u, a ‘o ia nö ho‘i ka uku o

käna hänai ‘ana ia‘u, a ‘o ia ihola ko‘u mana‘o.”

10. A lohe ‘o Ka‘öpulupulu i nä ‘ölelo a ka Mö‘ï,

külou ihola ‘o ia i lalo a ea a‘e, pane akula ‘o ia i

ke Ali‘i, “E ke Ali‘i, hä‘awi nö ‘oe i këia mau ‘äina,

‘o ka lilo nö ia o ke aupuni, ‘a‘ole ‘o ‘oe ke Ali‘i. ‘O

Kualoa, ‘o nä känäwai nö ia o kö mau küpuna, o

Kalumaluma‘i a me Kekaihehe‘e; ‘o nä pahu kapu

‘o Kapahu‘ulu me Ka‘ahu‘ulapünäwai; ‘o ka pali

kapu o Kauakahiakaho‘owaha o Kualoa. ‘O ka

palaoa pae, ‘a‘ole ‘oe e hai ana i kö akua, i nä

heana a me nä kaua küwaho, ua lilo iä Kahekili,

aia ma Maui e hai ai, no laila, ua lilo ke aupuni iä

Kahekili, a ‘o ‘oe ho‘i, ‘a‘ole ‘oe he ali‘i. Ua pono

paha ia, inä he aupuni9 i loa‘a iä ‘oe ma ke kaua,

a laila, e uku ‘oe i kö kahu näna i hänai. ‘O kou

noho ali‘i ‘ana ma luna o ke aupuni, na nä ali‘i

nö ia i ho‘äli‘i aku iä ‘oe, a i ho‘onoho ho‘i iä ‘oe

ma luna o ke aupuni, no ka hewa o ka hana a

Kümahana, kou makua käne. Inä nö lä ho‘i he

mau ‘äina ‘ë a‘e kä Kahekili i noi mai ai, a laila,

inä nö lä ho‘i ua pono nö ho‘i iä ‘oe ke hä‘awi iä

ia. Eia ho‘i kekahi; ‘o nä ‘ölelo huna a pau a

Kahekili e ho‘ouna mai ai iä ‘oe, mai hünä ‘oe

ia‘u; inä e hünä ‘oe ia‘u, a laila, ‘o ka lilo nö ia o

ke aupuni.” ‘O ka maka mua nö këia o ka lilo ‘ana

o ke aupuni.

11. I ka lohe ‘ana o Kahahana a me nä Kuhina a

me nä ali‘i i nä ‘ölelo a Ka‘öpulupulu, a laila, wä

ihola läkou me ka mihi aku a mihi mai, no ka

pakele ‘ana mai lilo ke aupuni iä Kahekili.

ai ia oe?” Ae aku la no hoi o Kahahana. “Pehea

kou manao?” wahi a Kaopulupulu. Pane mai o

Kahahana, “O ko’u manao no, o ka haawi i kela

mau aina no kuu makuakane, e like me kana noi

ana mai ia’u, a oia no hoi ka uku o kana hanai

ana ia’u, a oia iho la ko’u manao.”

10. A lohe o Kaopulupulu i na olelo a ka Moi,

kulou iho la oia ilalo a ea ae, pane aku la oia i

ke ’Lii, “E ke ’Lii, haawi no oe i keia mau aina,

o ka lilo no ia o ke aupuni, aole o oe ke Alii. O

Kualoa, o na kanawai no ia o ko mau kupuna, o

Kalumalumai a me Kekaihehee; o na pahu kapu

o Kapahuulu me Kaahuulapunawai; o ka pali

kapu o Kauakahiakahoowaha o Kualoa. O ka

palaoa pae, aole oe e hai ana i ko akua, i na heana

a me na kaua kuwaho, ua lilo ia Kahekili, aia ma

Maui e hai ai, nolaila, ua lilo ke aupuni ia

Kahekili, a o oe hoi, aole oe he alii. Ua pono paha

ia, ina he aupun i loaa ia oe ma ke kaua, alaila, e

uku oe i ko kahu nana i hanai. O kou nohoalii

ana maluna o ke aupuni, na na’lii no ia i ho’lii

aku ia oe, a i hoonoho hoi ia oe maluna o ke

aupuni, no ka hewa o ka hana a Kumahana kou

makuakane. Ina no la hoi he mau aina e ae ka

Kahekili noi mai ai, alaila, ina no la hoi ua pono

no hoi ia oe ke haawi iaia. Eia hoi kekahi; o na

olelo huna a pau a Kahekili e hoouna mai ai ia

oe, mai huna oe ia’u; ina e huna oe ia’u, alaila,

o ka lilo no ia o ke aupuni.” O ka maka mua no

keia o ka lilo ana o ke aupuni.

11. I ka lohe ana o Kahahana a me na Kuhina a

me na’lii i na olelo a Kaopulupulu, alaila, wa iho

la lakou me ka mihi aku a mihi mai, no ka pakele

ana mai lilo ke aupuni ia Kahekili.

ka mo‘olelo o kahahana, mähele 1 1 1 31 1 2 ka ho‘oilina: journal of hawaiian language sources ● march 2002

kolamu (column) 2

10. ‘O kekahi pela ‘ana, me ka mana‘o ‘oko‘a, ‘o ia ‘o

“kuko.”

An alternative spelling here, with a different meaning,

could be “kuko.”

kolamu (column) 3

10. Ua ho‘ololi ‘ia ‘o “who” ‘o ia ‘o “Peleiöhölani.”

“Who” was changed to “Peleiöhölani.”

11. Ua ho‘ololi ‘ia ‘o “who” ‘o ia ‘o “Kalani‘öpu‘u.”

“Who” was changed to “Kalani‘öpu‘u.”

12. He pani këia unuhi hou i ka mea ma Ruling Chiefs:

“Any chief or commoner who paid the taxes levied in

the shape of feather capes and bird feathers was

looked upon with favor and admitted to ‘Umi-hale”.

The newly added English text, reflecting the

Hawaiian, replaces this from Ruling Chiefs: “Any

chief or commoner who paid the taxes levied in the

shape of feather capes and bird feathers was looked

upon with favor and admitted to ‘Umi-hale”.

12. Kahahana became ruler of O‘ahu in <A.D.>

1773. And <he> ruled eight and one half years.

During the first of these years there were no

wars, as <there had been> in the time of

Peleiöhölani, son of Küikealaikauaokalani

Künuiäkea Küali‘i, <King of O‘ahu>.

13. Peleiöhölani10 delighted in war and his pas -

sion for it was inherited by his son Kalani‘öpu‘u,

the ravening lion of his time. Kalani‘öpu‘u11 <the

King of Hawai‘i> was, during this period,

engaged in war with Kahekili on Maui; Kahekili

asked Kahahana’s help in this war. And, since

Kahekili had reared him, Kahahana sent some of

his warriors to Kahekili’s aid; but Kalani‘öpu‘u

was also a relative of his, and it was for this rea-

son that Kalani‘öpu‘u did not go to war against

O‘ahu or Moloka‘i.

14. <And because Kahekili had raised

Kahahana, Kahahana’s warriors assisted

Kahekili.> One of the warriors who served the

two masters, Kahahana and Kahekili, was a cer-

tain lesser chief named Kapohu. Kahekili built

himself a Chief’s House called ‘Umihale on the

mountain side of Ka‘ilipoe, on the ocean side of

Kihahale.

15. <All chiefs and commoners paid taxes in the

form of feather capes and bird feathers. They

were looked upon with favor and admitted to

‘Umihale;>12 but a person who failed to pay the

taxes was discredited and refused admission.

16. Kapohu and Ka‘akakai went to Hawai‘i after

feather capes and bird feathers in order to gain

admission to ‘Umihale. They landed in Kohala

12. I ka A. D. 1773 ko Kahahana noho ‘ana i

ali‘i no ke aupuni o O‘ahu. ‘Ewalu makahiki a

me ka hapa kona noho Mö‘ï ‘ana no ke aupuni

o O‘ahu. I nä makahiki mua na‘e o kona noho

Mö‘ï ‘ana, ‘a‘ohe he kaua; ua ho‘omaha ka noho

‘ana o nä ali‘i a me nä maka‘äinana, ma hope

iho o ka make ‘ana o Peleiöhölani, ke keiki a

Küikealaikauaokalani Künuiäkea Küali‘i, ka

Mö‘ï o O‘ahu.

13. He ali‘i puni kaua ‘o Peleiöhölani, a ua pili

aku ia koko10 iä Kalani‘öpu‘u, käna keiki, ka

liona puni koko o ia au. I loko nö ho‘i o ia mau

makahiki, he nui ke kaua o ke aupuni o Maui me

Kalani‘öpu‘u, ka Mö‘ï o Hawai‘i, no laila, kauoha

maila ‘o Kahekili iä Kahahana, ka Mö‘ï o O‘ahu,

e kökua aku iä ia ma nä ho‘ouka kaua ‘ana me

Kalani‘öpu‘u. Akä, ‘o Kahahana na‘e, he keiki nö

‘o ia na Kalani‘öpu‘u, a ‘o ia nö ho‘i ke kumu i

ki‘i ‘ole ai ‘o Kalani‘öpu‘u e kaua iä Moloka‘i a

me O‘ahu.

14. A no ka hänai ‘ana ho‘i o Kahekili iä

Kahahana, no laila, kökua akula nä koa o

Kahahana iä Kahekili. ‘O kekahi kanaka

kaukauali‘i, ‘o Kapohu kona inoa, a he kanaka

koa nö ho‘i ‘o ia, ‘elua na‘e ona haku, ‘o

Kahahana a me Kahekili. Ua kükulu iho ‘o

Kahekili i Hale Ali‘i nona, ‘o ‘Umihale ka inoa,

aia nö ma uka aku o Ka‘ilipoe, ma kai mai o

Kihahale.

15. ‘O ka ‘auhau ma luna o nä känaka a me nä

ali‘i, he ‘ahu‘ula a he hulu. Inä e loa‘a i ke ali‘i a

me nä känaka nä ‘auhau i ‘auhau ‘ia, a laila, e lilo

‘o ia i ali‘i a i kanaka punahele ho‘i, a ‘o ia ho‘i ke

komo i loko o ‘Umihale; a ‘o ka mea e loa‘a ‘ole

nä mea i ‘auhau ‘ia, ‘o ia ke kü ma waho o

‘Umihale, he mea haku ‘ole.

16. ‘O Kapohu me Ka‘akakai, ‘o ia nä känaka i

holo i Hawai‘i i ke noi i ‘ahu‘ula a me ka hulu i

komo ai i loko o ‘Umihale. I ko läua holo ‘ana a

12. I ka A. D. 1773 ko Kahahana noho ana i alii

no ke aupuni o Oahu. Ewalu makahiki a me ka

hapa kona noho Moi ana no ke aupuni o Oahu.

Ina makahiki mua nae o kona noho Moi ana,

aohe he kaua; ua hoomaha ka noho ana o na’lii

a me na makaainana, mahope iho o ka make ana

o Peleioholani, ke keiki a Kuikealaikauaokalani

Kunuiakea Kualii ka Moi o Oahu.

13. He alii puni kaua o Peleioholani, a ua pili aku

ia koko ia Kalaniopuu kana keiki, ka liona puni

koko o ia au. Iloko no hoi o ia mau makahiki, he

nui ke kaua o ke aupuni o Maui, me Kalaniopuu

ka Moi o Hawaii, nolaila, kauoha mai la o

Kahekili ia Kahahana ka Moi o Oahu, e kokua

aku iaia ma na hoouka kaua ana me Kalaniopuu.

Aka, o Kahahana nae, he keiki no oia na

Kalaniopuu, a oia no hoi ke kumu i kii ole ai o

Kalaniopuu e kaua ia Molokai a me o Oahu.

14. A no ka hanai ana hoi o Kahekili ia

Kahahana, nolaila, kokua aku la na koa o

Kahahana ia Kahekili. O kekahi kanaka

kaukaualii, o Kapohu kona inoa, a he kanaka koa

no hoi oia – elua nae ona haku, o Kahahana a me

Kahekili. Ua kukulu iho o Kahekili i Halealii

nona, o Umihale ka inoa, aia no mauka aku o

Kailipoe, makai mai o Kihahale.

15. O ka auhau maluna o na kanaka a me na’lii,

he ahuula a he hulu. Ina e loaa i ke alii a me na

kanaka na auhau i auhau ia, alaila, e lilo oia i alii a

i kanaka punahele hoi, a oia hoi ke komo iloko o

Umihale; a o ka mea e loaa ole na mea i auhau ia,

oia ke ku mawaho o Umihale, he mea haku ole.

16. O Kapohu me Kaakakai, oia na kanaka i holo

i Hawaii i ke noi ahuula a me ka hulu i komo ai

iloko o Umihale. I ko laua holo ana a pae ma

ka mo‘olelo o kahahana, mähele 1 1 1 51 1 4 ka ho‘oilina: journal of hawaiian language sources ● march 2002

kolamu (column) 2

11. ‘O “ho‘aikäne” kekahi pela ‘ana.

An alternative spelling could be “ho‘aikäne.”

kolamu (column) 3

13. Ua unuhi ‘ia ‘o aikäne he “friend” a “friendly” paha

ma nä paukü 16–23 a me ka 27 o Ruling Chiefs. Laulä

loa ka mana‘o o ia mau hua ‘ölelo Pelekänia, ‘a‘ole

hö‘ike i ka mana‘o piha o ke aikäne he kanaka pili loa

me kekahi kanaka o ke keka like, a he ho‘oipoipo ke

‘ano o ia pili i ka nui o ka manawa.

The English “friend” or “friendly” is used in the

Ruling Chiefs translation for the Hawaiian “aikäne”

that appears in paragraphs 16–23 and 27. Aikäne

refers to a same-gender intimate relationship that

often included sexuality. Translation of the word is

difficult, as “friend” is too generic and thus fails to

make clear the same-gender romantic connotations in

the Hawaiian.

and Ka‘akakai went by way of Hämäkua to Hilo

and became friendly13 with Keawehano, the chief

of Hilo. As for Kapohu, he went around by Kona,

Ka‘ü, Puna and finally reached Hilo. And there

<he> heard in some native villages that a man

from Maui had become a friend of Keawehano

and had obtained a feather cape from him.

Keawehano’s houses were situated on the beach

at Punahoa, close to Pi‘ihonua, and facing the

waves of Huia and Hïkänui; Kapohu went along

outside the fence of Keawehano’s place, and

<he> saw Ka‘akakai sitting with Keawehano at

the threshold of the house, both wearing feather

capes on their shoulders, feather necklaces about

their necks, and helmets on their heads. Now

when Ka‘akakai saw Kapohu standing outside

the fence, he scowled, took up as much room

as possible, and left no room in the doorway.

Kapohu, observing their splendid apparel,

chanted these words:

17. “Ka‘ula is darkened by the feathers of

the birds,

The feathered birds are appealing to

The rain to fall at Poli.”

18. As soon as Keawehano heard these words

chanted, he brushed Ka‘akakai aside and looked

out; then Kapohu went on boldly chanting:

19. “The hanging clouds stand erect;

it is calm

On the upland of Maunalahilahi,

Lo, here it is!

The fish of the god

Is thin.”

20. Keawehano heard the words and called out

to Kapohu, “Come into the house! There is food

and fish in here.” As Kapohu entered he chanted:

pae ma Kohala i Hawai‘i, hele akula ‘o Ka‘akakai

ma Hämäkua a hiki i Hilo, a ho‘oaikäne11 ihola

me Keawehano, ke ali‘i o Hilo. ‘O Kapohu ho‘i,

hele akula ‘o ia ma Kona, Ka‘ü a me Puna, a hiki

loa akula i Hilo. A lohe ‘o ia i kauhale kama‘äina,

he kanaka no Maui mai, ua lilo i aikäne na

Keawehano, a ua loa‘a ka ‘ahu‘ula. ‘O nä hale o

Keawehano, aia i kahakai o Punahoa, e pili ana

me Pi‘ihonua, e huli ana i ka nalu ‘o Huia me

Hïkänui; hele akula ‘o Kapohu a ma waho o ka pä

o nä hale o Keawehano, a ‘ike akula ho‘i ‘o ia iä

Ka‘akakai e noho mai ana ma ka ni‘o me

Keawehano, ua ‘a‘ahu läua i nä ‘ahu‘ula, he mau

lei hulikua ma nä ‘ä‘ï, he mau päpale mahiole ka

i ke po‘o. I ka ‘ike ‘ana mai na‘e o Ka‘akakai iä

Kapohu e kü aku ana ma waho o ka pä, kokoe

ihola kona mau maka, ‘oi‘oi ihola ka lemu, a älai

a‘ela i ka puka. A ‘ike akula ‘o Kapohu i ko läua

lä hanohano, a laila, puana akula ‘o ia i këia mau

hua mele, penei:

17. “Pö Ka‘ula i ka hulu o ka manu,

Ke nonoi a‘ela ka hulu o ka manu,

I komo iho ka ua i Poli ë.”

18. I ko Keawehano lohe ‘ana i këia mau hua

mele, papale a‘ela ‘o ia iä Ka‘akakai, a häliu pono

akula i waho, a laila, kulu †hio hou akula ‘o

Kapohu i këia mau mäpuna leo penei:

19. “Kü pololei ka ‘öpua, ua mälie,

A ka luna aku i Maunalahilahi,

– Eia lä –

‘O ka i‘a a ke akua lä,

Ua lahilahi wale.”

20. A lohe ‘o Keawehano i këia mau mäpuna leo,

kähea akula ‘o ia iä Kapohu, “E komo mai ma

loko o ka hale, eia ka ‘ai a me ka i‘a o loko nei.”

No loko ka hua kähea, e komo aku ana këia. I ko

ia nei komo ‘ana na‘e, puana hou a‘ela ‘o ia i këia

mau hua mele:

Kohala i Hawaii, hele aku la o Kaakakai ma

Hamakua a hiki i Hilo, a hooaikane iho la me

Keawehano ke alii o Hilo. O Kapohu hoi, hele aku

la oia ma Kona, Kau a me Puna, a hiki loa aku la

i Hilo. A lohe oia i kauhale kamaaina, he kanaka

no Maui mai, ua lilo i aikane na Keawehano, a

ua loaa ka ahuula. O na hale o Keawehano, aia

i kahakai o Punahoa, e pili ana me Piihonua, e

huli ana i ka nalu o Huia me Hikanui; hele aku

la o Kapohu a mawaho o ka pa o na hale o

Keawehano, a ike aku la hoi oia ia Kaakakai e

noho mai ana ma ka nio me Keawehano, ua aahu

laua i na ahuula, he mau lei hulikua ma na ai, he

mau papale mahiole kai ke poo. I ka ike ana mai

nae o Kaakakai ia Kapohu e ku aku ana mawaho

o ka pa, kokoe iho la kona mau maka, oioi iho la

ka lemu, a alai ae la i ka puka. A ike aku la o

Kapohu i ko laua la hanohano, alaila, puana aku

la oia i keia mau hua mele, penei:

17. “Po Kaula i ka hulu o ka manu,

Ke nonoi ae la ka hulu o ka manu,

I komo iho ka ua i Poli – e.”

18. I ko Keawehano lohe ana i keia mau hua

mele, papale ae la oia ia Kaakakai, a haliu pono

aku la iwaho, alaila kulu hi-o hou aku la o

Kapohu i keia mau mapuna leo penei:

19. “Ku pololei ka opua ua malie,

A ka luna aku i Maunalahilahi,

– Eia – la –

O ka i-a a ke akua la –

Ua lahilahi wale –”

20. A lohe o Keawehano i keia mau mapuna leo,

kahea aku la oia ia Kapohu, “E komo mai maloko

o ka hale, eia ka ai a me ka ia o loko nei.” No loko

ka hua kahea, e komo aku ana keia. I ko ia nei

komo ana nae, puana hou ae la oia i keia mau

hua mele:

ka mo‘olelo o kahahana, mähele 1 1 1 71 1 6 ka ho‘oilina: journal of hawaiian language sources ● march 2002

kolamu (column) 2

12. ‘O kekahi pela ‘ana, me ka mana‘o ‘oko‘a, ‘o ia ‘o

“kolokio.”

An alternative spelling here, with a different meaning,

could be “kolokio.”

13. Ua komo ‘o “‘A‘ole i pau” ma ‘ane‘i no ka mea e

ho‘omau ‘ia ka mo‘olelo ma ka helu 20.

“‘A‘ole i pau” (Not finished) appears here because the

story continues in the next installment, part 20.

14. ‘O kekahi pela ‘ana, me ka mana‘o ‘oko‘a, ‘o ia ‘o “ia.”

An alternative spelling here, with a slightly different

meaning, could be “ia.”

15. Ua ho‘ololi ‘ia ‘o “Kakkanilua” ‘o ia ‘o “Kakanilua.”

“Kakkanilua” was changed to “Kakanilua.”

kolamu (column) 3

14. Ua ho‘ololi ‘ia ‘o “To these words” ‘o ia ‘o “When he

heard these passionate words.”

“To these words” was changed to “When he heard

these passionate words.”

21. “From Kahuku to ‘Öla‘a (I have traveled),

To the uplands of Pana‘ewa,

To the uplands of Haili,

To catch birds with lime,

To catch birds with snares,

To catch birds with lines,

To twist the necks of birds,

For their feathers.

(Give me) a feather cape,

(Give me) a feather helmet,

(Give me) a feather necklace.”

(Not finished.)

22. NUMBER 20.

<When he heard these passionate words>1 4

Keawehano responded, “Here is your feather

necklace, here is your feather helmet, but the cape

you two shall share!” No sooner had he uttered

the word share than Kapohu reached for a corner

of the feather cape that Ka‘akakai was wearing

and drew it over his own shoulders; <Ka‘akakai

slipped out of the feather cape as Kapohu was

pulling at it until it was completely on him

(Kapohu),> leaving Ka‘akakai without any.

23. In that short space of time Kapohu had

gained the friendship of Keawehano; he turned

to Keawehano and said, “I have two masters,

Kahekili and Kahahana; if your lord goes to war

against my two lords, should my lords be victori-

ous over yours I will preserve your life that day.”

Keawehano made the same promise to Kapohu.

And both agreed to abide by their vow.

24. At the time when Kalani‘öpu‘u went to Maui

to fight against Kahekili, when the battles of

Kamoku‘ilima and Kakanilua were fought,

Kapohu was with Kahahana, Ruling Chief of

O‘ahu, who was living on Moloka‘i <at that

21. “A Kahuku i ‘Öla‘a,

Ka uka i Pana‘ewa,

Ka uka o Haili,

Käpili manu ë,

Käwili manu ë,

Kololio12 manu ë,

Wiliwili manu ë,

‘O ka hulu o ka manu,

‘Ahu‘ula mai nö,

Mahiole mai nö,

Hulikua mai nö.”

(‘A‘ole i pau.)13

22. HELU 20.

I ka lohe ‘ana o Keawehano i këia mau mäpuna

leo, ‘o kona pane maila nö ia me ka ‘ï mai, “Eia kö

lei hulikua, eia kö päpale mahiole, ‘o ka ‘ahu‘ula

o ‘olua, e mähele.” Na ia lä ka hua, mähele, o ka

‘ahu‘ula, ‘o ko ia nei lälau akula nö ia i ka ‘ahu‘ula

a Ka‘akakai e ‘a‘ahu ana, a huki maila i kekahi

kihi, a ‘a‘ahu ihola; e ha‘alele mai ana ho‘i ‘o

Ka‘akakai i ua ‘ahu‘ula nei, e huki mai ana ho‘i

këia, pau loa ka ‘ahu‘ula i luna o ia nei (Kapohu),

a nele loa ihola ‘o Ka‘akakai i ka ‘ahu‘ula.

23. I loko ihola nö o ia manawa pökole i

ho‘aikäne ai ‘o Kapohu me Keawehano, a i ia

manawa nö ‘o ia i pane aku ai iä Keawehano;

“‘Elua o‘u mau <haku>, ‘o Kahekili a ‘o

Kahahana; inä e holo a‘e kou haku e kaua me

ko‘u mau haku, a i lanakila ho‘i ko‘u mau haku

ma luna o kou haku, a laila, ‘o ‘oe ka‘u ola nui i

ia lä.” A pëlä nö ho‘i ‘o Keawehano i ho‘ohiki aku

ai i mua o Kapohu. Ho‘oholo like ihola läua i kä

läua mau ‘ölelo ho‘opa‘a.

24. I ka14 manawa o Kalani‘öpu‘u i holo ai i ke

kaua i Maui me Kahekili, ‘o ia ho‘i ke kaua i

Kamoku‘ilima a me Kakanilua.15 A ‘o Kapohu

na‘e i ia wä, aia nö ‘o ia me Kahahana, ka Mö‘ï

o O‘ahu, a e noho ana ho‘i ‘o Kahahana, ma

21. “A Kahuku i Olaa,

Ka uka i Panaewa,

Ka uka o Haili,

Kapili manu – e,

Kawili manu – e,

Kololio manu – e,

Wiliwili manu – e,

O ka hulu o ka manu,

Ahuula mai no,

Mahiole mai no,

Hulikua mai no.”

(Aole i pau.)

22. HELU 20.

I ka lohe ana o Keawehano i keia mau ma puna

leo, o kona pane mai la no ia me ka i mai, “Eia ko

lei hulikua, eia ko papale mahiole, o ka ahuula

o olua, e mahele.” Na ia la ka hua mahele o ka

ahuula, o ko ia nei lalau aku la no ia i ka ahuula

a Kaakakai e aahu ana, a huki mai la i kekahi

kihi, a aahu iho la; e haalele mai ana hoi o

Kaakakai i ua ahuula nei, e huki mai ana hoi

keia, pau loa ka ahuula iluna o ia nei, (Kapohu)

a nele loa iho la o Kaakakai i ka ahuula.

23. Iloko iho la no o ia manawa pokole i

hoaikane ai o Kapohu me Keawehano, a [ia]

manawa no oia i pane aku ai ia Keawehano;

“Elua o’u mau, o Kahekili a o Kahahana; ina e

holo ae kou haku e kaua me ko’u mau haku, a i

lanakila hoi ko’u mau haku maluna o kou haku,

alaila, o oe ka’u ola nui ia la.” A pela no hoi o

Keawehano i hoohiki aku ai imua o Kapohu.

Hooholo like iho la laua i ka laua mau olelo

hoopaa.

24. I ka manawa o Kalaniopuu i holo ai i ke

kaua i Maui me Kahekili, oia hoi ke kaua i

Kamokuilima a me Kakkanilua. A o Kapohu

nae ia wa, aia no oia me Kahahana ka Moi o

Oahu, a e noho ana hoi o Kahahana ma Molokai

ka mo‘olelo o kahahana, mähele 1 1 1 91 1 8 ka ho‘oilina: journal of hawaiian language sources ● march 2002

kolamu (column) 2

16. Ua ho‘ololi ‘ia ‘o “Houuaula” ‘o ia ‘o “Honua‘ula.”

“Houuaula” was changed to “Honua‘ula.”

17. He pü‘ali koa nä ‘Älapa.

The ‘Älapa were a battle group of soldiers.

18. Ua ho‘ololi ‘ia ‘o “koua” ‘o ia ‘o “käua.”

“Koua” was changed to “käua.”

kolamu (column) 3

15. Ua ho‘ololi ‘ia ‘o “Honua‘ula” ‘o ia ‘o “Honolua.”

“Honua‘ula” was changed to “Honolua.”

time>. And when Kahekili sent a messenger to

tell Kahahana that Kalani‘öpu‘u had come to

Honua‘ula to attack him, and Kahahana sent

warriors to help Kahekili, Kapohu remembering

his vow to Keawehano, joined those who went on

that mission. He went from Honolua 15 by way of

Kä‘anapali on the day that the ‘Älapa, also called

Pi‘ipi‘i, attacked their foes in the battle of

Kakanilua.

25. When he reached the battlefield, all the war-

riors had been slain; Keawehano alone remained

to be put to death. Kapohu went among the war-

riors to plead with them not to kill Keawehano.

He said to Keawehano, “This is not the kind of

encounter implied in our vow that if your chief

and his warriors and my chiefs and their war-

riors took part in a battle, if my chiefs were

defeated and slain you would preserve my life,

and so your life would be preserved by me if your

chief were defeated and slain, so we should be

seen as favorites of our Chiefs. This evil treat-

ment that you have suffered came as a murder-

ous attack, and I was unable to save you.”

26. All this was spoken in a chant, for these two

were skilled in uttering their thoughts in chant; I

have not quoted the words here because they are

too long, and you would not understand their

meaning; the younger generation would not

know what it was all about.

27. <While still alive, Keawehano was brought

before Kahekili, and Kapohu told Kahekili of

their vow. Kahekili agreed to take good care of

Moloka‘i i ia manawa. Ho‘ouna akula ‘o Kahekili

i ka ‘elele e ha‘i aku iä Kahahana, ua hiki mai ‘o

Kalani‘öpu‘u i Honua‘ula16 i ke kaua, no laila,

ho‘ouna maila ‘o Kahahana i nä koa e kökua iä

Kahekili; a ‘o Kapohu na‘e kekahi i holo pü ma

ia huaka‘i me kona mana‘o e häläwai pü me

Keawehano, no nä ‘ölelo ho‘ohiki a läua. ‘O ka lä

na‘e ho‘i a Kapohu i hele aku ai mai Honolua aku

ma Kä‘anapali, ‘o ia nö ka lä i ho‘ouka ai ke kaua

a ka po‘e ‘Älapa,17 i kapa ‘ia ho‘i ‘o ka po‘e

Pi‘ipi‘i, a ‘o ia nö ho‘i ke kaua ‘ana i Kakanilua.

25. I ka hiki ‘ana na‘e o Kapohu i kahi i ho‘ouka

ai ke kaua, ua pau na‘e i ka luku ‘ia ka po‘e

‘Älapa, a ua pau nä ali‘i a me nä koa i ka make, a

‘o Keawehano na‘e ke ali‘i i koe e pepehi ‘ia ana;

a komo akula ‘o Kapohu i loko o nä koa, a

ho‘opau akula i ka pepehi ‘ana iä Keawehano.

‘Ölelo akula na‘e ‘o Kapohu iä Keawehano, i ka ‘ï

‘ana aku, “‘A‘ole këia ‘o nä ‘ölelo ho‘ohiki a käua,

no ka mea, ‘o kä käua i ‘ölelo ai, ‘o ka lä ho‘ouka

nui o ke kaua, e noho ana kou ali‘i me käna po‘e

kaua, a pëlä nö ho‘i ko‘u mau ali‘i. I ka ho‘ouka

nui ‘ana o nä ‘ao‘ao ‘elua, a i he‘e ko‘u mau ali‘i

me ka luku ‘ia, a laila, ‘o wau käu ola nui i ia lä; a

pëlä ho‘i kou ‘ao‘ao, inä ho‘i e lanakila ko‘u mau

ali‘i, a luku nui ‘ia kou ‘ao‘ao, a laila, ‘o ‘oe ka‘u

ola nui i ia lä; a i laila käua e ‘ike ‘ia ai he mau

punahele i ko käua18 mau Mö‘ï. ‘O këia mäinoino

a mä‘ewa‘ewa i loa‘a iä ‘oe, he kaua pöä, no laila,

loa‘a ‘ole ‘oe ia‘u.”

26. ‘O këia mau ‘ölelo a Kapohu me Keawehano,

aia ma loko o ke mele ka ‘ölelo ‘ana, a he akamai

loa ho‘i läua i nä ‘ölelo ‘ana ma loko o ke mele,

akä, no ku‘u mana‘o, ‘a‘ole ‘oukou e ‘ike ana i ke

‘ano o nä loina ma loko o nä mele, a no ka lö‘ihi

nö ho‘i kekahi, a no ke ‘ano ‘ike nö ho‘i kekahi o

ka po‘e ‘öpiopio.

27. Ua lawe ola ‘ia ‘o Keawehano i mua o

Kahekili, a ua ha‘i aku ‘o Kapohu iä Kahekili no

kä läua mau ‘ölelo ho‘ohiki. Ua ‘ae mai nö ‘o

ia manawa. Hoouna aku la o Kahekili i ka elele

e hai aku ia Kahahana, ua hiki mai o Kalaniopuu

i Houuaula i ke kaua, nolaila, hoouna mai la o

Kahahana i na koa e kokua ia Kahekili; a o

Kapohu nae kekahi i holo pu ma ia huakai, me

kona manao e halawai pu me Keawehano, no na

olelo hoohiki a laua. O ka la nae hoi a Kapohu i

hele aku ai mai Honolua aku ma Kaanapali, oia

no ka la i hoouka ai ke kaua a ka poe Alapa, i

kapa ia hoi o ka poe Piipii, a oia no hoi ke kaua

ana i Kakanilua.

25. I ka hiki ana nae o Kapohu i kahi i hoouka

ke kaua, ua pau nae i ka luku ia ka poe Alapa,

a ua pau na’lii a me na koa i ka make, a o

Keawehano nae ke alii i koe e pepehiia ana; a

komo aku la o Kapohu iloko o na koa, a hoopau

aku la i ka pepehi ana ia Keawehano. Olelo aku la

nae o Kapohu ia Keawehano, i ka i ana aku,

“Aole keia o na olelo hoohiki a kaua, no ka mea,

o ka kaua i olelo ai, o ka la hoouka nui o ke kaua,

e noho ana kou alii me kana poe kaua, a pela no

hoi ko’u mau alii. I ka hoouka nui ana o na aoao

elua, a i hee ko’u mau alii me ka luku ia, alaila,

owau kau ola nui ia la; a pela hoi kou aoao, ina

hoi e lanakila ko’u mau alii, a luku nui ia kou

aoao, alaila, o oe ka’u ola nui ia la; a ilaila kaua e

ike ia ai he mau punahele i ko koua mau Moi. O

keia mainoino a maewaewa i loaa ia oe, he kaua

powa, nolaila, loaa ole oe ia’u.”

26. O keia mau olelo a Kapohu me Keawehano,

aia maloko o ke mele ka olelo ana, a he akamai

loa hoi laua i na olelo ana maloko o ke mele, aka,

no kuu manao aole oukou e ike ana i ke ano o na

loina maloko o na mele, a no ka loihi no hoi

kekahi, a no ke ano ike no hoi kekahi o ka poe

opiopio.

27. Ua lawe ola ia o Keawehano imua o Kahekili,

a ua hai aku o Kapohu ia Kahekili no ka laua

mau olelo hoohiki. Ua ae mai no o Kahekili, me

ka mo‘olelo o kahahana, mähele 1 1 2 11 2 0 ka ho‘oilina: journal of hawaiian language sources ● march 2002

kolamu (column) 2

19. Ua ho‘ololi ‘ia ‘o “malaa” ‘o ia ‘o “mälama.”

“Malaa” was changed to “mälama.”

20. Ua ho‘ololi ‘ia ‘o “Kahekilili” ‘o ia ‘o “Kahekili.”

“Kahekilili” was changed to “Kahekili.”

21. Ua ho‘ololi ‘ia ‘o “Kupukapuakea” ‘o ia ‘o

“Kapukapuäkea.”

“Kupukapuakea” was changed to “Kapukapuäkea.”

22. E ho‘omau ‘ia ka mo‘olelo o Kahahana ma kekahi

puke pai ‘o Ka Ho‘oilina.

The story of Kahahana continues in the next issue of

this journal.

kolamu (column) 3

16. He pani këia unuhi piha o ka Hawai‘i i këia hö‘ulu‘ulu

mana‘o ma Ruling Chiefs: “Kapohu had told Kahekili

of the vow, and the chief consented to free

Keawehano. And he took good care of him.”

This complete translation of the Hawaiian replaces

this summary from Ruling Chiefs: “Kapohu had told

Kahekili of the vow, and the chief consented to free

Keawehano. And he took good care of him.”

Keawehano inside the house,>16 but Keawehano

died of his many wounds. An intimate friend of

his came to see him when he heard that he was

dying. This was Kamoeau, a man very skillful in

observing signs in the heavens and on the earth

and all kinds of omens pertaining to the lives of

men and women. <He was taught by Kapa‘ahu-

lani on O‘ahu but lived on Hawai‘i with

Kalani‘öpu‘u.> Every chief held him sacred and

none was permitted to put him to death; Kahekili

himself was acquainted with him. His conversa-

tion with Keawehano was all carried on in chant,

but because the chant is too long I have not

included it in the story. Composing chants was

one of the arts of the ancients. In old times one

who lived in the country in poverty and hunger

would chant to the chief his need of bark cloth or

some other necessity, and his need would be

relieved. Chants of that kind were clever and

ingenious. Their composers were called “lovers

of wisdom” and “seekers of unseen things.”

28. After the battle of Kamoku‘ilima,

Kalani‘öpu‘u returned to Hawai‘i, and Kahekili

sailed to Moloka‘i to meet Kahahana, who was

living under tabu at the temple of Kapukapuäkea

of Wailau. The tabu being ended he went to live

at Kanalu, where all the men of Moloka‘i were

making the big water taro patch of Paikahawai.

Kahekili me kona mälama19 pono nö ho‘i iä

Keawehano ma loko o ka hale, akä, no ka nui loa

o nä ‘eha i loa‘a iä ia, no laila, ‘a‘ole nö i ola ‘o

Keawehano. A lohe ‘o Kamoeau ua make ‘o

Keawehano, pi‘i maila ‘o ia e ‘ike. ‘O Kamoeau, ‘o

ia nö kekahi kanaka akamai loa ma nä mea o ka

lani a me ka honua, a me nä loina o këlä ‘ano a

me këia ‘ano e pili ana i ke käne a me ka wahine.

Ua a‘o ‘ia ‘o ia e Kapa‘ahulani ma O‘ahu, akä, ua

noho na‘e ma Hawai‘i me Kalani‘öpu‘u. He

aikäne hoa aloha ia na Keawehano, a he kanaka

la‘a loa ia i këlä ali‘i këia ali‘i, ‘a‘ole e make; ua

‘ike nö ho‘i ‘o Kahekili iä ia. ‘O kä läua mau ‘ölelo

me Keawehano, ma loko wale nö o ke mele. (No

ka nui loa o ua mele nei, ‘a‘ole au i hui pü me ka

mo‘olelo; ‘o ia kekahi akamai o ka po‘e kahiko.)

I ka wä kahiko, i ka noho ‘ana i ke kua‘äina a

‘ilihune, a pöloli, aia nö ma loko o ke mele e noi

ai i ke ali‘i i kapa a me këlä mea, këia mea, a pau

a‘ela ka pilikia; ‘o nä mele o ia ‘ano, ua kü nö i ke

akamai a me ka no‘iau, a ua kapa ‘ia ho‘i läkou

he po‘e “akeakamai,” he po‘e “noi‘i i nä mea ‘ike

‘ole ‘ia.”

28. I ka pau ‘ana o ke kaua i Kamoku‘ilima, a ho‘i

‘o Kalani‘öpu‘u i Hawai‘i, a laila, holo akula ‘o

K a h e k i l i2 0 i Moloka‘i e häläwai pü me Kahahana,

käna keiki, ka Mö‘ï ho‘i o Moloka‘i a me O‘ahu.

‘O kä Kahahana hana na‘e o ia mau lä, e kapu ana

‘o ia iä Kapukapuäkea,2 1 ka heiau ma Wailau i

Moloka‘i. I ka pau ‘ana na‘e o ke kapu heiau, ua

ho‘i a‘e ‘o Kahahana e noho i Kanalu, e hana ana

nä känaka a pau o Moloka‘i iä Paikahawai, kekahi

lo‘i nui ma laila.2 2

kona malaa pono no hoi ia Keawehano maloko

o ka hale, aka, no ka nui loa o na eha i loaa ia ia,

nolaila, aole no i ola o Keawehano. A lohe o

Kamoeau ua make o Keawehano, pii mai la oia e

ike. O Kamoeau, oia no kekahi kanaka akamai

loa ma na mea o ka lani a me ka honua, a me na

loina o kela ano a me [keia] [ano] e pili ana i ke

kane a me ka wahine. Ua ao ia oia e Kapaahulani

ma o Oahu, aka, ua noho nae ma Hawaii me

Kalaniopuu. He aikane hoa aloha ia na

Keawehano, a he kan[a]ka laa loa ia i kela alii

keia alii, aole e make – ua ike no hoi o Kahekili ia

ia. O ka laua mau olelo me Keawehano, maloko

wale no o ke mele – (No ka nui loa o ua mele

nei, aole au i hui pu me ka moolelo; oia kekahi

akamai o ka poe kahiko). I ka wa kahiko, i ka

noho ana i ke kuaaina a ilihune, a pololi, aia no

maloko o ke mele e noi ai i ke alii i kapa a me kela

mea keia mea, a pau ae la ka pilikia; o na mele oia

ano, ua ku no i ke akamai a me ka noiau, a ua

kapa ia hoi lakou he poe “akeakamai,” he poe

“noii i na mea ike ole ia.”

28. I ka pau ana o ke kaua i Kamokuilima, a hoi

o Kalaniopuu i Hawaii, alaila, holo aku la o

Kahekilili i Molokai e halawai pu me Kahahana

kana keiki, ka Moi hoi o Molokai a me o Oahu.

O ka Kahahana hana nae o ia mau la, e kapu ana

oia ia Kupukapuakea ka heiau ma Wailau i

Molokai. I ka pau ana nae o ke kapu heiau, ua

hoi ae o Kahahana [e] noho i Kanalu, e hana ana

na kanaka a pau o Molokai ia Paikahawai kekahi

loi nui malaila.

1. THE

CLASS-BOOK OF

ANATOMY,

DESIGNED FOR SCHOOLS.

EXPLANATORY OF THE

FIRST PRINCIPLES

OF

HUMAN MECHANISM,

AS THE BASIS OF

PHYSICAL EDUCATION.

BY JEROME V. C. SMITH,

M. D.

“ – for I am fearfully and wonderfully made:”1

BOSTON:

ALLEN AND TICKNOR.

1834.

1. ANATOMY.

A DOCUMENT SHOWING

THE NATURE

OF THE HUMAN BODY.

This has been written in the

Hawaiian language so that the

students of the College at

Lahaina Luna may learn.

O‘AHU:

A PUBLICATION OF THE

MISSIONARY PRESS.

1838.

Students’ Materials, Anatomy, Part 1

This section of the journal will present materials for students. It begins with a textbook on anatomy

originally used at the College of Hawai‘i at Lahaina Luna (commonly known today as “Lahaina Luna

School”).

The book Anatomy (‘Anatomia) probably began as an English textbook written by Jerome Smith and

published in Boston in 1834. Apparently only one copy of the Smith book exists in Hawai‘i, and it may

have been the one originally owned by the missionary doctor Gerrit Judd. It is owned today by Straub

Hospital and is on loan to the Hawai‘i Medical Library, which kindly made it available for partial repro-

duction in the fourth column. It has been thought that Judd’s 1838 work on the same topic (‘Anatomia),

published in Honolulu and presented in the first column, was a translation of Smith’s book, although

the comparison below shows instead that Judd based his work only loosely on Smith. (Paragraph num-

bers in the third and fourth columns do not match because not all of Smith’s material is included here.)

In addition to Smith’s book, Straub Hospital and the Hawai‘i Medical Library have also kindly made

available their copy of Judd’s book and their digital photographs of it. Forbes 1088 (II:174–175);

Judd/Bell/Murdoch 166 (59–61).

1. ‘ANATOMIA.

HE PALAPALA IA E HÖ‘IKE

AI

I KE ‘ANO

O KO KE KANAKA KINO.

Ua käkau ‘ia ma ka ‘ölelo

Hawai‘i i mea e a‘o ai nä

haumäna o ke Kulanui ma

Lahaina Luna.

O‘AHU:

MEA PA‘I PALAPALA A NÄ

MISIONARI.

1838.

1. ANATOMIA.

HE PALAPALA IA E HOIKE

AI

I KE ANO

O KO KE KANAKA KINO.

Ua kakauia ma ka olelo

Hawaii, i mea e ao ai na

haumana o ke Kula Nui, ma

Lahainaluna.

OAHU:

MEA PAIPALAPALA A NA

MISIONARI.

1838.

Ka Puke Haumäna ‘o ‘Anatomia, Mähele 1

E hö‘ike ana këia mähele o ka puke pai i kekahi mau kumuhana na nä haumäna. E ho‘omaka ana me

kekahi puke ha‘awina e pili ana i ka ‘anatomia i ho‘ohana mua ‘ia ma ke Kulanui o Hawai‘i ma Lahaina

Luna.

He puke ha‘awina ‘ölelo Pelekänia nö paha ka puke ‘o ‘ A n a t o m i a i käkau ‘ia e Jerome Smith a i pa‘i ‘ia ma

Bosetona i ka makahiki 1834. He ho‘okahi wale nö kope o kä Smith i koe ma Hawai‘i nei, a ‘o ia paha kä

ke Kauka Gerrit Judd kope pono‘ï iho nö. Na ka Haukapila ‘o Straub ia kope i ‘ae ‘ia i ka Hale Waihona

Puke Lapa‘au o Hawai‘i näna i ‘ae ‘olu‘olu mai e pa‘i hou ‘ia kekahi o nä ‘ölelo ma ke kolamu ‘ehä o këia

puke pai. Ua mana‘o ‘ia, ‘o kä ke Kauka Judd puke, he unuhi i kä Smith, akä, ke ho‘ohälikelike ‘ia nä

kolamu o lalo iho nei, e ‘ike ‘ia auane‘i ka pili me ka pili ‘ole o nä puke ‘elua. (‘Oko‘a ka helu paukü ‘ana o

ke kolamu ‘ekolu me ka ‘ehä, ‘oiai ua ho‘opuka ‘ole ‘ia kekahi o kä Smith ma ‘ane‘i.) Me ia puke a Smith,

ua ‘ae ‘olu‘olu pü mai ka Hale Waihona Puke Lapa‘au o Hawai‘i i ke kope o kä Judd puke a me nä ki‘i

kikoho‘e o ia puke. Forbes 1088 (II:174–175); Judd/Bell/Murdoch 166 (59–61).

1. Halelü 139:14 o ka Paipala.

Psalm 139:14 of the Bible.

122 123

ka puke haumäna ‘o ‘anatomia, mähele 1 1 2 51 2 4 ka ho‘oilina: journal of hawaiian language sources ● march 2002

2. ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK.

ANATOMY is a useful science, which explains

the nature, office and structure of every part of

the human body.

3. From remote antiquity, men of learning and

persevering industry have labored to compre -

hend and explain the complicated machinery of

man, but at no period has the subject been better

understood than at the present. By the study of

this science, the condition of the species has been

ameliorated; extreme sufferings have been avoid -

ed; and in the aggregate, human life has been

prolonged.

4. On the minds of youth the influence exerted by

a contemplation of their own physical condition,

founded on a general knowledge of the situation

and functions of the different organs, must cer-

tainly have a beneficial tendency. As they discov-

er the exact regularity of parts; the beauty and

harmony resulting from particular combinations

of machinery, endowed with a high degree of

vitality, on the action of which, health, life and

happiness, are constantly depending, surely, it

would be strange indeed if they did not fall, in

humble adoration before that Supreme

Intelligence which created, and which sustains

them in existence.

. . .

6. ANATOMY IS DIVIDED

INTO NINE PARTS: <INCLUDING,>

Os-te-ol-o-gy, which treats of the bones.

. . .

2. ANATOMY.

The meaning of the word Anatomy is the expla-

nation of the body, its nature and its internal

structure: the bones, the muscles, the sinews, the

joints, the blood vessels, the organs, the digestive

system and the fluids. This document will explain

all of these things and their necessary functions

inside the body of a human being.

3. In enlightened lands, from remote antiquity

there have been many people who have labored

to comprehend and explain Anatomy. They have

carefully studied the bones, dissected many

corpses, and pondered on the nature of all they

saw. The majority is understood at this time.

Therefore, educated people respect the intelli -

gence of God who created and sustains the amaz-

ing things that make up their bodies. It would be

unthinkable indeed if they proclaimed, along

with the irreligious, “there is no God,” for they

have seen Him in that which He has created.

Here is another benefit to their pursuits: they

have come to understand diseases and sufferings;

and they have come to understand healing prac-

tices, for doctors of today are very learned,

unlike in the past. Only Jesus himself, and those

whose work is effective because of God’s assis-

tance, only these have a greater knowledge of

healing.

2. ‘ANATOMIA.

‘O ke ‘ano o këia ‘ölelo, ‘Anatomia, ‘o ia ka ‘ölelo

ho‘äkäka i ke kino, i kona ‘ano, a me nä mea a

pau i ho‘onoho ‘ia ma loko; ‘o nä iwi, ‘o nä ‘i‘o, ‘o

nä olonä, ‘o nä ‘ami, ‘o nä a‘a, ‘o nä pu‘upu‘u, ‘o

nä na‘au, a me nä wai. ‘O ia mau mea a pau a me

kä läkou hana ma loko o ke kino e pono ai ke

kanaka, ‘o ia kä këia palapala e ho‘äkäka aku ai.

3. Aia ma nä ‘äina na‘auao, ua nui ka po‘e i a‘o

ikaika ma ka ‘Anatomia mai ka wä kahiko mai.

Ua nänä pono läkou i nä iwi, ua kaha i nä

kupapa‘u he nui wale, a no‘ono‘o pono ka na‘au

i ke ‘ano o këlä mea këia mea a ka maka i ‘ike ai.

Ua maopopo ka nui i këia manawa. No laila,

mahalo ka po‘e na‘auao i ke akamai o ke Akua

ka mea näna i hana, a i mälama ho‘i i nä mea

kupaianaha o ko läkou kino. ‘A‘ole loa e hiki iä

läkou ke ‘ölelo me ka po‘e ‘aiä, “‘a‘ohe Akua” no

ka mea, ua ‘ike pono läkou iä ia ma loko o käna

mau hana ‘i‘o. Eia ho‘i kekahi mea pono o ko

läkou ‘imi ‘ana: ua loa‘a iä läkou ke ‘ano o nä

ma‘i a me nä ‘eha; a ua ‘ike i ka lapa‘au ‘ana: ua

akamai loa nä kähuna lapa‘au i nëia wä, ‘a‘ole e

like ma mua. ‘O Iesü a me ka po‘e hana mana nö

ke kökua ‘ia mai e ke Akua, ‘o läkou wale nö ka

po‘e i ‘oi aku ko läkou akamai i ka lapa‘au ‘ana.

2. ANATOMIA.

O ke ano o keia olelo, Anatomia, oia ka olelo

hoakaka i ke kino, i kona ano, a me na mea a pau

i hoonohoia maloko; o na iwi, o na io, o na olona,

o na ami, o na aa, o na puupuu, o na naau, a me

na wai. O ia mau mea a pau, a me ka lakou hana

maloko o ke kino e pono ai ke kanaka, oia ka

keia palapala e hoakaka aku ai.

3. Aia ma na aina naauao, ua nui ka poe i ao

ikaika ma ka Anatomia, mai ka wa kahiko mai.

Ua nana pono lakou i na iwi, ua kaha i na

kupapau he nui wale, a noonoo pono ka naau

i ke ano o kela mea keia mea a ka maka i ike ai.

Ua maopopo ka nui i keia manawa. Nolaila,

mahalo ka poe naauao i ke akamai o ke Akua

ka mea nana i hana, a i malama hoi i na mea

kupaianaha o ko lakou kino. Aole loa e hiki ia

lakou ke olelo me ka poe aia, “aohe Akua” no ka

mea, ua ike pono lakou ia ia maloko o kana mau

hana io. Eia hoi kekahi mea pono o ko lakou imi

ana; ua loaa ia lakou ke ano o na mai, a me na

eha; a ua ike i ka lapaau ana: ua akamai loa na

kahuna lapaau i neia wa, aole e like mamua. O

Iesu, a me ka poe hana mana no ke kokuaia mai

e ke Akua, o lakou wale no ka poe i oi aku ko

lakou akamai i ka lapaau ana.

ka puke haumäna ‘o ‘anatomia, mähele 1 1 2 71 2 6 ka ho‘oilina: journal of hawaiian language sources ● march 2002

7. OSTEOLOGY.

All the bones, in manhood, are hard, and almost

insensible, being composed of earth and lime,

held together by means of gelatin, a kind of glue,

secreted by appropriate vessels. The substance of

the long bones, as, for example, those of the

limbs, are compact, excepting at their extremi-

ties, where they become irregularly larger, and

slightly spongy. They are classed in the following

manner:

{1. Cylindrical: bones, as in the arms.

{2. Flat: bones, as in the shoulder blades.

{3. Irregular: bones, as the ribs and those of the

skull.

8. THEY ARE FURTHER

SUBDIVIDED INTO,

First: hollow bones, possessing marrow.

Second: flat bones, or those destitute of marrow.

9. Before arriving at about the age of twenty, the

ends of the bones are considerably spongy, and

imperfectly united to the main shaft, and, there-

fore, termed epiphises, from two Greek words,

meaning to grow upon, but afterwards, they

become firmly united.

10. The names of a majority of the bones are

very arbitrary; some of them, however, have their

appellation from a fancied resemblance to some

object; others, are named from their shape, con-

nexion, or supposed, or real use.

4. OSTEOLOGY.

The bones of the human body have an important

function. They are what makes it rigid and

strong. If man were made without bones like a

sea slug; how would he be able to stand upright?

How would he be able to walk? How would he be

able to work? Some bones are protective, as the

bones of the skull protect the brain, or the ribs

protect the lungs. Most bones are like levers,

working in the same way that a piece of wood

can move something heavy up and down, with

the muscles doing the pulling.

5. In childhood and youth, the bones are soft

and pliant, and do not easily break; but when a

person ages, they become hard, and when of

great age, they break frequently because of their

dryness and brittleness. Calcium1 makes the

bones hard, and it can be seen by burning a bone

in a fire, which makes the calcium visible as a

whitish powder, although it is not pure calcium

due to its having been mixed with other sub-

stances. Cartilage2 is also found inside bone. It is

a major component. Here is a way to see the car-

tilage: take a chicken’s thigh bone and put it in a

mixture of acid and water, and after perhaps

three days of being left to soak, the calcium will

have been eaten away by the acid, leaving the

bone without strength, and extremely soft and

almost as clear as glass.

6. When a baby is in early gestation, the bones

are quite gelatinous, and then calcium is brought

by the blood and deposited within the cartilage,

1. Hiki pü ke unuhi ‘ia këia ‘ölelo ‘o “lime.”

This word can also be translated as “lime.”

2. Hiki pü ke unuhi ‘ia këia ‘ölelo ‘o “gelatin” a “jelly”

p a h a .

This word can also be translated as “gelatin” or “jelly.”

4. NO NÄ IWI.

He nui ke kuleana o nä iwi ma loko o ke kino.

‘O ia ka mea e m ä l o ‘ e l o ‘ e ai a e ‘o‘ole‘a ai. Inä ua

hana ‘ia ke kanaka me ka iwi ‘ole e like me ka loli,

pehea lä e hiki ai iä ia ke kü a‘e i luna? Pehea lä e

hele ai? Pehea lä e hana ai? He p a l e kekahi iwi; me

nä iwi po‘o e pale ai i ka lolo, a me nä iwi ‘ao‘ao e

pale ai i ke akemämä. He u n e ka nui o nä iwi: e

like me ka lä‘au e mahiki ai i ka mea kaumaha,

pëlä nä iwi; a ‘o nä ‘i‘o ka mea e huki ai.

5. I ka wä ‘öpiopio, ua palupalu nä iwi, a he ‘olu,

‘a‘ole e hikiwawe ka ha‘i; a i o‘o ke kanaka, ua

‘o‘ole‘a, a i ka wä ‘elemakule, e ha‘i pinepine no

ka malo‘o a me ka ha‘iha‘i wale. ‘O ka puna ka

mea e ‘o‘ole‘a ai nä iwi; aia a1 kuni ‘ia ka iwi i ke

ahi, a laila e ‘ikea ai ka puna he ke‘oke‘o, ‘a‘ole

na‘e e like loa me ka puna maoli no ka hui pü ‘ia

o kekahi mau mea ma loko. ‘O ka pïlali kekahi

mea ma loko o nä iwi. ‘O ia kekahi kumu nui o

nä iwi. Eia ka mea e akäka ai ka pïlali. E lawe i ka

iwi ‘ühä moa, a e ho‘okomo i loko o kekahi ‘acida

i hui pü ‘ia me ka wai, pö ‘akolu paha ka waiho

‘ana i loko, a laila pau ka puna i ka ‘ai ‘ia e ka

‘acida, pau ka ‘o‘ole‘a, he palupalu wale nö, a he

akäka; kokoke e like me ke aniani kona akäka

‘ana.

6. I ka ho‘okauhua ‘ana o ke keiki, he pïlali wale

nö nä iwi, a ma hope iho, lawe maila ke koko i ka

puna a waiho ma waena o ka pïlali, a li‘uli‘u, ua

4. NO NA IWI.

He nui ke kuleana o na iwi maloko o ke kino. Oia

ka mea e maloeloe ai, a e oolea ai. Ina ua hanaia

ke kanaka me ka iwi ole, e like me ka loli, pehea

la e hiki ia ia ke ku ae iluna? Pehea la e hele?

Pehea la e hana? He pale kekahi iwi; me na iwi

poo e pale ai i ka lolo, a me na iwi aoao e pale ai

i ke ake mama. He une ka nui o na iwi: e like me

ka laau e mahiki ai i ka mea kaumaha, pela na

iwi; a o na io ka mea e huki ai.

5. I ka wa opiopio ua palupalu na iwi, a he olu,

aole e hiki wawe ka hai; a i oo ke kanaka ua

oolea, a i ka wa elemakule e hai pinepine no ka

maloo a me ka haihai wale. O ka puna ka mea e

oolea ai na iwi; aia i kuniia ka iwi i ke ahi, alaila

e ikea ai ka puna, he keokeo, aole nae e like loa

me ka puna maoli, no ka huipuia o kekahi mau

mea maloko. O ka pilali kekahi mea maloko o na

iwi. Oia kekahi kumu nui o na iwi. Eia ka mea e

akaka ai ka pilali. E lawe i ka iwi uha moa, a e

hookomo iloko o kekahi acida i huipuia me ka

wai, po akolu paha ka waiho ana iloko, alaila pau

ka puna i ka aiia e ka acida, pau ka oolea, he

palupalu wale no, a he akaka, kokoke like me ke

aniani kona akaka ana.

6. I ka hookauhua ana o ke keiki, he pilali wale

no na iwi, a mahope iho lawe mai la ke koko i ka

puna a waiho mawaena o ka pilali, a liuliu, ua

1. Ua ho‘ololi ‘ia ‘o “i” ‘o ia ‘o “a.”

“I” was changed to “a.”

ka puke haumäna ‘o ‘anatomia, mähele 1 1 2 91 2 8 ka ho‘oilina: journal of hawaiian language sources ● march 2002

11. Every cavity, hole, or prominence, even to

the burden of the science, has also a name, a

knowledge of which is a key to the parts, either

directly in contact, or lying in the immediate

vicinity.

12. Protuberances are termed processes, and are

generally the points of attachment for muscles or

ligaments; the first being the moving power, and

the latter, the bands which keep the ends of any

two bones in juxtaposition.

13. A natural skeleton is one, the bones of which

are held together by the original ligaments.

Remarkable specimens of these kinds of prepara-

tions are common in museums, and cabinets of

curiosities.

14. An artificial skeleton, is one, the individual

bones of which are united together by wires.

and after some time,after increasing in quantity,

the calcium causes the soft bones to become

hard. Take a look at a long bone and you will see

the hole where the blood goes in.

7. This depositing starts at the very center of the

bone, and if the bone should be a large one, then

it also starts at the extremities, with the calcium

making its way into the cartilage just like the sap

of a tree, uniting the whole together. If the bone

should be a long one, the calcium is deposited in

the center of the main shaft and at the ends as

well, but these two parts do not firmly join until a

person is matured, which is why young peoples’

bones splinter so easily should they become dry.

8. If a bone should break and then be put back

together at the break, the blood will deposit calci-

um all around the breakage. This is how bones

are rejoined to be strong once again.

9. Some bones are flat, some are cylindrical, and

some are irregular. They are all covered by a thin

slick covering which is the sheath that covers the

roughness and allows the bones to move

smoothly between the muscles.

10. The long, large bones are hollow so that they

are not quickly broken and so that they are light

in weight, and so that there is a place for the

marrow inside. Here is perhaps the role that the

marrow plays within the bones. During the

course of a sickness,a person cannot eat, for the

stomach does not feel right trying to digest food

to nourish the body, and so the food becomes

ho‘omähuahua ‘ia mai ia mea, lilo ihola ka mea

palupalu i ‘o‘ole‘a, no ke komo ‘ana o ka puna

ma loko. E nänä aku ‘oe i ka iwi lö‘ihi a ‘ike i ka

puka kahi e komo ai ke koko.

7. Ua ho‘omaka ‘ia këia hana ma waenakonu o

ka iwi, a inä he iwi nui, aia kekahi ho‘omaka ‘ana

ma nä ‘ao‘ao. Hele ka puna ma waena o ka pïlali

e like me2 ka nao o ka lä‘au, a ho‘oku‘i kekahi me

kekahi. Inä he iwi lö‘ihi, e waiho ‘ia ka puna ma

waena a ma nä po‘o kekahi, ‘a‘ole e hui ‘ia këia a

o‘o ke kanaka, no laila helele‘i nä iwi lö‘ihi o ke

kanaka hou ke malo‘o.

8. Inä i ha‘i ka iwi a ho‘opili hou ‘ia nä wahi i

ha‘i, a laila, lawe mai ke koko i ka puna a waiho a

puni ia wahi: ‘o ia ka mea e käpili hou ai i ka iwi

a pa‘a.

9. Ua pälahalaha kekahi mau iwi, he poepoe

lö‘ihi kekahi, a he ‘ewa‘ewa kekahi. Ua pau läkou

i ka uhi ‘ia e kekahi mea lahilahi ‘ü‘ua, ‘o ia ka

wahï o ka iwi, ‘o kona mea e nalo ai i ke kalakala

a e pahe‘e ai i ka ‘oni ‘ana ma waena o nä ‘i‘o.

10. Ua hakahaka nä iwi lö‘ihi nui i pa‘a läkou,

‘a‘ole e ha‘i wawe, a i mämä läkou, a i wahi ho‘i e

waiho ai ka momona. Eia paha ke kuleana o ka

momona ma loko o nä iwi. I ka wä e ma‘i ai ke

kanaka, ‘a‘ole e hiki iä ia ke ‘ai i ka ‘ai, ‘a‘ole e

pono ka ‘öpü ke ho‘onohonoho i ka ‘ai a lilo ia i

mea e mä‘ona ai, akä, ua lilo ia i mea ‘awa‘awa a

me ka wela, a me ka 3 nahu, ma loko o kona ‘öpü:

hoomahuahuaia mai ia mea, lilo iho la ka mea

palupalu i oolea, no ke komo ana o ka puna

maloko. E nana aku oe i ka iwi loihi a ike i ka

puka kahi e komo ai ke koko.

7. Ua hoomakaia keia hana, mawaena konu o ka

iwi, a ina he iwi nui, aia kekahi hoomaka ana ma

na aoao, hele ka puna mawaena o ka pilali e like

ma ka nao o ka laau, a hookui kekahi me kekahi.

Ina he iwi loihi, e waihoia ka puna mawaena a ma

na poo kekahi, aole e huiia keia a oo ke kanaka,

nolaila helelei na iwi loihi o ke kanaka hou ke

m a l o o .

8. Ina i hai ka iwi a hoopili hou ia na wahi i hai,

alaila, lawe mai ke koko i ka puna a waiho, a

puni ia wahi: oia ka mea e kapili hou ai ka iwi a

paa.

9. Ua palahalaha kekahi mau iwi, he poepoe

loihi kekahi, a he ewaewa kekahi. Ua pau lakou i

ka uhiia e kekahi mea lahilahi uuwa, oia ka wahi

o ka iwi, o kona mea e nalo ai i ke kalakala, a e

pahee ai i ka oni ana mawaena o na io.

10. Ua hakahaka na iwi loihi nui, i paa lakou

aole e hai wawe, a i mama lakou, a i wahi hoi e

waiho ai ka momona. Eia paha ke kuleana o ka

momona maloko o na iwi. I ka wa e mai ai ke

kanaka, aole e hiki ia ia ke ai i ka ai, aole e pono

ka opu ke hoonohonoho i ka ai a lilo ia i mea e

maona ai, aka, ua lilo ia i mea awaawa a me ka

wela, a me ke nahu, maloko o kona opu: ia

2. Ua ho‘ololi ‘ia ‘o “ma” ‘o ia ‘o “me.”

“Ma” was changed to “me.”

3. Ua ho‘ololi ‘ia ‘o “ke” ‘o ia ‘o “ka.”

“Ke” was changed to “ka.”

ka puke haumäna ‘o ‘anatomia, mähele 1 1 3 11 3 0 ka ho‘oilina: journal of hawaiian language sources ● march 2002

15. In the human skeleton, there are two hun-

dred and fifty-two separate bones. Those who

labor hard, have sometimes an extra number,

which form near the joints of the thumb, fore fin-

ger and toes. They are called sesamoids, from

their resemblance to the seed of the Sesamum

plant. They are useful in increasing the power of

the muscles wherever they grow.

soured and the person becomes feverish with a

stomach-ache. In such circumstances, the mar-

row is carried by the blood to all parts of the

body, which is what makes the person strong

again despite having been ill. But should the

sickness continue for some time, all of that mar-

row is exhausted, and so the fat from all over the

body is used and the person quickly becomes

emaciated due to the illness. When the illness is

over, and the stomach starts to take nutriment,

the body strengthens and the marrow and fat,

which were borrowed, are all returned, and the

bones are once again filled with marrow. It is for

this reason that the right thing to do when sick is

not to eat: the stomach is repulsed by food for it

knows that food is burdensome. A sick person

should not be afraid of hunger; if the stomach

refuses food, a person will not quickly die of

starvation. God has been extremely benevolent

in his supplying of marrow within the bones,

that the body may continue to survive in times

of sickness.

11. There are two hundred and forty bones in

our body, and for their study, they have been

divided into three groups. 1. The bones of the

head. 2. The bones of the trunk. 3. The bones of

the extremities.

i ia manawa, ki‘i ‘ia a‘ela ua momona lä, a na4

ke koko e lawe akula a hiki i nä wahi a pau o ke

kino, ‘o ia ka mea e ikaika ai ke kanaka i ka wä

ma‘i. Akä, i li‘uli‘u ka ma‘i ‘ana, pau ia momona,

a laila, ki‘i ‘ia ka momona o ke kino a puni,

hikiwawe ihola ka wïwï i ua ma‘i lä. A pau ka

ma‘i, komo hou ka ‘ai ma loko o ka ‘öpü, lilo ia

i mea e ikaika ai, a laila, e ho‘i hou ua momona

lä i lawe ‘ia aku ai ma mua, a piha hou nä iwi i

ka momona. No ia mau mea, e pono ke waiho i

ka ‘ai i ka manawa ma‘i: he ho‘opailua ka ‘öpü i

ka ‘ai, no ka mea ua ‘ike ‘ia he mea kaumaha ka

‘ai. Mai maka‘u ka ma‘i i ka pöloli; inä e hö‘ole

ka ‘öpü i ka ‘ai, ‘a‘ole e make koke ke kanaka i

ka pöloli. Nani ka lokomaika‘i o ke Akua i kona

ho‘omäkaukau ‘ana i ka momona ma loko o nä

iwi i mea e ola ai ke kino i ka manawa ma‘i.

11. ‘Alua haneli me ke kanahä iwi i loko o ke

kino o käkou,5 a i ke a‘o ‘ana, ua pu‘unaue ‘ia

i ‘ekolu papa. 1. ‘O nä iwi o ke po‘o. 2. ‘O nä iwi

o ke kino pono‘ï. 3. ‘O nä iwi o nä lälä.

manawa kiiia ae la ua momona la, a ma ke koko

e lawe aku la, a hiki i na wahi a pau o ke kino, oia

ka mea e ikaika ai ke kanaka i ka wa mai, aka i

liuliu ka mai ana, pau ia momona, alaila kiiia ka

momona o ke kino a puni, hiki wawe iho la ka

wiwi i ua mai la. A pau ka mai, komo hou ka ai

maloko o ka opu, lilo ia i mea e ikaika ai, alaila

e hoi hou ua momona la i laweia’ku ai mamua,

a piha hou na iwi i ka momona. No ia mau mea,

e pono ke waiho i ka ai i ka manawa mai: he

hoopailua ka opu i ka ai, no ka mea ua ike ia

he mea kaumaha ka ai. Mai makau ka mai i ka

pololi; ina e hoole ka opu i ka ai, aole e make

koke ke kanaka i ka pololi. Nani ka lokomaikai o

ke Akua i kona hoomakaukau ana i ka momona

maloko o na iwi, i mea e ola ai ke kino i ka

manawa mai.

11. Alua haneri me ke kanaha iwi iloko o ke kino

o kakou, a i ke ao ana ua puunaueia i ekolu papa.

1 O na iwi o ke poo. 2 O na iwi o ke kino ponoi. 3

O na iwi o na lala.

4. Ua ho‘ololi ‘ia ‘o “ma” ‘o ia ‘o “na.”

“Ma” was changed to “na.”

5. ‘Oko‘a ka huina nui o nä iwi ma kä Lahaina Luna a

‘oko‘a ma kä Smith. ‘Oko‘a ho‘i ia mau huina nui ‘elua

i ko këia lä.

The number of bones differ between the Lahaina

Luna version and the Smith text. Also, both differ

from today’s accepted number.

ka puke haumäna ‘o ‘anatomia, mähele 1 1 3 31 3 2 ka ho‘oilina: journal of hawaiian language sources ● march 2002

16. THE SKELETON IS

DIVIDED INTO

First: the head

Second: the trunk.

Third: the extremities.

17. FIRST DIVISION.

There are fifty-five bones entering into the com-

position of the head, by including thirty-two

teeth.

12. THE BONES OF THE HEAD.

There are sixty-three bones in the head;

8 bones of the skull surrounding the brain

14 bones in the face

32 teeth (in an adult)

8 bones of the ear

1 bone of the tongue

63

13. People’s heads don’t all look the same. God

made all slightly different. The same goes for the

face: one cannot find two people with exactly the

same features, even if an extensive search is

made in all lands. Some twins have very similar

features, but upon closer inspection, one can find

something to tell them apart.

14. It is an important thing in unenlightened

nations to change the natural form of the heads

of their children and reshape them. Some apply

pressure on the sides to make them slope: some

do it to the forehead, and as for the Hawaiians,

they think that heads with a high sloping fore-

12. ‘O NÄ IWI O KE PO‘O.

He kanaonokumamäkolu iwi o ke po‘o; 6

8 iwi o ke po‘o pono‘ï a puni ka lolo,

14 iwi o ka maka,

32 niho (ko ke kanaka makua),

8 iwi pepeiao,

1 iwi alelo,

63

13. ‘A‘ole e like loa nä po‘o o känaka ke nänä

aku. Ua hana ke Akua he ‘ano ‘oko‘a iki ko

kekahi, a he ‘oko‘a iki ko kekahi. Pëlä nö nä

maka: ‘a‘ole loa e loa‘a i 7 nä känaka ‘elua, ua like

loa ko läua helehelena, ke ‘imi nui ma nä ‘äina a

pau. ‘O kekahi mau mähoe, ua kokoke like ka

hi‘ona, akä, inä e nänä pono aku, a laila, ‘ikea

mai ko läua mea e ‘oko‘a ai.

14. He mea nui i nä ‘äina na‘aupö ke ho‘ololi aku

i ke ‘ano maoli o nä po‘o o kä läkou mau kamali‘i

i ‘ano hou. ‘Öpä kekahi ma nä ‘ao‘ao o ke po‘o e

lapa ai ma nä ‘ao‘ao: ma ka lae kekahi po‘e, a ‘o ko

Hawai‘i nei, mana‘o lä läkou ‘o ke po‘o lapalapa

ma ka lae a ma ka hope, ‘o ia ke po‘o maika‘i. Ma

12. O NA IWI O KE POO.

He kanaonokumamakolu iwi o ke poo;

8 iwi o ke poo ponoi a puni ka lolo,

14 iwi o ka maka,

32 niho, (ko ke kanaka makua,)

8 iwi pepeiao,

1 iwi alelo,

63

13. Aole e like loa na poo o kanaka ke nana aku.

Ua hana ke Akua, he ano okoa iki ko kekahi,

a he okoa iki ko kekahi. Pela no na maka: aole

loa e loaaia na kanaka elua, ua like loa ko laua

helehelena, ke imi nui ma na aina a pau. O

kekahi mau mahoe, ua kokoke like ka hiona,

aka, ina e nana pono aku alaila ikea mai ko laua

mea e okoa ai.

14. He mea nui i na aina naaupo ke hoololi aku

i ke ano maoli o na poo o ka lakou mau kamalii

i ano hou. Opa kekahi ma na aoao o ke poo e lapa

ai ma na aoao: ma ka lae kekahi poe, a o ko

Hawaii nei, manao la lakou o ke poo lapalapa

ma ka lae a ma ka hope, oia ke poo maikai. Ma

6. ‘Oko‘a ka nui o nä iwi ma ka puke o Lahaina Luna,

‘oko‘a ma ka puke a Smith no ke komo ‘ole o nä iwi

‘ewalu o ka pepeiao i loko o ka huina nui.

The number of bones differ between the Lahaina

Luna version and the Smith text because the Smith

text excludes from its total the eight bones of the ear.

7. Ua ho‘ololi ‘ia ‘o “loaaia” ‘o ia ‘o “loa‘a i.”

“Loaaia” was changed to “loa‘a i.”

ka puke haumäna ‘o ‘anatomia, mähele 1 1 3 51 3 4 ka ho‘oilina: journal of hawaiian language sources ● march 2002

18. EIGHT BONES IN THE SKULL.

One os frontis, above the eyes, constituting the

forehead.

Two ossa parietalia, making the sides, above the

ears.

One os occipitis, at the lower and back part of the

head.2

Two ossa temporum, or temple bones.

One os ethmoides, or sieve-like bone, lying

between the brain and root of the nose.

One os sphenoides, being the bottom of the skull,

nearly concealed.

head and back are the best shaped ones. In

enlightened lands, people leave the heads of their

children alone, just as the Lord made them.

15. THE BONES OF THE HEAD.

1 Forehead Bone <(os frontis)>, constituting the

forehead.

2 Rounded Bones <(ossa parietalia)>, making

the sides of the head,

1 Rear Bone <(os occipitis)>, at the back of the

head.

2 Temple Bones <(ossa temporum)>, making the

temples,

1 Sieve Bone <(os ethmoides)>, lying between

the brain and the root of the nose.

1 Wedge-shaped Bone <(os sphenoides)>, being

within the skull and below the brain.3

16. FOREHEAD BONE.

This bone <(os frontis)> is one piece in the

adult, but when a child is born, it is split down

the middle, from the top to the bottom forming

two bones. The bone is very thin; it is like a clam

in appearance. There is a cavity at the intersec-

tion with the nasal bones, between the two sides

of the forehead bone, which lies on both the

inside and outside. Upon this cavity depends the

sound of the voice. The cavity is responsible for

the sounds as like a drum. Should one be suffer-

ing from that illness called nasal congestion, the

3. Ma ka ‘ölelo Läkina, ‘o “os” he iwi ia. ‘O “ossa” ka helu

nui.

In Latin, “os” means “bone.” In the plural it is “ossa.”

2. Ua ho‘one‘e ‘ia këia inoa iwi i ‘ane‘i i mea e külike ai

me ke kikokikona ma ‘Anatomia. Ua helu ‘ia ia iwi ‘o

ia ka hope o ka papa inoa o nä iwi po‘o ma kä Smith

puke.

This bone’s name was moved out of sequence in the

text in order to parallel the Lahaina Luna version – it

was originally at the bottom of this list of skull bones

in the Smith book.

nä ‘äina na‘auao, e waiho wale läkou i nä po‘o o

kä läkou mau kamali‘i me ka maika‘i a ke Akua i

hana ai iä läkou.

15. NÄ IWI O KE PO‘O PONO‘Ï.

1 Iwi Lae, ma ka lae.

2 Iwi Hua, ma nä hua o ke po‘o,

1 Iwi Hope, aia ma hope o ke po‘o.

2 Iwi Maha, ma nä maha,

1 Iwi Känana, ma waena o ka lolo a me ke kumu

o ka ihu.

1 Iwi ‘Öpe‘ape‘a, aia ma loko, ma lalo o ka lolo.

16. IWI LAE.

Ho‘okahi këia iwi i ka wä e o‘o ai ke kanaka, akä,

i ka hänau ‘ana o ke keiki, ua moku ia ma waena,

mai luna a hala i lalo i ‘elua iwi. He iwi lahilahi;

me he ‘ölepe lä kona helehelena. Aia kekahi

hakahaka ma ke kihi e pili ana me nä iwi ihu,

ma waena o nä ‘ao‘ao ‘elua o ka iwi lae, ‘o ka

‘ao‘ao ma loko a me ka ‘ao‘ao ma waho. He mea

këia e kani ai ka leo. No ka hakahaka ke kani ‘ana

me he pahu lä. A i loa‘a ka ma‘i i kapa ‘ia he ihu

pa‘a, pa‘a ihola ka puka e komo ai ka makani i

loko o ua hakahaka nei, no laila, ua kanunu8 ka

na aina naauao, e waiho wale lakou i na poo o ka

lakou mau kamalii, me ka maikai a ke Akua i

hana’i ia lakou.

15. NA IWI O KE POO PONOI.

1 Iwi Lae, ma ka lae.

2 Iwi Hua, ma na hua o ke poo,

1 Iwi Hope, aia o hope o ke poo.

2 Iwi Maha, ma na maha,

1 Iwi Kanana, mawaena o ka lolo a me ke kumu

o ka ihu.

1 Iwi Opeapea, aia maloko, malalo o ka lolo.

16. IWI LAE.

Hookahi keia iwi i ka wa e oo ai ke kanaka, aka

i ka hanau ana o ke keiki ua mokuia mawaena,

mai luna a hala i lalo i elua iwi. He iwi lahilahi;

me he olepe la kona helehelena. Aia kekahi

hakahaka ma ke kihi e pili ana me na iwi ihu,

mawaena o na aoao elua o ka iwi lae, o ka aoao

maloko a me ka aoao mawaho. He mea keia e

kani ai ka leo No ka hakahaka ke kani ana me

he pahu la. A i loaa ka mai i kapaia he ihu paa,

paa iho la ka puka e komo ai ka makani iloko o

ua hakahaka nei, nolaila ua kanunu ka leo. Ma

8. Ua like ka mana‘o o kanunu me kanulu.

Kanunu is a variant of kanulu.

ka puke haumäna ‘o ‘anatomia, mähele 1 1 3 71 3 6 ka ho‘oilina: journal of hawaiian language sources ● march 2002

passage where the air enters these cavities is

closed up, therefore making the voice muted and

deep in tone. On this bone is part of the eye sock-

et and on the side is a ridge attached to the tem-

ple muscle which pulls the jaw bone up. Also on

this bone is the edge where the eyebrow is

attached.

leo. Ma këia iwi kekahi hapa o ka maka lua, a ma

ka ‘ao‘ao, he lapa no ka pili ‘ana o ka ‘i‘o maha ka

mea e huki ai ka iwi ä i luna. Ma këia iwi ho‘i nä

lihi, kahi e pili ai nä ku‘emaka.9

keia iwi kekahi hapa o ka makalua, a ma ka aoao,

he lapa no ka pili ana o ka io maha ka mea e huki

ai ka iwi a iluna. Ma keia iwi hoi na lihi, kahi e

pili ai na kuemaka.

9. E komo nä mähele hou o ‘Anatomia i loko o nä puke

pai e hiki mai ana.

The presentation of ‘Anatomia will continue in future

issues of the journal.

1. LAWS

OF HIS MAJESTY

KAMEHAMEHA III,

KING OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS,

PASSED BY THE

NOBLES AND REPRESENTATIVES

AT THEIR SESSION,

1851.

HONOLULU:

PRINTED BY ORDER OF THE

GOVERNMENT.

1851.

A Special Tribute to Public Safety Personnel

From time to time the journal will present special Legacy Materials. The document below is included in

honor of our public safety personnel – including fire fighters and police officers – with gratitude for

their unstinting service and sacrifice. The document is the legislation that established the Honolulu Fire

Department, one of the oldest organized departments in the United States. John Keoni Clark, Honolulu

Deputy Fire Chief, kindly shared this important historical document.

To ensure the protection of the residents of Honolulu from fire, this law established the Honolulu Fire

Department and was enacted by King Kamehameha III, Keoni Ana (Premier) and the Legislature on

May 8, 1851. Published as part of Känäwai o ka Mö‘ï Kamehameha III, Ke Ali‘i o ko Hawai‘i Pae ‘Äina,

i Kau ‘ia e nä Ali‘i ‘Aha‘ölelo a me ka Po‘e i Koho ‘ia i loko o ka ‘Aha‘ölelo o ka Makahiki 1851, Honolulu,

1851, and Laws of His Majesty Kamehameha III, King of the Hawaiian Islands, Passed by the Nobles and

Representatives at their Session, 1851, Honolulu, 1851.

1. KÄNÄWAI

O KA MÖ‘Ï,

KAMEHAMEHA III,

KE ALI‘I O KO HAWAI‘I PAE ‘ÄINA,

I KAU ‘IA E NÄ

ALI‘I ‘AHA‘ÖLELO, A ME KA

PO‘E I KOHO ‘IA,

I LOKO O KA ‘AHA‘ÖLELO O KA

MAKAHIKI 1851.

HONOLULU,

PA‘I ‘IA MAMULI O KE KAUOHA A KE

AUPUNI.

1851.

1. KANAWAI

O KA MOI,

KAMEHAMEHA III,

KE ALII O KO HAWAII PAE AINA,

I KAUIA E NA

ALII AHAOLELO, A ME KA

POEIKOHOIA,

ILOKO O KA AHAOLELO O KA

MAKAHIKI 1851.

HONOLULU,

PAIIA MAMULI O KE KAUOHA A KE

AUPUNI.

1851.

He Ho‘omaika‘i Küikawä i nä Känaka Maka‘ala

i ka Palekana o ka Lehulehu

Aia aku aia mai, e ho‘opuka hou ‘ia ana he Palapala Ho‘oilina küikawä. I mea ka palapala o lalo iho nei

e ho‘omaika‘i ai i nä känaka kia‘i ola o ka lehulehu, e like ho‘i me nä kinai ahi a me nä mäka‘i, e kämau

wiwo ‘ole aku nei i loko o ka ho‘oweliweli nui ‘ia mai nei o ko ‘Amelika e ko ka ‘äina ‘ë. Aia ma lalo iho

nei ke känäwai näna i ho‘okumu ka ‘Oihana Kinai Ahi o Honolulu, kekahi o nä ‘oihana kahiko loa o

‘Amelika nei. Ua ho‘ouna ‘olu‘olu ‘ia mai ke kope o ia känäwai e John Keoni Clark, ka Hope Luna Nui

o ka ‘Oihana Kinai Ahi o Honolulu.

Ua ho‘okumu ‘ia ka ‘Oihana Kinai Ahi o Honolulu ma muli o ke känäwai i kau ‘ia e Kamehameha III,

Keoni Ana (ke Kuhina Nui) a me ka ‘Aha‘ölelo ma ka lä 8 o Mei, 1851. Ua ho‘opuka ‘ia he mähele o ke

Känäwai o ka Mö‘ï Kamehameha III, Ke Ali‘i o ko Hawai‘i Pae ‘Äina, i Kau ‘ia e nä Ali‘i ‘Aha‘ölelo a me

ka Po‘e i Koho ‘ia i loko o ka ‘Aha‘ölelo o ka Makahiki 1851, Honolulu, 1851; a maka ‘ölelo Pelekänia,

Laws of His Majesty Kamehameha III, King of the Hawaiian Islands, Passed by the Nobles and

Representatives at their Session, 1851, Honolulu, 1851.

138 139

he ho‘omaika‘i küikawä i nä känaka maka‘ala i ka palekana o ka lehulehu 1 4 11 4 0 ka ho‘oilina: journal of hawaiian language sources ● march 2002

kolamu (column) 2

1 . Ua ho‘ololi ‘ia ‘o “hooimalima” ‘o ia ‘o “ho‘olimalima.”

“Hooimalima” was changed to “ho‘olimalima.”

kolamu (column) 3

1. ‘O ka ‘ölelo Pelekänia ma këia kolamu, ‘o ia ka unuhi

kühelu na ke aupuni i ka MH 1851. ‘A‘ole nö na‘e ia

he unuhi piha pono i nä manawa a pau.

The English in this column is as published in the

official translation by the government in 1851.

Sometimes the translation is not a precise one.

2. Ua ho‘ololi ‘ia ‘o “fireman” ‘o ia ‘o “firemen.”

“Fireman” was changed to “firemen.”

3. Ua ho‘ololi ‘ia ‘o “fire-men” ‘o ia ‘o “firemen.”

“Fire-men” was changed to “firemen.”

AN ACT

TO ORGANIZE A FIRE DEPARTMENT

FOR THE CITY OF HONOLULU.

2. Whereas public necessity demands that a new

law shall be passed for the protection of the resi-

dents of Honolulu from the calamities of a con-

flagration, Be it enacted by the Houses of

Nobles and Representatives of the Hawaiian

Islands, in Legislative Council assembled :1

3. ARTICLE I. OF THE

ORGANIZATION OF THE FIRE

DEPARTMENT OF HONOLULU.

Section 1. The Fire Department of the City of

Honolulu, shall consist of a Chief Engineer, four

Fire Wardens and so many firemen 2 as may be

approved by the Chief Engineer, and who shall be

respectively designated by the several appella-

tions aforesaid.

4. Section 2. The Chief Engineer shall be

appointed by the Governor of O‘ahu upon the

recommendation of not less than twenty resi-

dents of Honolulu, each of whom shall hold

lease-hold estates, or estates in fee simple, situat-

ed in Honolulu, the annual value of which shall

be not less than one hundred dollars.

5. Section 3. The four Fire Wardens shall be

appointed by the Chief Engineer, with the appro-

bation of the Governor of O‘ahu, upon the rec-

ommendation of not less than twenty firemen.3

6. Section 4. The terms of office of the Chief

Engineer and Fire Wardens shall be not less than

one year, or until others are appointed in their

place.

HE KÄNÄWAI

HO‘ONOHO I KA ‘OIHANA KINAI AHI

NO KE KÜLANAKAUHALE ‘O

HONOLULU.

2. No ka mea, no ka pilikia o nä känaka o

Honolulu nei i ke ahi, he mea pono nö e kaulia

he känäwai e maluhia ai läkou, i ‘ole läkou e pau

i ke ahi, no laila, ua ho‘oholo ‘ia e ka Mö‘ï, me

ke Kuhina Nui, a me nä Ali‘i e noho kokoke ana,

këia känäwai ma lalo nei, e lilo i känäwai e like

me ka ‘ölelo ma hope, a e pa‘a nö a hiki i ka pau

‘ana o ka ‘Aha‘ölelo e hiki mai ana.

3. MOKUNA I.

NO KA ‘OIHANA KINAI AHI MA

HONOLULU.

Paukü 1. Eia nä mea komo i loko o këia

‘Oihana: he Luna Nui, ‘ehä ona Kökua, a me nä

känaka kinai a ka Luna Nui i mana‘o ai he pono;

a e kapa ‘ia läkou e like me ka ‘ölelo ma luna iho.

4. Paukü 2. Na ke Kia‘äina o O‘ahu e ho‘okohu

i ka Luna Nui ma muli o ka mana‘o o nä känaka

e noho ana ma Honolulu, ‘a‘ole na‘e emi ma lalo

o ka iwakälua, he mau känaka mea kuleana ‘äina

ho‘olimalima1 a ‘alodio paha i loko o Honolulu,

a ‘o ka waiwai puka makahiki o ia mau kuleana,

‘a‘ole emi ma lalo o ka hanele kälä ho‘okahi.

5. Paukü 3. Na ka Luna Nui o läkou e koho

i kona mau Kökua, me ka ‘ae o ke Kia‘äina o

O‘ahu, mamuli o ka mana‘o o nä känaka kinai

ahi, ‘a‘ole emi ma lalo o ka iwakälua.

6. Paukü 4. ‘O ka manawa e noho ai ka Luna

Nui, a me kona mau Kökua ma ka ‘Oihana, ‘a‘ole

emi ma lalo o ka makahiki ho‘okahi; a i ‘ole ia,

e mau nö, a koho ‘ia nä mea pani i ko läkou

hakahaka.

HE KANAWAI

HOONOHO I KA OIHANA KINAI AHI

NO KE KULANAKAUHALE O

HONOLULU.

2. No ka mea, no ka pilikia o na kanaka o

Honolulu nei i ke Ahi, he mea pono no e kaulia

he Kanawai e maluhia’i lakou, i ole lakou e pau

i ke Ahi, nolaila, ua hooholoia e ka Moi, me ke

Kuhinanui, a me na Lii e noho kokoke ana, keia

Kanawai malalo nei, e lilo i Kanawai e like me ka

olelo mahope, a e paa no a hiki i ka pau ana o ka

Ahaolelo e hiki mai ana.

3. MOKUNA I.

NO KA OIHANA KINAI AHI MA

HONOLULU.

Pauku 1. Eia na mea komo iloko o keia Oihana;

he Luna Nui, eha ona Kokua, a me na kanaka

kinai a ka Luna Nui i manao he pono; a e kapaia

lakou e like me ka olelo maluna iho.

4. Pauku 2. Na ke Kiaaina o Oahu e hookohu

i ka Luna Nui mamuli o ka manao o na kanaka

e noho ana ma Honolulu, aole nae emi malalo

o ka iwakalua, he mau kanaka mea kuleana aina

hooimalima, a alodio paha iloko o Honolulu, a o

ka waiwai puka makahiki o ia mau kuleana, aole

emi malalo o ka haneri dala hookahi.

5. Pauku 3. Na ka Luna Nui o lakou e koho i

kona mau Kokua, me ka ae o ke Kiaaina o Oahu,

mamuli o ka manao o na kanaka kinai ahi, aole

emi malalo o ka iwakalua.

6. Pauku 4. O ka manawa e noho ai ka Luna

Nui, a me kona mau kokua ma ka Oihana, aole

emi malalo o ka makahiki hookahi; a i ole ia,

e mau no, a kohoia na mea pani i ko lakou

hakahaka.

he ho‘omaika‘i küikawä i nä känaka maka‘ala i ka palekana o ka lehulehu 1 4 31 4 2 ka ho‘oilina: journal of hawaiian language sources ● march 2002

7. ARTICLE II. OF THE DUTIES OF

THE CHIEF ENGINEER.

Section 1. The Chief Engineer shall, in all cases

of fire, have the sole and absolute control and

command over all the members of the Fire

Depart-ment, and it shall be the duty of the said

Chief Engineer to direct the Fire Wardens to take

proper measures that the several fire engines in

the possession of the Fire Department be located

in the most advantageous situations, and be duly

worked for the effectual extinguishing of fires;

and moreover it shall be the duty of the said

Chief Engineer, to grant the custody and use of

the fire engines, fire buckets and other fire appa-

ratus belonging to the government to such fire-

men as he may deem proper, and assume the

control of them at his pleasure, and as often as

once in three months examine into the condition

of the fire engines, fire buckets and other fire

apparatus, and fire engine houses belonging to

the government, and report the condition of the

same to the Governor of O‘ahu, together with the

names of all of the persons in the Fire

Department, and when any of the said fire

engines and other apparatus shall require to be

repaired, the Chief Engineer of the Fire

Department at the request of the firemen having

the same in charge, through their officers,shall

cause the same to be well and sufficiently

repaired, provided such expense shall not exceed

one hundred dollars.

8. Section 2. In case the Chief Engineer should

be absent from a fire, one of the Fire Wardens,

first arriving at a fire shall act as Chief Engineer,

until the arrival of that officer.

9. ARTICLE III. OF THE DUTIES OF

FIRE WARDENS.

Section 1. The Fire Wardens shall attend at all

fires, and be subject to the direction of the Chief

7. MOKUNA II.

KA HANA A KA LUNA NUI.

Paukü 1. Aia i ka Luna Nui ka ‘ölelo ma luna o

nä mea a pau i loko o këia ‘Oihana i ka wä e wela

ana kekahi hale i ke ahi, a na ua Luna Nui nei e

kauoha aku i kona mau Kökua e waiho i nä ka‘a

kinai ahi e pili ana i këia ‘Oihana ma kahi

küpono; a e hana pono ‘ia i mea e kinai ai i ke

ahi, a na ua Luna Nui nei nö ho‘i e hä‘awi aku i

nä ka‘a kinai ahi, a me nä päkeke, a me ka lako

e pili ana no ke aupuni, i nä känaka kinai ahi äna

i mana‘o ai, a e hana me ia mau mea e like me

kona makemake. A i këlä hapahä këia hapahä,

e nänä pono ‘o ia i këia mau mea kinai ahi, a me

nä päkeke, a me nä lako ‘ë a‘e, a me nä hale o ke

ka‘a kinai ahi. E ha‘i mai ‘o ia i ka pono a me ka

pono ‘ole o ia mau mea i ke Kia‘äina o O‘ahu; a

me nä inoa pü o nä känaka a pau i loko o këia

‘Oihana. Inä i pono ke hana hou ‘ia nä ka‘a kinai

ahi, a me nä mea e lako ai, na ka Luna këia

‘Oihana, e like me ka makemake o nä känaka

kinai ahi, nä mea mälama i ia mau mea, e hana

hou ai i ia mau mea a maika‘i. ‘A‘ole na‘e e ‘oi

aku ka lilo ma mua o ka hanele kälä ho‘okahi.

8. Paukü 2. Inä hiki ‘ole aku ka Luna Nui i kahi

e wela ana kekahi mea, a laila na kekahi o kona

mau Kökua e häpai i ka ‘Oihana Luna, a hiki mai

ka Luna Nui.

9. MOKUNA III.

KA HANA A NÄ KÖKUA KINAI AHI.

Paukü 1. E hele nö nä Kökua Kinai Ahi i nä ahi

a pau, a e hana läkou ma lalo o ka Luna Nui, a i

7. MOKUNA II.

KA HANA A KA LUNA NUI.

Pauku 1. Aia i ka Luna Nui ka olelo maluna o

na mea a pau iloko o keia Oihana, i ka wa e wela

ana kekahi hale i ke ahi, a na ua Luna Nui nei e

kauoha aku i kona mau Kokua, e waiho i na kaa

kinai ahi e pili ana i keia Oihana ma kahi kupono;

a e hana pono ia, i mea e kinai ai i ke ahi, a na ua

Luna Nui nei no hoi e haawi aku i na kaa kinai

ahi, a me na bakeke, a me ka lako e pili ana no ke

Aupuni, i na kanaka kinai ahi ana i manao ai, a e

hana me ia mau mea e like me kona makemake.

A i kela hapaha, keia hapaha e nana pono oia i

keia mau mea kinai ahi, a me na bakeke, a me na

lako e ae, a me na hale o ke kaa kinai ahi. E hai

mai oia i ka pono a me ka pono ole o ia mau mea

i ke Kiaaina o Oahu; a me na inoa pu o na kanaka

a pau iloko o keia Oihana. Ina i pono ke hana

hou ia na kaa kinai ahi, a me na mea e lako ai,

na ka Luna keia Oihana, e like me ka makemake

o na kanaka kinai ahi, na mea malama ia mau

mea, e hana hou ai ia mau mea a maikai; aole

nae e oi aku ka lilo mamua o ka haneri dala

hookahi.

8. Pauku 2. Ina hiki ole aku ka Luna Nui i kahi

e wela ana kekahi mea, alaila na kekahi o kona

mau kokua e hapai i ka Oihana Luna, a hiki mai

ka Luna Nui.

9. MOKUNA III.

KA HANA A NA KOKUA KINAI AHI.

Pauku 1. E hele no na Kokua Kinai Ahi i na ahi

a pau, a e hana lakou malalo o ka Luna Nui, a i

he ho‘omaika‘i küikawä i nä känaka maka‘ala i ka palekana o ka lehulehu 1 4 51 4 4 ka ho‘oilina: journal of hawaiian language sources ● march 2002

kolamu (column) 3

4. Ua ho‘ololi ‘ia ‘o “chimnies” ‘o ia ‘o “chimneys.”

“Chimnies” was changed to “chimneys.”

Engineer or of the Fire Warden acting as Chief

Engineer in his absence, and it shall be their duty

immediately on an alarm of fire to repair to the

place where it may be, and assist in procuring

supplies of water to the fire engines, and prevent

the hose of the engine from being trodden on,

and to keep all idle persons at a proper distance

from the fire and from its vicinity, and to order

and direct all persons near to or about the fire, to

aid and assist in extinguishing the fire as they

may think best: provided it is not contrary to the

orders of the Chief Engineer, and all residents of

Honolulu are hereby enjoined to comply with the

orders and directions of the Chief Engineer and

the Fire Wardens at fires under the penalties

hereinafter provided.

10. Section 2. The said Fire Wardens shall

divide the city of Honolulu into four districts,

and report their boundaries to the Chief

Engineer, and shall appoint one of their number

to each district for the purpose of making the vis-

itations and examinations directed in the next

section, who shall keep a record of the names of

the occupants of the houses or other buildings

where they shall observe any violations of this

law, and cause them to be prosecuted for the

penalty fixed for the violation they may have

been guilty of.

11. Section 3. It shall be the duty of the said

Fire Wardens, twice in every year, and as much

oftener as they may think proper, to examine the

dwelling houses and other buildings in their

respective districts for the purpose of ascertain-

ing any violations of this law, and also to exam-

ine the fire-places, hearths, chimneys, 4 stoves

and stove pipes in their respective districts, and

upon finding any of them defective or dangerous,

they or either of them shall direct the owner or

occupants, by written notice, to alter, remove or

amend the same, and in case of neglect or refusal

so to do, the party offending shall forfeit and pay

‘ole ia, ma lalo o kona hope ke hiki ‘ole mai

‘o ia; a e holo koke läkou i kahi e wela ana, ke

lohe läkou i ke kähea ‘ana; a e kökua läkou i ka

halihali wai no nä ka‘a kinai ahi, a e pale aku i

nä känaka i ‘ole läkou e hahi i nä hä wai. A e

ho‘oka‘awale i ka po‘e lulumi wale mai mai ke

ahi aku. A e kü a hana i nä känaka a pau e kü

kokoke ana, e kökua i ke kinai ‘ana i ke ahi e like

me ko läkou mana‘o he pono, ‘a‘ole na‘e kü‘ë i ka

‘ölelo a ka Luna Nui. E ho‘olohe nä känaka a pau

o Honolulu nei i nä ‘ölelo a ka Luna Nui a me

kona mau Kökua Kinai Ahi. A i ‘ole, e ho‘opa‘i

‘ia e like me ka ‘ölelo ma lalo.

10. Paukü 2. Na nä Kökua Kinai Ahi e mähele i

këia külanakauhale ‘o Honolulu nei i ‘ehä ‘äpana,

a e ho‘äkäka mai i nä palena i ka Luna Nui, na

läkou ho‘i e ho‘onoho i kekahi o läkou ma këlä

‘äpana këia ‘äpana, i hiki iä ia ke nänä pono e

like me ka paukü ma lalo. A näna nö e mälama

i nä inoa o ka po‘e noho i loko o nä hale a me nä

mea o nä hale paha kahi i mälama ‘ole ‘ia këia

känäwai; a na läkou e ho‘opi‘i ia po‘e i ho‘opa‘i

‘ia läkou no ka mälama ‘ole i ke känäwai.

11. Paukü 3. Na nä Kökua Kinai Ahi e nänä

pono i nä hale ma ko läkou mau ‘äpana. ‘Elua

nänä ‘ana i këlä makahiki këia makahiki, e ‘ike

läkou i nä mea kü‘ë i këia känäwai, a e nänä nö

ho‘i läkou i nä kapuahi, a me nä puka uahi a me

nä kapuahi hao o ko läkou mau ‘äpana. Inä ‘ike

läkou i kekahi mea ua pono ‘ole, a laila, hiki iä

läkou ke ‘ölelo i ka mea nona ua mea lä ma ka

palapala, e ho‘oponopono hou, a lawe aku paha.

Inä hö‘ole këlä, ‘a‘ole hana pëlä, e uku nö ‘o ia i

iwakäluakumamälima kälä. A no këlä lä këia lä

äna i waiho wale ai i ua mea lä, ‘a‘ole hana hou,

‘a‘ole ho‘i lawe aku e like me ka ‘ölelo ma luna,

ole ia, malalo o kona hope ke hiki ole mai oia; a e

holo koke lakou i kahi e wela ana, ke lohe lakou i

ke kahea ana; a e kokua lakou i ka halihali wai no

na kaa kinai ahi, a e pale aku i na kanaka, i ole

lakou e hahi i na hawai. A e hookaawale i ka poe

lulumi wale mai mai ke ahi aku. A e ku a hana i

na kanaka a pau e ku kokoke ana, e kokua i ke

kinai ana i ke ahi, e like me ko lakou manao he

pono, aole nae kue i ka olelo a ka Luna Nui. E

hoolohe na kanaka a pau o Honolulu nei i na

olelo a ka Luna Nui a me kona mau Kokua Kinai

Ahi. A i ole, e hoopaiia e like me ka olelo malalo.

10. Pauku 2. Na na Kokua Kinai Ahi e mahele

i keia kulanakauhale o Honolulu nei i eha Apana,

a e hoakaka mai i na palena i ka Luna Nui, na

lakou hoi e hoonoho i kekahi o lakou ma kela

Apana keia Apana, i hiki ia ia ke nana pono e like

me ka Pauku malalo. A nana no e malama i na

inoa o ka poe noho iloko o na hale a me na mea

o na hale paha kahi i malama ole ia keia Kanawai;

a na lakou e hoopii ia poe i hoopaiia lakou no ka

malama ole i ke Kanawai.

11. Pauku 3. Na na Kokua Kinai Ahi e nana

pono i na hale ma ko lakou mau Apana. Elua

nana ana i kela makahiki keia makahiki, e ike

lakou i na mea kue i keia Kanawai, a e nana no

hoi lakou i na kapuahi, a me na puka uwahi a me

na kapuahi hao o ko lakou mau Apana. Ina ike

lakou i kekahi mea ua pono ole, alaila hiki ia

lakou ke olelo i ka mea nona ua mea la ma ka

palapala, e hooponopono hou, a lawe aku paha.

Ina hoole kela, aole hana pela, e uku no oia i

iwakaluakumamalima dala. A no kela la keia la

ana i waiho wale ai i ua mea la, aole hana hou,

aole hoi lawe aku, e like me ka olelo maluna,

he ho‘omaika‘i küikawä i nä känaka maka‘ala i ka palekana o ka lehulehu 1 4 71 4 6 ka ho‘oilina: journal of hawaiian language sources ● march 2002

kolamu (column) 3

5. Ua ho‘ololi ‘ia ‘o “fireman” ‘o ia ‘o “firemen.”

“Fireman” was changed to “firemen.”

6. Ua ho‘ololi ‘ia ‘o “Bye laws” ‘o ia ‘o “Bylaws.”

“Bye laws” was changed to “Bylaws.”

7. Ua ho‘ololi ‘ia ‘o “Engineers” ‘o ia ‘o “Engineer.”

“Engineers” was changed to “Engineer.”

twenty-five dollars for the benefit of the Fire

Department, and for every day after the time

allotted as aforesaid, the party so offending shall

forfeit and pay the further sum of ten dollars and

all the expenses of any removal, alteration or

amendment as aforesaid shall be paid by the

occupant. And it shall be the duty of the said Fire

Wardens or either of them, at such times as

aforesaid, to enter into and examine any place

where gunpowder or other combustible materials

are stored or kept, and give such directions in

writing, in regard to their location or removal, or

manner of sale, as may be deemed necessary by

them or him, to guard and protect the property

of the residents of Honolulu, and in case of

neglect or refusal on the part of the possessor of

such combustible material or any of them, to

remove or secure the same within the time and

in the manner directed by the said Fire Wardens,

or either of them, the party offending shall forfeit

and pay one hundred dollars, for the benefit of

the Fire Department, and the further sum of fifty

dollars for every day’s neglect, to remove or

secure the same, after being so notified.

12. Section 4. – It shall be the duty of Fire

Wardens after a fire has been extinguished to

collect together all of the fire buckets used at the

fire, and deliver the same to their respective

owners, upon request.

13. ARTICLE IV. OF FIREMEN AND

THEIR DUTIES.

Section 1. The firemen5 shall be divided into

companies to consist of such number as shall

from time be fixed by the Bylaws6 of the several

companies, to attend to the fire engines and

appurtenances, and the hooks, ladders and car-

riages that may be in the custody of the Chief

Engineer,7 and each of the companies shall and

may choose out of their own number a Foreman,

a laila, e uku hou ka mea hana hewa pëlä, he

‘umi kälä hou iho; a ‘o nä kälä lilo no ka lawe

‘ana ma kahi ‘ë, no ka hana hou ‘ana paha e like

me ka ‘ölelo ma luna, näna nö e ho‘oka‘a mai. A

na ua po‘e Kökua Kinai Ahi nei, a ‘o kekahi o

läkou e komo i loko, a e nänä pono i kahi i waiho

ai ka pauka a me nä mea wela wale e waiho ana,

a e kauoha aku ma ka palapala i ke ‘ano o ka

hana pono ‘ana a me ka lawe ‘ana paha ma kahi

‘ë; a me ke kü‘ai ‘ana paha e like me kona mana‘o

he mea e maluhia ai ka waiwai o nä känaka ma

Honolulu; a inä ho‘olohe ‘ole ka mea nona ia

mau mea wela wale, ‘a‘ole lawe aku, ‘a‘ole ho‘i

ho‘oponopono e like me ka ‘ölelo a nä Kökua

Kinai Ahi, a ‘o kekahi o läkou paha; a laila, e uku

nö ‘o ia i ho‘okahi hanele kälä, a e lilo ia kälä no

ka ‘Oihana Kinai Ahi, a e uku nö ‘o ia i kanalima

kälä no këlä lä këia lä äna i hana ‘ole ai ma hope

o kona lohe ‘ana.

12. Paukü 4. Na nä Kökua Kinai Ahi e

hö‘ulu‘ulu i nä päkeke, a e hä‘awi i nä ‘ona ke

noi ‘ia mai ma hope o ke kinai ‘ana i kekahi ahi.

13. MOKUNA IV.

NO NÄ KÄNAKA KINAI AHI A ME

KÄ LÄKOU HANA.

Paukü 1. E mähele ‘ia nä känaka kinai ahi i

mau ‘äpana hui e like me ka ‘ölelo o nä Känäwai

a läkou i kau ai no läkou iho. E mälama i nä ka‘a

kinai ahi, a me nä mea e pili ana, a me nä lou, a

me nä alahaka, a me nä ka‘a e waiho ana i ka

Luna Nui. A na këlä ‘äpana këia ‘äpana hui e

koho i Luna, a i Kökua, a i Käkau ‘Ölelo, a i

Pu‘ukü Waiwai e like me ko läkou makemake;

alaila, e uku hou ka mea hana hewa pela, he umi

dala hou iho; a o na dala lilo no ka lawe ana ma

kahi e, no ka hana hou ana paha e like me ka

olelo maluna, nana no e hookaa mai. A na ua poe

kokua kinai ahi nei, a o kekahi o lakou e komo

iloko, a e nana pono i kahi i waiho ai ka pauda, a

me na mea wela wale e waiho ana, a e kauoha

aku ma ka palapala, i ke ano o ka hana pono ana,

a me ka lawe ana paha ma kahi e; a me ke kuai

ana paha e like me kona manao he mea e

maluhia’i ka waiwai o na kanaka ma Honolulu; a

ina hoolohe ole ka mea nona ia mau mea wela

wale, aole lawe aku, aole hoi hooponopono e like

me ka olelo a na Kokua Kinai Ahi, a o kekahi o

lakou paha; alaila, e uku no oia i hookahi haneri

dala, a e lilo ia dala no ka Oihana Kinai Ahi, a e

uku no oia i kanalima dala no kela la keia la ana i

hana ole ai mahope o kona lohe ana.

12. Pauku 4. Na na Kokua Kinai Ahi e houluulu

i na bakeke, a e haawi i na ona ke noi ia mai

mahope o ke Kinai ana i kekahi Ahi.

13. MOKUNA IV.

NO NA KANAKA KINAI AHI A ME

KA LAKOU HANA.

Pauku 1. E maheleia na kanaka Kinai Ahi i

mau Apana hui, e like me ka olelo o na Kanawai

a lakou i kau ai no lakou iho. E malama i na Kaa

Kinai Ahi, a me na mea e pili ana, a me na Lou,

a me na Alahaka, a me na kaa e waiho ana i ka

Luna Nui. A na kela Apana keia Apana hui e

koho i Luna, a i Kokua, a i Kakauolelo, a i Puuku

Waiwai, e like me ko lakou makemake; a ina wela

he ho‘omaika‘i küikawä i nä känaka maka‘ala i ka palekana o ka lehulehu 1 4 91 4 8 ka ho‘oilina: journal of hawaiian language sources ● march 2002

kolamu (column) 3

8. Ua ho‘ololi ‘ia ‘o “fireman” ‘o ia ‘o “firemen.”

“Fireman” was changed to “firemen.”

9. Ua ho‘ololi ‘ia ‘o “his” ‘o ia ‘o “their.”

“His” was changed to “their.”

10. Ua ho‘ololi ‘ia ‘o “an Engineer” ‘o ia ‘o “the Chief

Engineer.”

“An Engineer” was changed to “the Chief Engineer.”

11. Ua ho‘ololi ‘ia ‘o “fire man” ‘o ia ‘o “fireman.”

“Fire man” was changed to “fireman.”

12. Ua ho‘ololi ‘ia ‘o “comcompany” ‘o ia ‘o “company.”

“Comcompany” was changed to “company.”

Assistant Foreman, Secretary and Treasurer, in

such manner and at such times as they may

think proper, and it shall be the duty of the said

firemen8 as often as any fire shall break out in

the city, to put on such badge of office as their9

company shall direct, and repair immediately

upon the alarm thereof, to their respective

engines, hose carriages, and hooks and ladders,

and convey them to or near the place where such

fire shall happen, unless otherwise directed by

the Chief Engineer, then in conformity with the

directions given by the Chief Engineer, to work

and manage the said engines and other fire

implements with all their skill and power, and

when the fire is extinguished, they shall not

remove therefrom, but by the permission of the

Chief Engineer,10 and on such permission they

shall return their respective hose wagons, hooks

and ladders, engines and fire apparatus well

washed and cleaned to their respective places of

deposit; and for the more effectual perfecting the

firemen in their duty of keeping and preserving

the said fire engines and other implements from

decay, the said firemen shall once in every month

draw out their fire engines and other implements

in order to wash and cleanse the same, and to

exercise the firemen; and if any fireman11 shall

neglect the said duty, he shall forfeit and pay

such penalty as the majority of his company shall

direct. And if he shall neglect to attend at any fire

as aforesaid or leave his fire engine or other

apparatus while at any fire without permission,

or shall neglect to do his duty on such occasions

without reasonable excuse, he shall, for every

such default, pay such penalty as the majority of

his company12 shall fix, and if any fireman

neglect the duty imposed upon him, or to pay the

penalty fixed, upon the vote of a majority of his

company he may be dismissed as a fireman.

14. Section 2. The Chief Engineer shall have

authority, whenever a fire company has, for six

months, less members than the number of forty,

a inä wela kekahi mea i ke ahi ma Honolulu nei,

na nä känaka kinai ahi e kau iho i hö‘ailona no

ko läkou ‘Oihana e like me ka mana‘o o këlä

‘äpana, këia ‘äpana. A lohe läkou i ke kähea ‘ana,

e holo koke i nä ka‘a kinai ahi, a me nä hä wai,

a me nä lou, a me nä alahaka, a e lawe koke i kahi

e wela ana, ke ‘ölelo ‘ole ka Luna Nui e lawe ma

kahi ‘ë, a ma laila e ho‘oikaika ai mamuli o ka

‘ölelo a ka Luna me ua mau mea kinai ahi nei, e

kinai i ke ahi; a pio ke ahi, ‘a‘ole läkou e ha‘alele,

aia a ‘ölelo ka Luna e ho‘i, a ho‘oku‘u ‘ia läkou,

a laila e ho‘iho‘i läkou i nä ka‘a, a me nä lou, a

me nä alahaka, a me nä lako a pau ma hope o

ka holoi ‘ana i ko läkou mau wahi e waiho ai.

A i këlä malama këia malama, e lawe nä känaka

kinai ahi i nä ka‘a kinai ahi a me nä mea ‘ë a‘e

ma waho e holoi, a e ho‘oma‘ema‘e, a e hana ho‘i

me ia mau mea i mea e mäkaukau ai läkou, a i

mea ho‘i i popopo ‘ole ai nä mea kinai ahi. A inä

i hana ‘ole kekahi kanaka kinai ahi i këia hana,

e ho‘ouku ‘ia ‘o ia e like me ka mana‘o o ka nui

o nä känaka o kona ‘äpana he pono. A inä i hele

‘ole kekahi i kahi e wela ana e like me ka ‘ölelo

ma luna, a e ha‘alele paha i ke ka‘a kinai ahi, a i

ka mea e pili ana paha, i ka wä e kinai ana me ka

‘ae ‘ole ‘ia: inä hana ‘ole paha kekahi i käna hana

i ka wä kinai ahi me ke kumu ‘ole, e ho‘ouku ‘ia

‘o ia e like me ka mana‘o o ka nui o nä känaka o

ia ‘äpana he pono. Inä hana ‘ole kekahi kanaka

kinai ahi i ka hana i hä‘awi ‘ia näna, a uku paha

i ka uku i ho‘opa‘i ‘ia ma luna ona e like me ka

mea i holo i ka nui o nä känaka o kona ‘äpana

hui, a laila, e ho‘opau ‘ia kona noho ‘ana i loko

o ia ‘äpana hui.

14. Paukü 2. Inä emi nä känaka kinai ahi o

kekahi ‘äpana hui ma lalo o ke kanahä, a hala nä

malama ‘eono, a laila, e hiki nö i ka Luna Nui ke

kekahi mea i ke Ahi ma Honolulu nei, na na

kanaka Kinai Ahi e kau iho i hoailona no ko

lakou Oihana, e like me ka manao o kela Apana,

keia Apana. A lohe lakou i ke kahea ana, e holo

koke i na Kaa Kinai Ahi, a me na hawai, a me na

Lou, a me na Alahaka, a e lawe koke i kahi e wela

ana, ke olelo ole ka Luna Nui e lawe ma kahi e, a

malaila e hooikaika mamuli o ka olelo a ka Luna

me ua mau mea Kinai Ahi nei, e Kinai i ke Ahi;

a pio ke Ahi, aole lakou e haalele, aia a olelo ka

Luna e hoi, a hookuu ia lakou, alaila e hoihoi

lakou i na Kaa, a me na Lou, a me na Alahaka,

a me na lako a pau mahope o ka holoi ana, i ko

lakou mau wahi e waiho ai. A i kela malama keia

malama, e lawe na kanaka Kinai Ahi, i na Kaa

Kinai Ahi, a me na mea e ae mawaho e holoi, a

e hoomaemae, a e hana hoi me ia mau mea i mea

e makaukau ai lakou, a i mea hoi i popopo ole ai

na mea Kinai Ahi. A ina i hana ole kekahi kanaka

Kinai Ahi i keia hana, e hooukuia oia e like me ka

manao o ka nui o na kanaka o kona Apana, he

pono. A ina i hele ole kekahi i kahi e wela ana

e like me ka olelo maluna, a e haalele paha i ke

Kaa Kinai Ahi, a i ka mea e pili ana paha, i ka

wa e kinai ana me ka ae ole ia: ina hana ole paha

kekahi i kana hana i ka wa kinai Ahi me ke kumu

ole, e hooukuia oia e like me ka manao o ka nui

o na kanaka o ia Apana he pono. Ina hana ole

kekahi kanaka Kinai Ahi i ka hana i haawiia

nana, a uku paha i ka uku i hoopaiia maluna

ona, e like me ka mea i holo i ka nui o na kanaka

o kona Apana hui, alaila e hoopauia kona noho

ana iloko o ia Apana hui.

14. Pauku 2. Ina emi na kanaka Kinai Ahi o

kekahi Apana hui malalo o ke kanaha, a hala na

malama eono, alaila, e hiki no i ka Luna Nui ke

he ho‘omaika‘i küikawä i nä känaka maka‘ala i ka palekana o ka lehulehu 1 5 11 5 0 ka ho‘oilina: journal of hawaiian language sources ● march 2002

to disband said company, and to take into his

possession any fire apparatus said company may

have had in charge, and assign the members of

said company, with their assent, to any other

company; provided it is done with the assent of a

majority of the company to which they are

assigned.

15. ARTICLE V. OF THE BADGES OF

OFFICE OF THE MEMBERS OF THE

FIRE DEPARTMENT.

Section 1. In order that the Chief Engineer and

Fire Wardens may be readily distinguished at

fires, they shall each be furnished with a wand

six feet long, and the one to be used by the Chief

Engineer shall have a gilded blaze at the top, and

those to be used by the Fire Wardens shall have a

white flame at the top, and the firemen shall

wear such other badges as may be agreed upon

by a majority of the company to which they

belong.

16. ARTICLE VI. OF THE DUTIES OF

THE MARSHAL, PREFECT OF

POLICE AND CONSTABLES.

Section 1. It shall be the duty of the Marshal,

and the Prefect of Police and so many of the con-

stables as are not on duty at the time of any fire,

to repair immediately on the alarm of fire, with

their badges of office, to the place where such fire

may be, and it shall be the duty of the Marshal,

Prefect of Police and the constables present at a

fire to report themselves to the Chief Engineer, or

the Fire Warden acting in his place, and conform

to such orders as may be given to them for the

preservation of the peace and the removal of all

idle and suspected persons, or others not actually

or usefully employed in extinguishing the fire, or

in the preservation of the property in the neigh-

borhood thereof, and also to arrest any and all

ho‘opau i ia ‘äpana, a e lawe i ko läkou mau mea

kinai ahi, a e ho‘ohuhui i nä känaka o ia ‘äpana

me kekahi ‘äpana ‘ë a‘e, me ko läkou ‘ae nö na‘e,

ke ‘olu‘olu nö ho‘i nä känaka o ka ‘äpana hui a

läkou i hui aku ai.

15. MOKUNA V.

NO NÄ HÖ‘AILONA ‘OIHANA O NÄ

KÄNAKA I LOKO O KA ‘OIHANA

KINAI AHI.

Paukü 1. Eia nä hö‘ailona o ka Luna Nui a me

kona mau Kökua, i mea e maopopo ai läkou i

ka wä kinai ahi, he ko‘oko‘o, ‘eono kapua‘i ka

loa, ko nä kökua, a ‘o ko ka Luna Nui ho‘i, he

ko‘oko‘o nö me ke kula ma ke po‘o o ke ko‘oko‘o,

a he ke‘oke‘o ke po‘o o nä ko‘oko‘o o kona mau

Kökua; a e kau nä känaka kinai ahi i ka hö‘ailona

e like me ka mana‘o o ka nui o läkou o ka po‘e o

këlä ‘äpana këia ‘äpana.

16. MOKUNA VI.

KA HANA A KA ILÄMUKU A ME KA

MÄKA‘I NUI A ME NÄ MÄKA‘I.

Paukü 1. E holo koke ka Ilämuku, a me ka

Mäka‘i Nui, a me nä mäka‘i pilikia ‘ole i ka hana,

i kahi o ke ahi e wela ana, ke lohe läkou i ke

kähea ‘ana, me nä hö‘ailona ‘Oihana o läkou. A

na ka Ilämuku, ka Luna Mäka‘i, a me nä mäka‘i

ma kahi o ke ahi e hele koke i mua o ka Luna,

a ‘o kona hope paha, a e hana e like me käna

kauoha iä läkou e maluhia ai nä känaka, a e

ho‘oka‘awale a‘e i nä känaka e lulumi wale ana,

a me ka po‘e i ha‘oha‘o ‘ia no ke ‘ano kolohe, a

me nä mea a pau e hana ‘ole ana ma ke kinai ahi,

a e mälama ana paha i ka waiwai e kokoke ana, a

e hopu ho‘i i ka po‘e ho‘olohe ‘ole i ka ‘ölelo a ka

Luna Nui, a ‘o kekahi Kökua ona paha ke kauoha

‘ia e hana pëlä, a e lawe iä läkou ma kahi e pa‘a ai

hoopau ia Apana, a e lawe i ko lakou mau mea

Kinai Ahi, a e hoohuhui na kanaka o ia Apana

me kekahi Apana e ae, me ko lakou ae no nae, ke

oluolu no hoi na kanaka o ka Apana hui, a lakou

i hui aku ai.

15. MOKUNA V.

NO NA HOAILONA OIHANA O NA

KANAKA ILOKO O KA OIHANA

KINAI AHI.

Pauku 1. Eia na hoailona o ka Luna Nui a me

kona mau kokua, i mea e maopopo ai lakou i ka

wa Kinai Ahi, he kookoo, eono kapuai ka loa ko

na kokua, a o ko ka Luna Nui hoi, he kookoo no

me ke gula ma ke poo o ke kookoo, a he keokeo

ke poo o na kookoo o kona mau kokua; a e kau

na kanaka Kinai Ahi i ka hoailona e like me ka

manao o ka nui o lakou, o ka poe o kela Apana

keia Apana.

16. MOKUNA VI.

KA HANA A KA ILAMUKU; A ME KA

MAKAI NUI, A ME NA MAKAI.

Pauku 1. E holo koke ka Ilamuku a me ka

Makai Nui a me na Makai pilikia ole i ka hana i

kahi o ke ahi e wela ana, ke lohe lakou i ke kahea

ana, me na hoailona Oihana o lakou. A na ka

Ilamuku, ka Luna Makai, a me na Makai ma kahi

o ke Ahi e hele koke imua o ka Luna, a o kona

hope paha, a e hana e like me kana kauoha ia

lakou, e maluhia ai na kanaka, a e hookaawale

ae i na kanaka e lulumi wale ana, a me ka poe i

haohaoia no ke ano kolohe, a me na mea a pau

e hana ole ana ma ke Kinai Ahi, a e malama ana

paha i ka waiwai e kokoke ana, a e hopu hoi i ka

poe hoolohe ole i ka olelo a ka Luna Nui, a o

kekahi kokua ona paha, ke kauohaia e hana pela,

a e lawe ia lakou ma kahi e paa’i a hiki i ka wa

he ho‘omaika‘i küikawä i nä känaka maka‘ala i ka palekana o ka lehulehu 1 5 31 5 2 ka ho‘oilina: journal of hawaiian language sources ● march 2002

kolamu (column) 3

13. Ua ho‘ololi ‘ia ‘o “are” ‘o ia ‘o “is.”

“Are” was changed to “is.”

14. Ua ho‘ololi ‘ia ‘o “mateials” ‘o ia ‘o “materials.”

“Mateials” was changed to “materials.”

15. Ua ho‘ololi ‘ia ‘o “five” ‘o ia ‘o “ten.”

“Five” was changed to “ten.”

persons refusing to obey the orders of the Chief

Engineer, or either of the Fire Wardens upon

request, and remove them to the public place of

confinement, and there detain them until a com-

plaint can be made against them before the

Police Court as hereinafter provided. And if the

Marshal or either of the constables not on duty

at the time of an alarm of fire, shall neglect to

attend at such fire, or to report himself as

required, or to obey any orders that may be given

him as aforesaid, he shall forfeit and pay the sum

of ten dollars for each offense.

17. Section 2. All constables on duty as police-

men of Honolulu at the time of an alarm of fire,

are hereby ordered and required to remain at the

places where they have been stationed by the

Marshal or the Prefect of Police, and to give the

alarm of fire by crying Fire! Fire!! until the entire

community is13 alarmed, and should any of the

constables, being so on duty, leave his station

without the express orders of the Marshal or the

Prefect of Police, he shall forfeit and pay ten dol-

lars for every offense, and be liable to be

removed from his office.

18. ARTICLE VII. OF THE DUTIES OF

RESIDENTS IN RELATION TO FIRES.

Section 1. No person shall kindle any fire, nor

furnish the materials14 for any fire, nor in any

way authorize or allow any fire to be made in any

street, road or lane, or on any pier or wharf in

the city, except for the purpose of boiling tar,

which fire shall not be more than ten feet from

bulkhead or the end of the pier, under the penalty

of ten15 dollars for each offense, unless by the

permission of the Chief Engineer.

a hiki i ka wä pono e ho‘opi‘i läkou i mua o ka

Luna Känäwai Ho‘omalu e like me ka ‘ölelo ma

mua, a inä hele ‘ole ka Ilämuku, a ‘o kekahi

mäka‘i paha i pilikia ‘ole i ka wä i lohe ‘ia ai ke

kähea ‘ana, a ho‘olohe ‘ole paha i ka ‘ölelo a ka

Luna, e ho‘ouku ‘ia nö ‘o ia he ‘umi kälä no këlä

hewa këia hewa.

17. Paukü 2. ‘O nä mäka‘i a pau o Honolulu e

kü ana i loko o ka hana i ka wä e lohe ai läkou i

ke kähea ‘ana no ke ahi, e küpa‘a loa läkou ma

kahi a ka Ilämuku, a ‘o ka Luna Mäka‘i paha i

ho‘onoho ai iä läkou, a kähea nui läkou, “Pau i ke

Ahi ë!” “Pau i ke Ahi ë!” a pau loa nä känaka i ka

lohe; a inä ha‘alele wale kekahi mäka‘i e kü ana

ma käna ‘Oihana me ka lohe ‘ole o ka Ilämuku, a

‘o ka Luna Mäka‘i paha, e ho‘ouku ‘ia ‘o ia i ‘umi

kälä no këlä hewa këia hewa, a e ho‘opau ‘ia kona

noho ‘ana ma ka ‘Oihana.

18. MOKUNA VII.

KA HANA A NÄ KÄNAKA NO KE

AHI.

Paukü 1. ‘A‘ole nö e hö‘a‘ä kekahi i ke ahi,

‘a‘ole ho‘i e hä‘awi i kekahi mea e wela ai ke ahi

ma kekahi alanui, ala li‘ili‘i paha, ma kekahi

uapo o Honolulu nei, koe na‘e ke ahi paila këpau

moku, a ‘o këlä ahi, ‘a‘ole e ‘oi aku ma mua o nä

kapua‘i he ‘umi mai ka palena ma kai mai o ka

uapo. ‘O ka mea hewa i këia paukü, e ho‘ouku ‘ia

‘o ia i ‘umi kälä no këlä hewa këia hewa, ke ‘ae

‘ole ‘ia käna hana e ka Luna Nui o ka ‘Oihana

Kinai Ahi.

pono e hoopii lakou imua o ka Lunakanawai

Hoomalu, e like me ka olelo mamua, a ina hele

ole ka Ilamuku, a o kekahi Makai paha i pilikia

ole i ka wa i loheia’i ke kahea ana, a hoolohe ole

paha i ka olelo a ka Luna, e hooukuia no oia he

umi dala no kela hewa keia hewa.

17. Pauku 2. O na Makai a pau o Honolulu e ku

ana iloko o ka hana i ka wa e lohe ai lakou i ke

kahea ana no ke ahi, e kupaa loa lakou ma kahi a

ka Ilamuku, a o ka Luna Makai paha i hoonoho

ai ia lakou, a kahea nui lakou, “Pau i ke Ahi e!”

“Pau i ke Ahi e!” a pau loa na kanaka i ka lohe; a

ina haalele wale kekahi Makai e ku ana ma kana

Oihana me ka lohe ole o ka Ilamuku, a o ka Luna

Makai paha, e hooukuia oia i umi dala no kela

hewa keia hewa, a e hoopauia kona noho ana ma

ka Oihana.

18. MOKUNA VII.

KA HANA A NA KANAKA NO KE

AHI.

Pauku 1. Aole no e hoaa kekahi i ke ahi, aole

hoi e haawi i kekahi mea e wela ai ke ahi ma

kekahi Alanui, Ala liilii paha, ma kekahi wapo o

Honolulu nei, koe nae ke ahi baila kepau moku,

a o kela ahi, aole e oi aku mamua o na kapuai he

umi mai ka palena makai mai o ka wapo. O ka

mea hewa i keia Pauku, e hooukuia oia i umi dala

no kela hewa keia hewa, ke ae ole ia kana hana e

ka Luna Nui o ka Oihana Kinai Ahi.

he ho‘omaika‘i küikawä i nä känaka maka‘ala i ka palekana o ka lehulehu 1 5 51 5 4 ka ho‘oilina: journal of hawaiian language sources ● march 2002

19. Section 2. Every building occupied as a

dwelling house in Honolulu, and every building

occupied as a store or storehouse, or as a regular

place of business, shall be furnished with at least

two wooden buckets, which shall at all times

when not in use at a fire, be hung in a conspicu-

ous place, accessible to the inmates of the build-

ing, upon which shall be painted the name of the

owners, and all occupants of buildings not so

furnished within sixty days after the passage of

this law, shall forfeit and pay ten dollars.

20. Section 3. All women who are not the

occupants of the buildings on fire, or in danger

of being set on fire, are hereby prohibited from

attending at or near buildings on fire, under a

penalty of five dollars for each offense.

21. Section 4. Any person giving a false alarm

of fire by proclaiming fire, or by any other means

whatsoever, in Honolulu, shall forfeit and pay

fifty dollars for each offense.

22. Section 5. Any person who shall send off

any fire rockets, or throw into any street ignited

fire crackers within Honolulu, shall forfeit and

pay five dollars for each offense, unless with the

permission of the Chief Engineer.

23. Section 6. All male residents of Honolulu,

except firemen going to a fire, are required to

carry the buckets belonging to the building occu-

pied by him or them, and while at the fire to obey

the orders of the Chief Engineer, Fire Wardens,

Marshal, Prefect of Police and constables, under

a penalty of five dollars.

24. Section 7. Any person cutting, or in any

way intentionally injuring, any portion of the fire

apparatus, shall forfeit and pay – not exceeding

one hundred dollars.

19. Paukü 2. E ho‘olako ‘ia këlä hale këia hale o

Honolulu nei, ‘o nä hale noho a me nä hale kü‘ai,

a me nä hale papa‘a, a me nä hale hana a pau loa

i ‘elua päkeke lä‘au, a e kaulia ma kahi äkea ua

mau päkeke nei, i nä manawa a pau, ke hana ‘ole

ma ke kinai ahi, i hikiwawe ke ki‘i ‘ana o ka po‘e i

loko o ka hale; a e palapala ‘ia ma luna iho ka

inoa o ka ‘ona. A ‘o ka po‘e i ho‘olako ‘ole i ko

läkou mau hale i ua mau päkeke nei i loko o nä

lä he kanaono ma hope o ke kau ‘ana i këia

känäwai, e ho‘ouku ‘ia läkou i ‘umi kälä päkahi.

20. Paukü 3. Ua päpä ‘ia nä wähine a pau e

noho ‘ole ana i loko o nä hale wela i ke ahi, a ua

kokoke wela paha, ‘a‘ole hele ma kahi e kokoke

ana i nä hale wela, e ho‘ouku ‘ia läkou päkahi,

‘elima kälä no këlä hewa këia hewa, ke hele.

21. Paukü 4. ‘O ka mea kähea ho‘opunipuni a

ho‘omaka‘u wale paha i nä känaka o Honolulu

nei no ke ahi, e ho‘ouku ‘ia nö ia i kanalima kälä.

22. Paukü 5. ‘O ka mea ho‘olele i ke ahi i luna,

a kiola aku paha i ka mea ho‘opahüpahü ma ke

alanui o Honolulu nei, e ho‘ouku ‘ia nö ia ‘elima

kälä no këlä hewa këia hewa, ke ‘ae ‘ole ‘ia käna

hana e ka Luna Nui o ka ‘Oihana Kinai Ahi.

23. Paukü 6. ‘O nä känaka a pau o Honolulu

nei i hele i kahi o ke ahi e wela ana, koe na‘e ka

po‘e i loko o ka ‘Oihana Kinai Ahi, e halihali

läkou i nä päkeke o ka hale a läkou i noho ai, a

e ho‘olohe läkou i nä ‘ölelo a ka Luna Nui a ‘o

kona mau Kökua, Ilämuku, Luna Mäka‘i, a me

nä mäka‘i, a i ‘ole, e ho‘ouku ‘ia läkou päkahi i

‘elima kälä.

24. Paukü 7. ‘O ka mea ‘oki a hana ‘ino paha i

kauwahi o nä mea kinai ahi, e ho‘ouku ‘ia ‘o ia i

nä kälä ‘a‘ole ‘oi i ka hanele ho‘okahi.

19. Pauku 2. E hoolakoia kela hale keia hale o

Honolulu nei, o na hale noho a me na halekuai, a

me na hale papaa, a me na hale hana a pau loa i

elua bakeke laau, a e kaulia ma kahi akea ua mau

bakeke nei, i na manawa a pau, ke hana ole ma

ke kinai ahi, i hiki wawe ke kii ana o ka poe iloko

o ka hale; a e palapalaia maluna iho ka inoa o ka

ona. A o ka poe i hoolako ole i ko lakou mau hale

i ua mau bakeke nei iloko o na la he kanaono

mahope o ke kau ana i keia Kanawai, e hooukuia

lakou i umi dala pakahi.

20. Pauku 3. Ua papaia na wahine a pau e noho

ole ana iloko o na hale wela i ke ahi, a ua kokoke

wela paha, aole hele ma kahi e kokoke ana i na

hale wela, e hooukuia lakou pakahi, elima dala

no kela hewa keia hewa, ke hele.

21. Pauku 4. O ka mea kahea hoopunipuni, a

hoomakau wale paha i na kanaka o Honolulu nei

no ke ahi, e hooukuia no ia i kanalima dala.

22. Pauku 5. O ka mea hoolele i ke ahi iluna,

a kiola aku paha i ka mea hoopahupahu ma ke

Alanui o Honolulu nei, e hooukuia no ia elima

dala no kela hewa keia hewa, ke ae ole ia kana

hana e ka Luna Nui o ka Oihana Kinai Ahi.

23. Pauku 6. O na kanaka a pau o Honolulu nei

i hele i kahi o ke ahi e wela ana, koe nae ka poe

iloko o ka Oihana Kinai Ahi, e halihali lakou i na

bakeke o ka hale a lakou i noho ai; a e hoolohe

lakou i na olelo a ka Luna Nui a o kona mau

kokua, Ilamuku, Luna Makai, a me na Makai,

a i ole, e hooukuia lakou pakahi i elima dala.

24. Pauku 7. O ka mea oki a hana ino paha i

kauwahi o na mea kinai ahi, e hooukuia oia i na

dala aole oi i ka haneri hookahi.

he ho‘omaika‘i küikawä i nä känaka maka‘ala i ka palekana o ka lehulehu 1 5 71 5 6 ka ho‘oilina: journal of hawaiian language sources ● march 2002

kolamu (column) 2

2. Ua kükäkükä pinepine ka ‘Aha Kükä Malü i nä

känäwai e häpai ‘ia ana, a na ia ‘Aha i kükäkükä a

‘äpono i këia känäwai i holo i ka pülima a ka Mö‘ï

ma ka lä 27 o Dekemapa, 1850. Ua kükäkükä a kau

‘ia a‘ela e ka ‘Aha‘ölelo ma ka lä 8 o Mei, 1851, a

hä‘awi hou ‘ia na ka Mö‘ï e pülima hou. I këlä me

këia pülima ‘ana o ka Mö‘ï, ua pono pü ka pülima

a ke Kuhina Nui i kau kühelu aku ke känäwai.

The Privy Council at that time often considered

potential legislation; this body discussed and passed

this proposal on December 27, 1850, with the King

signing on the Council’s behalf. The Legislature then

considered the measure and approved it on May 8,

1851, whereupon it was then presented to the King for

final signature. Each time the King signed, his signa-

ture had to be accompanied by that of the Kuhina Nui

(Premier) to become official.

25. Section 8. It shall be the duty of any and all

persons owning or occupying premises adjacent

to a fire, to allow free access to the same by the

Fire Department upon the order of the Chief

Engineer or either of the Fire Wardens, for the

purpose of obtaining water or using the fire

apparatus for the extinguishing of any fire, and

in case such access is refused, the Chief Engineer,

or the person acting in his place, is hereby autho-

rized forcibly to enter the said premises, for the

purposes aforesaid, and the person so refusing

shall forfeit and pay not less than fifty dollars.

26. ARTICLE VIII. OF THE PENALTIES,

HOW APPROPRIATED.

Section 1. All the fines and penalties and for-

feitures imposed by this law, may be sued for

and recovered before the Police Court of

Honolulu, upon the complaint of any member of

the Fire Department, or of any police officer on

duty at the fire, in the name of the Prefect of

Police of Honolulu, and shall be paid over to the

Chief Engineer of the Fire Department, who is

hereby authorized and required to pay over the

amount thereof to the Foremen of the several fire

companies of Honolulu, share and share alike.

27. ARTICLE IX. OF THE LIMITS OF

THE OPERATION OF THIS LAW.

Section 1. All the provisions of this law shall be

binding upon all persons residing within one

mile of the Public Market of Honolulu, and go

into effect on the day when the same is published

in the Polynesian, in the English and Hawaiian

languages.

28. Done and passed <at the Palace of

Honolulu> this 27th day of December, A. D.,

1850.

25. Paukü 8. Na këlä mea këia mea pä hale e

kokoke ana i ke ahi e wela ana, e ‘ae a‘e i ka po‘e

kinai ahi e hana ana mamuli o ka ‘ölelo a ko

läkou Luna Nui, a ‘o kona mau Kökua paha, e

komo i loko, a e lawe i ka wai, a e hana i nä mea

kinai ahi i loko o ka pä. A inä hö‘ole kekahi, e

hiki nö i ka Luna Nui, a ‘o kona hope paha, ke

komo i loko o ia wahi no ka hana i ‘ölelo ‘ia ma

luna, a e ho‘ouku ‘ia ka mea nona ia wahi, ‘a‘ole

emi ma lalo o nä kälä he kanalima.

26. MOKUNA VIII.

NO NÄ UKU, KAHI E LILO AI.

Paukü 1. ‘O nä uku a pau, a me nä lilo ma këia

känäwai, e hiki nö ke ho‘opi‘i ‘ia, a e koi ‘ia nö

ho‘i i mua o ka Luna Känäwai Ho‘omalu o

Honolulu, ma ka ho‘opi‘i ‘ana o kekahi mea i

loko o ka ‘Oihana Kinai Ahi, a ‘o kekahi mäka‘i

paha i hana ma ke kinai ahi, ma ka inoa na‘e o ka

Luna Mäka‘i o Honolulu; a e hä‘awi ‘ia këlä uku i

ka Luna Nui o ka ‘Oihana Kinai Ahi, a näna nö e

pu‘unaue like i nä Luna o nä ‘äpana kinai ahi

‘ehä o Honolulu nei.

27. MOKUNA IX.

NO KA PILI ‘ANA O KËIA KÄNÄWAI.

Paukü 1. Ua kaulia këia känäwai ma luna o

nä känaka a pau e noho ana i loko o ka mile

ho‘okahi mai ka Hale Mäkeke o Honolulu, a e lilo

nö ia i känäwai i kona lä i ho‘opuka ‘ia ai ma ka

Polunesia, ma ka ‘ölelo Pelekänia a me ka ‘ölelo

Hawai‘i.

28. Hana ‘ia a ho‘oholo ‘ia ma ka Hale Ali‘i o

Honolulu, i këia lä 27 o Dekemapa, M. H. 1850.2

25. Pauku 8. Na kela mea keia mea pahale e

kokoke ana i ke ahi e wela ana, e ae ae i ka poe

kinai ahi, e hana ana mamuli o ka olelo a ko

lakou Luna Nui, a o kona mau Kokua paha, e

komo iloko, a e lawe i ka wai, a e hana i na mea

kinai ahi iloko o ka pa. A ina hoole kekahi, e hiki

no i ka Luna Nui, a o kona hope paha, ke komo

iloko o ia wahi no ka hana i oleloia maluna, a e

hooukuia ka mea nona ia wahi, aole emi malalo

o na dala he kanalima.

26. MOKUNA VIII.

NO NA UKU, KAHI E LILO AI.

Pauku 1. O na uku a pau, a me na lilo ma keia

Kanawai, e hiki no ke hoopiiia, a e koiia no hoi

imua o ka Lunakanawai Hoomalu o Honolulu,

ma ka hoopii ana o kekahi mea iloko o ka Oihana

kinai ahi, a o kekahi Makai paha i hana ma ke

kinai ahi, ma ka inoa nae o ka Luna Makai o

Honolulu; a e haawiia kela uku i ka Luna Nui o

ka Oihana kinai ahi, a nana no e puunaue like i

na Luna o na Apana kinai ahi eha o Honolulu

nei.

27. MOKUNA IX.

NO KA PILI ANA O KEIA KANAWAI.

Pauku 1. Ua kaulia keia Kanawai maluna o na

kanaka a pau e noho ana iloko o ka mile hookahi,

mai ka Hale Makeke o Honolulu, a e lilo no ia i

Kanawai i kona la i hoopukaia’i ma ka Polunesia,

ma ka olelo Beritania a me ka olelo Hawaii.

28. Hanaia o hooholoia ma ka Hale Alii o

Honolulu, i keia la 27 o Dekemaba, M. H. 1850.

he ho‘omaika‘i küikawä i nä känaka maka‘ala i ka palekana o ka lehulehu 1 5 91 5 8 ka ho‘oilina: journal of hawaiian language sources ● march 2002

kolamu (column) 2

3. Ua ‘äpono like ‘ia këia känäwai hou e nä Ali‘i o ka

‘Aha‘ölelo e noho Pelekikena ana ‘o Keoni Ana.

Also approving the new law would have been the

House of Nobles, then headed by its President, Keoni

Ana.

kolamu (column) 3

16. He unuhi pinepine ‘ia ko Keoni Ana külana Kuhina

Nui he “Premier,” ‘a‘ohe na‘e hua ‘ölelo mana‘o like

a like me ka Hawai‘i.

Keoni Ana’s title of Kuhina Nui is often translated as

“Premier,” but there is no true equivalent for the

Hawaiian.

17. Ua ho‘ololi ‘ia ‘o “Speaker” ‘o ia ‘o “President.”

“Speaker” was changed to “President.”

KAMEHAMEHA <III.

King>

KEONI ANA.

<Kuhina Nui>16

Confirmed by the Legislature May 8, 1851.

WM. L. LEE,

President17 of the House of Representatives.

<KEONI ANA.

President of the House of Nobles.>

KAMEHAMEHA <III.

King>

Keoni Ana.

<Kuhina Nui>

KAMEHAMEHA <III.

Ka Mö‘ï>

Keoni Ana.

<Ke Kuhina Nui>

Ho‘opa‘a ‘ia e ka Po‘e ‘Aha‘ölelo i ka lä 8 o Mei,

1851.

<WM. L. LEE,

Pelekikena o ka Po‘e i Koho ‘ia o ka ‘Aha‘ölelo>3

<KAMEHAMEHA III.

Ka Mö‘ï>

<Keoni Ana.

Ke Kuhina Nui>

KAMEHAMEHA

Keoni Ana.

Hoopaaia e ka Poe Ahaolelo i ka la 8 o Mei, 1851.

Nä ‘Ölelo Ho‘omaika‘i(Acknowledgments)

Ke Kömike o nä Waihona Palapala Kahiko a me nä Waihona Puke (Archives & Libraries Committee):

Jason Käpena Achiu, lälä küikawä (adjunct member), Hale Waihona Palapala Kahiko o ka Moku‘äina ‘o

Hawai‘i (Archives of Hawai‘i)

DeSoto Brown, Ke‘ena Waihona Palapala Kahiko o ka Hale Hö‘ike‘ike o Kamehameha (Bishop Museum

Archives)

Barbara Dunn, Hale Waihona Puke o ka Hui Mö‘aukala Hawai‘i (Hawaiian Historical Society Library)

Joan Hori, Hale Waihona Puke ‘o Hamilton (Hamilton Library), Ke Kulanui o Hawai‘i ma Mänoa

(University of Hawai‘i at Mänoa)

Ruth Horie, Hale Waihona Puke ‘o Hamilton (Hamilton Library), Ke Kulanui o Hawai‘i ma Mänoa

(University of Hawai‘i at Mänoa)

Luella Kurkjian, Hale Waihona Palapala Kahiko o ka Moku‘äina ‘o Hawai‘i (Archives of Hawai‘i)

Junko Nowaki, Hale Waihona Puke ‘o Mo‘okini (Mo‘okini Library), Ke Kulanui o Hawai‘i ma Hilo

(University of Hawai‘i at Hilo)

Marilyn Reppun, Hale Waihona Puke o ka Hui Kamali‘i Mikiona Hawai‘i (Hawaiian Mission Children’s

Society Library)

Carol Silva, Hale Waihona Palapala Kahiko o ka Moku‘äina ‘o Hawai‘i (Archives of Hawai‘i)

Duane Wenzel, Hale Waihona Puke o ka Hale Hö‘ike‘ike o Kamehameha (Bishop Museum Library)

Janet Zisk, luna o ke kömike (committee chair), Hale Waihona Palapala Kahiko o Nä Kula ‘o

Kamehameha (Kamehameha Schools Archives)

Ke Kömike Ho‘oponopono (Editorial Committee):

Kalani Akana, ‘Ahahui ‘Ölelo Hawai‘i (Hawaiian Language Association)

Carlos Andrade, Kamakaküokalani (Gladys K. ‘Ainoa Brandt Center for Hawaiian Studies), Ke Kulanui o

Hawai‘i ma Mänoa (University of Hawai‘i at Mänoa)

Lilinoe Andrews, hoa kükä (consultant)

Kapulani Antonio, hoa kükä (consultant)

Lökahi Antonio, hoa kükä (consultant)

Noelani Arista, hoa kükä (consultant)

Henry Bennett, Hale Pa‘i o Nä Kula ‘o Kamehameha (Kamehameha Schools Press)

Anita Bruce, ‘Oihana Ho‘ona‘auao o Hawai‘i (State Department of Education)

John Charlot, Mähele Ho‘omana (Religion Department), Ke Kulanui o Hawai‘i ma Mänoa (University of

Hawai‘i at Mänoa)

D. Mähealani Dudoit, Luna Ho‘oponopono o (Chief Editor of ) ‘Öiwi: A Native Hawaiian Journal

Kaipo Hale, Nä Kula ‘o Kamehameha (Kamehameha Schools)

Emma Hanakeawe, ‘Aha Pünana Leo (Language Nest Organization)

‘Ioli‘i Hawkins, Ke‘ena ‘Ölelo Hawai‘i (Hawaiian Language Section), Ke Kulanui o Hawai‘i ma Mänoa

(University of Hawai‘i at Mänoa)

Ku‘ualoha Ho‘omanawanui, hoa kükä (consultant)

Pua Hopkins, hoa kükä (consultant)

Makalapua Ka‘awa, Ke Kula ‘o Kamakau/‘Aha Pünana Leo (Kamakau School/ Language Nest

Organization)

Lilikalä Kame‘eleihiwa, Kamakaküokalani (Gladys K. ‘Ainoa Brandt Center for Hawaiian Studies), Ke

Kulanui o Hawai‘i ma Mänoa (University of Hawai‘i at Mänoa)

Keiki Kawai‘ae‘a, Ka Haka ‘Ula O Ke‘elikölani (College of Hawaiian Language), Ke Kulanui o Hawai‘i ma

Hilo (University of Hawai‘i at Hilo)

161

1 6 2 ka ho‘oilina: journal of hawaiian language sources ● march 2002

Papa Alaka‘i o ALU LIKE (Board of Directors of ALU LIKE):

Warren C. R. Perry, Luna Ho‘omalu (Chair)

Lucas Kekuna, Hope Luna Ho‘omalu Mua (1st Vice Chair)

Lincoln Keanini, Hope Luna Ho‘omalu ‘Elua (2nd Vice Chair)

Kevin Baptist, Käkau ‘Ölelo (Secretary)

William Souza, Pu‘ukü (Treasurer)

David C. Hulihe‘e

Theodore Kesaji

Ernest Matsumura

Ann Nathaniel

Winona E. Rubin

Leona K. Seto-Mook

Luna Ho‘okö o ALU LIKE (Chief Executive Officer of ALU LIKE): Lulani McKenzie.

Hope Luna Ho‘okö o ALU LIKE (Chief Operating Officer of ALU LIKE): Harvey Kim.

Pu‘u Kälä Nui (Principal Funding): Ke‘ena Lawelawe Pono ‘Öiwi ‘Amelika (Administration for Native Americans) a

me ka Hui Lawelawe Hale Hö‘ike‘ike a Hale Waihona Puke (Institute of Museum and Library Services) ma lalo

nä mea ‘elua o ke aupuni Pekelala (both of the Federal government) a me Nä Kula ‘o Kamehameha

(Kamehameha Schools).

Nä kuleana kope ‘ë a‘e: Nä unuhi ‘ölelo Pelekänia ma

loko o ka waihona HEN (“Cultivating Wetland,” “The

Calendar of the Ancients of Hawai‘i and What It Was

Like,” a me “Concerning the Coconut Tree”), kuleana

kope © 2002 na ka Hale Hö‘ike‘ike o Kamehameha; ke

kulekele pela hö‘ano hou ma ka mo‘olelo o Kahahana,

kuleana kope © 1996 na ka ‘Ahahui ‘Ölelo Hawai‘i; ka

unuhi ‘ölelo Pelekänia ma ka mo‘olelo o Kahahana,

kuleana kope © 1961, 1992 na Nä Kula ‘o

Kamehameha; i ho‘oponopono a pa‘i hou ‘ia ma ‘ane‘i;

a me ke ki‘i o ka moena makaloa ma ke kä‘ei kua o ka

‘ili o mua, kuleana kope © 2002 na David Franzen.

Mahalo i ko ka Hale Hö‘ike‘ike o Kamehameha no ko

läkou ho‘olako ‘ana mai i nä palapala HEN a me ka

‘ae ‘ana mai ho‘i e ho‘ohana ‘ia ia mau palapala i

ho‘okuleana kope ‘ia: Duane Wenzel, Luna Ho‘omalu

a me ka Mea Mälama Palapala Kahiko; DeSoto Brown,

Mea Mälama Palapala Kahiko; a me Patty Belcher läua

‘o Janet Short, nä Kahu Puke Noi‘i.

Mahalo i ko ka ‘Ahahui ‘Ölelo Hawai‘i no ko läkou

ho‘olako ‘ana mai i ke kulekele pela hö‘ano hou no

ka mo‘olelo o Kahahana a me ka ‘ae ‘ana mai ho‘i e

ho‘ohana ‘ia nä palapala i ho‘okuleana kope ‘ia:

Other copyrights: The original English materials from

the HEN collection (“Cultivating Wetland,” “The

Calendar of the Ancients of Hawai‘i and What It Was

Like,” and “Concerning the Coconut Tree”), copyright

© 2002 by Bishop Museum; the original contemporary

standardized orthography text used for the Kahahana

story, copyright © 1996 by ‘Ahahui ‘Ölelo Hawai‘i; the

original English text used for the Kahahana story,

copyright © 1961, 1992 by Kamehameha Schools; all

revised and reprinted here; and the background cover

photograph of a makaloa mat, copyright © 2002 by

David Franzen.

Bishop Museum staff members Duane Wenzel, Library

C h a i r m an /Registrar; DeSoto Brown, Archivist; Patty

Belcher and Janet Short, Reference Librarians; are

thanked for assisting in the accessing of the HEN

materials and the use of Bishop Museum–copyrighted

d o c u m e n t s .

Hailama Farden, President, and Kalani Akana,

Treasurer, both of ‘Ahahui ‘Ölelo Hawai‘i (the

Hawaiian Language Association); and Puakea

Nogelmeier, author, are all thanked for assisting in

Larry Kimura, Ka Haka ‘Ula O Ke‘elikölani (College of Hawaiian Language), Ke Kulanui o Hawai‘i ma

Hilo (University of Hawai‘i at Hilo)

Ke‘ala Kwan, Nä Kula ‘o Kamehameha (Kamehameha Schools)

Naomi Losch, Ke‘ena ‘Ölelo Hawai‘i (Hawaiian Language Section), Ke Kulanui o Hawai‘i ma Mänoa

(University of Hawai‘i at Mänoa)

Daviana McGregor, Ethnic Studies Department, Ke Kulanui o Hawai‘i ma Mänoa (University of Hawai‘i

at Mänoa)

‘Alika McNicoll, ‘Aha Pünana Leo (Language Nest Organization)

Puakea Nogelmeier, Ke‘ena ‘Ölelo Hawai‘i (Hawaiian Language Section), Ke Kulanui o Hawai‘i ma

Mänoa (University of Hawai‘i at Mänoa)

Hiapo Perreira, Ka Haka ‘Ula O Ke‘elikölani (College of Hawaiian Language), Ke Kulanui o Hawai‘i ma

Hilo (University of Hawai‘i at Hilo)

Nämaka Rawlins, ‘Aha Pünana Leo (Language Nest Organization)

Kalena Silva, luna o ke kömike (committee chair), Ka Haka ‘Ula O Ke‘elikölani (College of Hawaiian

Language), Ke Kulanui o Hawai‘i ma Hilo (University of Hawai‘i at Hilo)

William Souza, Leo Kaiäulu Hawai‘i (Native Hawaiian Community Based Education Learning Center)

Kamoa‘e Walk, Ka Hälau Nui a Hawai‘iloa (Jonathan Näpela Center for Hawaiian Language and Culture

Studies), Ke Kulanui ‘o Brigham Young - Hawai‘i (Brigham Young University - Hawai‘i)

Puanani Wilhelm, ‘Oihana Ho‘ona‘auao o Hawai‘i (State Department of Education)

Pila Wilson, Ka Haka ‘Ula O Ke‘elikölani (College of Hawaiian Language), Ke Kulanui o Hawai‘i ma Hilo

(University of Hawai‘i at Hilo)

Kahu Pünaewele (Web Master): Keola Donaghy, Ka Haka ‘Ula O Ke‘elikölani (College of Hawaiian Language), Ke

Kulanui o Hawai‘i ma Hilo (University of Hawai‘i at Hilo)

Mea Pa‘i Ki‘i (Journal Photographer): John Lutfey

Mea Ho‘onohonoho (Journal Designer): Barbara Pope Book Design

‘Enehana Puke Pai (Journal Production): Grass Shack Productions

Ho‘opuka ‘ia e ka Hale Pa‘i o Nä Kula ‘o Kamehameha me ke kökua o ka Hale Pa‘i o Ke Kulanui o Hawai‘i no ALU

LIKE (Published by Kamehameha Schools Press in association with University of Hawai‘i Press for ALU LIKE)

Hale Pa‘i o Nä Kula ‘o Kamehameha (Kamehameha Schools Press): Henry Bennett, Luna Ho‘okele (Director)

Hale Pa‘i o Ke Kulanui o Hawai‘i (University of Hawai‘i Press):

Bill Hamilton, Luna Ho‘okele (Director)

Joel Bradshaw, Manakia Puke Pai (Journals Manager)

Lori Kozey, Luna Ho‘oponopono ‘Enehana (Production Editor)

Kahu Papahana (Project Administrator): Mähealani Merryman

Manakia Ho‘oponopono (Managing Editor): Bob Stauffer

Kökua Manakia Ho‘oponopono (Associate Managing Editor): Tuti Kanahele

Käkau ‘Ölelo Papahana (Project Secretaries):

Ku‘ualoha Kaeo

Crisna Magday

nä ‘ölelo ho‘omaika‘i 1 6 3

1 6 4 ka ho‘oilina: journal of hawaiian language sources ● march 2002

Hailama Farden, Pelekikena; Kalani Akana, Pu‘ukü; a

me Puakea Nogelmeier, mea käkau.

Mahalo iä Henry Bennett, ka Luna Ho‘okele o ka Hale

Pa‘i o Nä Kula ‘o Kamehameha, no ka ho‘olako ‘ana

mai i ka unuhi ‘ölelo Pelekänia o ka mo‘olelo o

Kahahana a me ka ‘ae ‘ana mai ho‘i e ho‘ohana ‘ia nä

palapala i ho‘okuleana kope ‘ia.

Mahalo iä David Franzen, he mea pa‘i ki‘i ‘oihana, no

ka ‘ae ‘ana mai e ho‘ohana i käna ki‘i i ho‘okuleana

kope ‘ia ma ke kä‘ei kua o ka ‘ili o mua.

Mahalo iä John Breinich, Luna Ho‘okele; Judy Kearney

a me Leilani Marshall, Kahu Puke Noi‘i, o ka Hale

Waihona Puke Lapa‘au o Hawai‘i no ka ho‘olako ‘ana

mai i kä Smith puke ‘anatomia (1834) me kä Judd

kikokikona ‘anatomia (1838), a me ka ‘ae ‘ana mai i

nä ki‘i kikoho‘e o kä Judd.

Mahalo iä Keiki Kawai‘ae‘a, Keola Donaghy a me nä

limahana o ka Hale Kuamo‘o o Ka Haka ‘Ula O

Ke‘elikölani, Kulanui o Hawai‘i ma Hilo no ko läkou

käko‘o mau mai me ka ‘olu‘olu.

the accessing of the contemporary standardized

orthography text of the Kahahana story and the use

of ‘Ahahui ‘Ölelo Hawai‘i–copyrighted materials.

Henry Bennett, Director, Kamehameha Schools Press,

is thanked for assisting in accessing of the English

translation of the Kahahana text and the use of

Kamehameha Schools–copyrighted material.

David Franzen, professional photographer, is thanked

for the use of his copyrighted photograph of a makaloa

mat for the background of the cover.

John Breinich, Director; Judy Kearney and Leilani

Marshall, Reference Librarians; all of the Hawai‘i

Medical Library, are thanked for assisting in the

accessing of the 1834 Smith anatomy textbook and

the 1838 Judd anatomy text, and allowing use of the

Hawai‘i Medical Library’s digital images of the latter.

Keiki Kawai‘ae‘a, Keola Donaghy and the staff of Hale

Kuamo‘o Hawaiian Language Center of Ka Haka ‘Ula

O Ke‘elikölani College of Hawaiian Language,

University of Hawai‘i at Hilo, are thanked for their

consistent support and good will.

He ho‘olele ‘ia nä palapala o Ka Ho‘oilina ma ka

pünaewele ma <http://hooilina.olelo.hawaii.edu>. Ma

laila nä ‘ikamu a pau o ka puke, nä ki‘i kikoho‘e o këlä

‘ikamu këia ‘ikamu a me ka waihona o nä mänaleo

Hawai‘i e heluhelu ana i këlä ‘ikamu këia ‘ikamu.

Ua noa i ka lehulehu äkea nä mea a pau ma loko o nei

puke pai i pa‘i ‘ia a i ho‘olele kahua pünaewele ‘ia ho‘i

me ke koina na‘e penei: Ke ho‘ohana ‘ia ka ‘ölelo

hö‘ano hou a unuhi ‘ölelo Pelekänia paha, e ho‘okomo

pü ‘ia i loko o ia kikokikona ho‘okahi a ma ke kuhia o

lalo paha, ka ‘ölelo kümole. He hö‘ike këia i ko nei

puke pai küpa‘a ma hope o ka waiwai nui o ka ‘ölelo

kümole ma ka ‘imi a ho‘omaopopo ‘ana i ka ‘ike.

No ka ‘ike hou e pili pü ana, e kipa i këia mau kahua

pünaewele:

ALU LIKE ma <http://www.alulike.org>.

Hale Waihona Puke ‘Öiwi Hawai‘i ma

< h t t p : / / w w w . a l u l i k e . o r g / p r o j e c t s / e d u c a / n h l p / n h l . h t m l > .

Hale Pa‘i o Nä Kula ‘o Kamehameha ma

<http://www.ksbe.edu/kspress/>.

Ke‘ena Puke Pai o ka Hale Pa‘i o Ke Kulanui o Hawai‘i

ma <http://www.uhpress.hawaii.edu/journals>.

Ka Ho‘oilina is being put on the Web at <http://hooilina

.olelo.hawaii.edu>. The site includes all Legacy

Materials published in the printed journal. Also

included are digital images of each original Legacy

piece, and MP3 files of native speakers reading each

piece aloud in Hawaiian.

All materials on the site are freely available and the

public is invited to download and use them with this

condition: Any quoted use of the contemporary stan-

dardized orthography or the English translation must

be accompanied in the same writing or in an associat-

ed footnote with a corresponding quoted copy of the

source orthography. This reflects this journal’s com-

mitment to recognizing the source orthography as

vital to accessing and understanding the materials of

the Hawaiian Legacy.

For other related information, visit these Web sites:

ALU LIKE at <http://www.alulike.org>.

Native Hawaiian Library at

< h t t p : / / w w w . a l u l i k e . o r g / p r o j e c t s / e d u c a / n h l p / n h l . h t m l > .

Kamehameha Schools Press at

<http://www.ksbe.edu/kspress/>.

University of Hawai‘i Press Journals Department at

<http://www.uhpress.hawaii.edu/journals>.

Inä paha ua ‘ike ‘ia he Palapala Ho‘oilina i loa‘a ‘ole

ma kekahi waihona palapala ma‘amau, e leka uila mai

i ke ke‘ena papahana, iä <rstauffer@alulike.org>, a i

‘ole, e leka mai i ka Papahana Ho‘oilina ‘Ölelo Hawai‘i

(Hawaiian Language Legacy Program), ALU LIKE, 567

South King Street, Suite 400, Honolulu, Hawai‘i 96813.

Helu kelepona: (808) 535-6743. Helu kelepa‘i: (808)

524-3744.

Inä paha ho‘i he ‘atikala, leka a ‘ano Palapala Ho‘oilina

‘ë a‘e paha kä kekahi, e ‘olu‘olu e ho‘omaopopo mai nö

i ke ke‘ena papahana.

Anyone aware of Legacy Materials not already held in

established archives is urged to contact the program's

office through e-mail at <rstauffer@alulike.org>, or

by regular mail at Papahana Ho‘oilina ‘Ölelo Hawai‘i

(Hawaiian Language Legacy Program), ALU LIKE, 567

South King Street, Suite 400, Honolulu, Hawai‘i 96813.

Phone (808) 535-6743. Fax (808) 524-3744.

Likewise, anyone who would like to suggest articles,

letters, or other types of Legacy Material worthy of

inclusion in this journal should feel free to contact the

program’s office.

Nä kumuwaiwai (RESOURCES)